CA1062290A - Value computing scale - Google Patents
Value computing scaleInfo
- Publication number
- CA1062290A CA1062290A CA312,635A CA312635A CA1062290A CA 1062290 A CA1062290 A CA 1062290A CA 312635 A CA312635 A CA 312635A CA 1062290 A CA1062290 A CA 1062290A
- Authority
- CA
- Canada
- Prior art keywords
- weight
- block
- register
- data
- zero
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Expired
Links
Landscapes
- Labeling Devices (AREA)
- Cash Registers Or Receiving Machines (AREA)
Abstract
ABSTRACT OF THE DISCLOSURE
Improved electronic apparatus for weighing, computing a value and printing a label showing the weight, the price per unit weight and the computed value of each of a plurality of successive commodities. An integrated circuit microcomputer is supplied with the article weight from a load cell scale and with the price per unit weight from a data input circuit including four data input buses for supplying price data. The micro-computer computes the value of successive weighed articles from the weight and price data, such data being supplied to the microcomputer on the four data input buses.
Interface circuitry is provided for multiplexing such data onto the four data input buses and includes four decoders, each having a single output connected to a different one of the data input buses. The microcomputer includes an arithmetic logic unit, data registers and a sequence controller which is programmed to cause the microcomputer to correct for scale errors, to check for no motion of the scale, to compensate the measured gross weight for any tare weight, to check various interlocks, to compute an article value and to cause a label to be printed for the article. Weight data from the microcomputer is supplied to a digital indicator and weight, price per unit weight and value data from the microcomputer is supplied to the printer. The keyboard includes a lock switch which must be manually actuated after new price data is supplied to the microcomputer to enable the microcomputer to supply the calculated value data for the weighed commodities to the printer.
Improved electronic apparatus for weighing, computing a value and printing a label showing the weight, the price per unit weight and the computed value of each of a plurality of successive commodities. An integrated circuit microcomputer is supplied with the article weight from a load cell scale and with the price per unit weight from a data input circuit including four data input buses for supplying price data. The micro-computer computes the value of successive weighed articles from the weight and price data, such data being supplied to the microcomputer on the four data input buses.
Interface circuitry is provided for multiplexing such data onto the four data input buses and includes four decoders, each having a single output connected to a different one of the data input buses. The microcomputer includes an arithmetic logic unit, data registers and a sequence controller which is programmed to cause the microcomputer to correct for scale errors, to check for no motion of the scale, to compensate the measured gross weight for any tare weight, to check various interlocks, to compute an article value and to cause a label to be printed for the article. Weight data from the microcomputer is supplied to a digital indicator and weight, price per unit weight and value data from the microcomputer is supplied to the printer. The keyboard includes a lock switch which must be manually actuated after new price data is supplied to the microcomputer to enable the microcomputer to supply the calculated value data for the weighed commodities to the printer.
Description
aQ.62~so , .
.. CROSS-REF,E~E~C$ TO RELATED,P~TENT APP~IC~TIO~ -Thi~ appl~cat~on is related ~o Canadian application Sarial ~o,-212,5B7, filed Octobar 29, 1974.
Thl~ application discloses ~eatures claimed in and also claim~ featur~s discloQed ~n the following copending . Canadian patent applicationss the ap~lication o R. C. Lo~hbough,.~ , Ser~al ~o. 251,3~6 ~iled April 2g, 1976 ~or "Motion Detecting ,i Scale" which application is r~la~ed to the prior filed applica-tion Seri~l ~o~ 212,623 fil2d Octobar ~0, lg74 and now abandoned~
the application of R. C. Loshbough et al, S~rlal No. 251,492 i f~led April 29, 1976 for nWeight Measuring ~par~t~ which appl~-cat~on i9 r~lated to ~h~ pr~or ~iled ~pplicatlon Ser~al No.
212,706 flled Octob~r 30, 1974 and now abandoned5 th~ applica- --~, 25 t~o~ of G. D. Roba~k~ew~c~, 8erial No. 251,377 filed Aprll 29, ;, 1976 for ~Apparatu~ ~or I~olatlng ~rrors ln Printed Re~ords~
~hidh appl~cat~on is related to the pr~or f~led appl~catlon S~r~al ~lo. 212,704 f~led October 30, 1974~ ~he appllcation o~ -D. I.~-Ball, 8er~a~ ~o. 251,378 flled A~?r~l 2g, 1976 for, "W~lgh t ~aeuring And Inalcat$ng ~ppaxatu~" which application i~
~ , ~
. . ' ' . ', :.' . .
ral~od ~o tho prior ~ 3d appllcatlon Sarial N~. 212, 690 ~ a oc~cob~r 30, 197~t and n~ b.~ndonct~ th~ ~p~l~cat~on o~ R. C.
I~o~l~bough et al, S~rl~l No. 251,420 ~iled ~prll 29, lg76 for "6cale wlth l~anual Tare Enl:~y" which appllcation 1~ rel~1 od to S the prior ~led zpplica'cioI~ ~erial No. 21~,6~6 fll~d Octc~bar 30, 197~ and now ~bandoncd~ thQ a~plication o~ G. ~. ~o~a~z~siowicz, ~erial ~o. 251,41~ ~iled ~pril 29, 197~ ~or "Claar and ~as~car~
Arrang~nent ~or Digltal ~ca~uring ~pparatus " whlch applicatlon i~ r~lat~d to th~ pr~o~ ~iled t~pplicatlon Serial l~o. 212,691 ~:
~ d Octob~ 30, 1974 and now abandonad.
BAcKGRau~D OF ~ VE~TION
Thi~ invention ralatas to we~ight mea~ur~ng ar~d V~llU8 com~uti~ ~pparatus ~nd more paxtlcularly to improved ~ paratus ~or weighing, computing a value and printing an article lab~
~how~ng tbs weight, price per un~t weight and computed ~alue o~
each o~ a plurality of successive articles.
In recent ysar~ the demand for increased efficiency has creatad the need fer high speed measuring apparatu~ capable o~
~0 automatically weighing succes~ive article~ and, for each woighed ar~icle, computlnq a value ba~ed upon a predeterminod price per ~nit weight an~ print~ng an article lab~l bearing ~uch welght, pr~ce per unit weight ana computed value. Such mea~uring : apparatu~ ~ comm~nly used,. for example, in ~upermarket meat departments. ~ter a butcher cut~ and divide~ meat lnto package port~ons, the meat may be automat~cally packaged and subGaguently ., .
labsled by automatlc weigh~ mea~uring, valu~ computing and label ~r~nting app~ratu~. .
In ~e past, appara'cu~ for w~ighing an ~rt~cle, com-~uti~g un art~cle price an~ prlntlng ~n ar~lcle la~el haYe ., .
. - 2 ~
.
, 1062~90 included a combination of mechanical, optical and electrical element~. A typical prior art system of this type is described in United States Patent 3,384,193 which issued on May 21, 1968 to William C. Susor et al and United States Patent 3,453,422 which issued on July 1, 1969 to William C. Susor. This system includes a mechanical-optical scale which generates a digital signal corresponding to an article weight. A computer multiplies the measured weight by a price per unit weight, using a partial products method of multiplication, to obtain the article's value.
~ 10 The measured weight data, the price data and the computed value data are then supplied to a printer for producing an article label. The system is provided with various interloc~s which reduce the chances of printing erroneous labels or multiple labels for a single article. For example, if the price per unit weight or the tare weight data are changed, a "lock" switch must be manually pushed to prevent accidental changes in thls data.
A la~el cannot be printed if the weight or the computed value exceed the capa~ility of the system. After a label is printed, another interlock prevents printing the next label until the printed label is removed from the printer for application to the ; article. The system also includes a scale no motion detector .
which inhibits computing an article value and printing a label until the measured wei~ht reaches a steady state.
Although systems of this type have been extremely successful, there-has been a need for faster-operating and more accurate systems. Since the prior systems generally have included mechanical-optical devices for performing the weight measurement, periodic maintenance is required to maintain the mechanical linkages and the optical components in peak operating conditions. Furthermore, the systems must be manually checked . ' ... . .
.~, ' , . . .
and set to zero whcn an article ls not present on the ~cale platform. Some prlor art ~ystems also have been cnpable of produclng errors of as much as several pennies in the calculated srticle value.
SUMMARY OF T~IE INVENTION
In accordance with the present invention, electronic apparatus is provided for successively measuring the weight of articles to be labeled, for computing an article value from each measured weight and a price per unit weight supplied to the apparatus, and, for each weighed article, fo~ printing a label bearing the measured weight, the computed value and the price per unit weight used for computing such value. The apparatus is capable of operating at a high speed with a high degree of accuracy in the measured weight and the computed value.
Specifically, the present invention relates to a : computing and printing weighing scale comprising, in combination, an integrated circuit microcomputer, load cell means for supplying weight data and data input means including four ., , - ...
data input buses for supplying price data. The microcomputer computes the value of successive weighed articles from the - weight and price data, such data being supplied to the micro-computer on the four data input buses. Interface means are , provided for multiplexing such data onto the four data input buses and includes four decoders, each having a single output connected to a different one of the data input buses.
The article weight measurements are made by means of an electronic scale including at least one load cell for producing an analog signal proportional to the article weight ant an analog-to-digital converter for converting the analog . , .
_ 4 _ ~vb/mb 106Z'~90 weight signal into a digital format. The measured artlcle welght is compensated for any tare welght and for scale zero errors snd displayed on a digital indicator. Price per unit welght data i8 entered into the apparatus either through a manually operated keyboard or automatlcally from a commodlty plate in the label prlnter. The commodity plate carrles printlng type for printlng the commodity or article name on the label and coded price per unit weight data which is automatically read by the apparatus. When desired or required, a tare weight is supplied to the apparatus either through the keyboard or automatically from the scale for use in obtaining a net weight which is in turn used in ' :
: :
- - - ~ 4a -~vb~mb 10~;2'~9C~
computing the commodity value. The appara~us may also include a "price by count" mode of operation wherein labels are printed for article~ sold as so many for a particular price, such as six oranges for one dollar. Normally no weight measurement is used in printing the label in this operating mode.
The digital weight data, tare weight data and the price per unit weight data are multiplexed through an interface to an integrated circuit microcomputer which calculates the article value and controls the operating cycle of the apparatu.s.
Timing circuitry is provided to assure normal, periodic cycling of the microcomputer. Under normal operation, a value is com-puted and is multiplexed with the weight and price per unit weight data through the interface to the printer which is activated to print a label. Weight data is also multiplexed through the interface to the digital weight indicator. ~o label is printed if various interlocks and conditions exist. All interlocks normally found in apparatus of this type are provided for .. .
assuring accurate operation of the system. One interlock ' includes a lo-ck switch which must be manually actuated each time the price per unit weight data is changed before new ~ commodity values will be calculated and labels will be printed.
"7 , In addition, the scale is automatically zeroed to within a fraction of one weight graduation prior to computing a value.
, Provisions are made for expanding the displayed weight by one q 25 decimal or least significant digit to check operation of the scale automatic zeroing circuitry. A digital no motion detector is also responsive to a fraction of one significant weight digit for inhibiting label printing in the event that the scale output ~ .
' :, '.
. ,~
:, -_ s lOf~Z~290 is not within a predet~mined no motion band for a predetermined time intervaL.
When desirable or required, a tare weight is supplied to the apparatus either through a keyboard or automatically for s obtaining a net weight which is used in computing the article value. At least some of the tare weight keys are cumulative when the keys are pushed within a predetermined time interval.
If the time interval between the successive operation of the tare keys is exceeded, the last tare key pushed represents the total tare weight entered into the apparatus.
Circuitry including a manual switch is provided for selectively displaying the price per unit weight data or the computed value data from the microcomputer on the weight display.
The displayed data is then compared with the printed data for isolating the source of any error.
Accordingly, it is an object of the invention to provide electronic apparatus for successively measuring the weight of articles to be labeled, for computing a value for each ~ -weighed article and for printing a label for each weighed article.
Other objects and advantages of the invention will become apparent from the following detailed description, with reference being made to the accompanying drawings.
.
.::
~- BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
~ .
~`' 25 Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of apparatus embodying the principles of the present invention for weighing, computing a value and printing a label showing the weight, price per unit weight and computed value of each of a plurality of ~; successive articles;
- 6 -- . - . .
- ~0~;2Z90 Fig. 2, composed of Figs. 2A - 2J, shows a flow diagram illustratiny the operating sequence of apparatus embodying the principles of the present invention;
Fig. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a switch arrangement for entering data into apparatus for weighing, computing a value and printing a label for each of a plurality ; of successive articles;
Fig. 3A shows a multiplex interface between the analog-to-digital converter and the microcomputer multiplex input interface.
; Fig. 4, composed of Figs. 4A - 4C, is a schematic logic diagram of circuitry for controlling the operating sequence and computing a value in apparatus for weighing, com-puting a value and printing a labçl for each of a plurality of successive articles;
Fig. 5 is a schematic logic diagram showing multi-... . .
-~ plexing circuitry for supplying data to a digital weight display;
Fig. 6 is a bloc~ diagram of a printer for use in ~-apparatus accbrding to the present invention; and Fig. 7 is a diagram of one possible memory location arrangement in the random access memory in the microcomputer of the exemplary apparatus of the present invention.
. ' ' , .
' DESCRIPTION OF AN EXEMP~ARY EMBODIMENT
,,~,r' 25 Referring now to the drawings and particularly to Fig. 1, a block diagram is shown of apparatus 10 embodving the principles of the present invention for weighing articles and, , for each weighed article, for computing a value based upon a -predetermined price per unit weight and subsequently printing .
an article label bearing the weight, the price per unit weight a~d the computed value for the article. The weight of each article is measured by a scale 11. Although the scale 11 may be of various known designs using mechanics, optics and electronics, it is preferably an electronic scale of the typeshown in United States Patcnt 3,709,~09 which issucd on January 9, 1973 to Williams, Jr. et al.
The scale 11 generally comprises a load cell 12 which generates an analog output signal proportional to the weight of an article placed on a platter or weight platform 13. The analog output from the load cell 12 is applied to an analog-to-digital converter 14 which has a digital output corresponding to the gross weight of the article on the platter 13. The digital weight signal from the converter 14 is preferably in a binary coded decimal (BCD) format which is particularly desirable for use in computing an article value. The binary coded deci~al (ECD) format comprises four binary digits for each decimal digit. The weights given to the binary digits are 1, 2, 4, 8 respectively of each decimal digit. The converter 14 may be arranged to provide any desired number of decimal digits, depending upon the maxim~m weight to be weighed on the scale and also upon an increment represented by the least significant decimal digit. In the ~, "^! exemplary emkodiment described herein, as well as in the exemplary embodiment set forth in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al, it is assumed that five decim~l digits will be supplied by the analog-to-digital converter 14.
, The above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al discloses circuitry for automatically cancelling unw~.~ed direct - current signals from the direct current or analog signals from the load cell, sensor, transducer, or strain gauge. In addition, this patent discloses circuitry for aut atically zeroing the analog portion of the system while the transducer output is mamentarily interrupted and for filling in gaps in the analog signal resulting from interruption of the transducer or strain gauge output.
mb/~ 8 --~ s ~xplaincd in the above-identiEied patent to Willi~ns, Jr. et al, it i5 sometimes desirable to indicate a negative weight from the overall arrangement from the scale load cell through the converter and digital control arrangement.
Thus, when the scale has been corrected to read net weight and the container and the commodity are both rernoved from the platter, the scale should indicate a negative weight equal to ; the weight of the container which is the tare weight for which the scale has been adjusted. The overall arrangement in accor-dance with the exemplary embodiment of this invention is accordingly arranged to indicate a negative weight under these circumstances and also under other conditions described herein.
However, the arrangement for making the various analog corrections described in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al do not prevent the zero output display of the scale from varying or wandering in a random manner.
In accordance with the present invention, the digital output or display from the scale mechanism is further corrected in the manner described herein to correct for the random wandering :
; 20 of the zero display of the scale.
A digital weight signal from the scale 11 is applied to a control unit 15 through interface circuits of Fig. 3A and circuits 24 of Fig. 48. The control unit 15 includes an input/
output buffer and memory 16 which receives the digital weight ;
data through the interface circuits of Fig. 3A and the circuits 24 from the scale 11. Data input switches 17 are also connected to the input/output buffer and memory 16. The data input switches 17 include a ~anually operated keyboard for entering price data, a printer mode switch and tare weight . 30 switches. The input/output buffer and memory 16 functions as ~n ; interface with an arithmetic logic unit 18. A sequence controller 19 causes the arithmetic logic unit 18 and data memory or _ g _ :
. - . - : . .................... . .
. - . .. .
registers 20 to compute the value of each weighed artiele and to supply such value through the input/output buffer and me~ory 16 to a printer 21. l'he arithmetic logie unit 18, the sec~u~nce eontroller 19 and the data registers 20 are preferably ineluded in an integrated eireuit microcomputer, as will be discussed in greater detail belc~.
m e value is ec ~ uted from a price per unit weight `~ which is obtained either from the data input switches 17 or from a cc~mmodity plate inserted-into the printer 21. m e cc~nmodity plate automatically supplies price informatian to the input/output buffer 16 in a ma~ner similar to that described in United States Patent 3,459,272 which issued to Susor on August 5, 1969. m e cx~nmodity plate ineludes raised type for use in printing the ec~Smodity or article name on a label. Price per unit weight information is eneoded on the eommodity plate by means of the presenee or absence of a plurality of holes~or notches at pre-determined loeations. An optieal or other~suitable type of reader is provided in the printer 21 for sensing the presence or absence of the holes and for eonverting the priee per unit weight information to a BCD output. q'he weight data from the .~
~ scale is eorreeted for any tare weight and zero error by the . .
arithmetie logie unit 18 and supplied to the printer 21 and to a digital weight display 22. After a steady state weight reading is reeeived by the logie unit 15 from the seale 11, the sequence eontroller 19 eauses the arithmetie logie unit 18 to compute an article value. me computed artiele value, the net artiele weight and the priee per unit weight information are used by the printer 21. The sequenee controller 19 controls data output to the printer and initiates printing a labèl.
, :, -.:
lO~Z290 ~ ft~r n lnb~l ifi prin~n~, the s~quen~ controllor lg will normal~ ir,hibit the arlthm~tlc 1Gg1C unit 18 untll the label haQ b(sen removed ~rom the pr~nter 21 and n mot~on - no ~otion cycle ha~ appeared on the sc~le 11 to lndic~te ~hat ~he S weig~ed Articl~ ha~ b0~n rcmoved ~n~ a n~w artlcle has been placed on the scalQ 11. Tho Bequence controller 19 may ~l~o ~nhlblt the arithmstic logic unit 18 in ths ev~nt o~ the occur-rence o~ variou~ conditlons. Yor example, 1~ th-3 prico c)r tEIro lnformation i~ changed, the apparatus 1~ i~ adapted to go into -a "lock" condition whlch prevents prlnting ~ lab~l until a "loclc" swltch is man~lally actuated to extingui~h an indicator li~h~. Such an lnterlocX prevent~ an accidental change in price or tare welght data, as wh~n an operator acc~dentally bu~p~ one of t~e switches 17. Anoth~r interlock may be provided to pre-. :
15 vent print~ng a label lf data print wheels are not properly -.
~et up to the correct value, weight and price data. 8till anoSher interlock may pr6vent printing an erroneous labcl ~n the event that either the maxl~um weight capacity of the scals i 11 or the maxImum value capacity ha~ baen exceeded. ~ -For convenience, the apparatu~ 10 i8 ~dapted for : .
operating ln several dlfferent modes. The dif~erent mode~ of op~ratlon a~ect the mannor in which the printor 21 prints a label. Iho data lnput ~witches 17 include the modo switch w~ich permlts ~lecting either ~lngle~, ~dom~nd" or a ~continuou~ mode of operatlon ~or prlnting labels ln which the value $~ computed for each weighed articlo. ~n th- ~ingla m~de of operatlon, the apparatus 10 must be manually a¢tu~ted for each label which i8 prlnted. ~n the demand mode of opera-tlon, a n~w l~bel i8 printQd each time a printed label i8 removed from ~he prir.ter 21 and tho scalo 11 ha~ gone through n motlon - no ~otlon c~clo to C~UBe the comput~tion of a n~w valu9.
.
- , ' .
, In the continuous Inode o operation, the printer 21 will con-tinuously print la~els all hearing the same weight, price per unit weight and value. ~rhe mode switcll may further include "price by count" modes of "cinyle", "demand" and "continuous".
In the price by count mode of operation, the printer 21 will print labels bearing a count or factor of the number of pieces in each article or package to be labeled and the total price for this number of pieces. For example, a grocery store may package six oranges or six pears together. If the package price is, for 10 example, six for $1.29, then the label will be printed bearing the legend "$1.29" in the place of the article valu~ and "6/$1.29l' in place of the price per unit weight.
In the following description of an exemplary embodi-ment of the present invention, it is assumed that the automatic 15 zero correction feature will work within a range of -0.005 pounds - and ~0.005 pounds. However, these limits may obviously be changed to any desired value. In addition, an expanded range switch or button is provided which will allow the zero correcting feature to operate within other weight limits. For example, by 20 operating this expanded range button under certain circumstances, the automatic zero correcting arrangement may be employed to correct in the range from 0.105 pounds and 0.095 pounds. However, the arrangement in accordance with this invention is also arranged to prevent any operation of the zero correcting arrangement if t . ..
25 the indication of the weight on the scale platter or pan exceeds 0.6 pounds.
Also, a ready lamp or other indicator is provided which is turned on when indication from the scale is within - +0.002 pounds and -0.002 pounds for a predetermined interval of ; 30 time. The lamp is employed to indicate that the scale is properly corrected and in condition to weigh another object or commodity. The automatic zero wander correction does not stop at 0.002 pounds, but continues on to be corrected to zero , - ,.......... . . . ..
: . .. . . .: . -.
accuxately. The automatically operated correcting feature operates sufficiently rapid so that correction will all be completed prior to the time the ready lamp is turned on and thus prior to the time an object or commodity to be weighed is placed on the platter or pan to be weighed.
It is obvious that the predetermined limits of -0.002 and +0.002 pounds, +O.OOS pounds and -0.005 pounds and the limits of 0.6 and -0.6 pound have been ar~itrarily set or selected and that any other set of suitable limits may be selected and provided by obvious minor changes in the control equipment in accordance with the present invention.
Turning now to Figs. 2A through 2J, a flow diagram is -shown for an exemplary operating sequence of the apparatus lO for measuring the weight of an article, computing from the measured lS weight and a price per unit weight the article value and printing an article label. The flow diagram consists of a series of diamonds or rhombuses and rectangles. Each diamond zorresponds to a question having either a yes or a no answer which may be ;1~ obtained by conventional methods. Each rectangular block cor-i~ 20 responds to the performance of a specific function such as ;~ causing a label to be printed. The numbers placed in the circles to the top and left of the blocks represent input locations.
For example, an "A2" in a circle on the left of the flow diagram in Fig. 2A represents an input to the second biock from the top in sheet A of Fig. 2. The numbers in the circles to the right ` of the blocks in the flow diagram represent an output connected to a different location in the flow diagram. For example, the , first or uppermost block in Fig. 2A has an output to "El" if the answer to the question is no. This indicates that if the J 30 answer is no, a jump is made to El or the input on the first .,, ~
' block in sheet E of Fig. 2.
., :~
. .
1062~90 For convcllience, Fig. 2 has been ~eparated into parts A through J. Generally spec~king, Fig. 2A covers the basic cycling of the app~ratus 10. Upon the occurrence of a predetermined sequence of conditions, the cycle is completed with a print pulse.
S Fig. 2B represents the logic of a check of various interlocks for the occurrence of new data. Fig. 2C shows the seguence of opera-tions for the operation of the lock switch which must be pressed when data is changed and the printer 21 is in the "single" mode of operation. Fig. 2D shows the logic for checking the setting of the service switch which affects the weight display 22 and for checking for the presence of excess weight and excess value.
Fig. 2E generally represents the operation of the scale motion detector. Fig. 2F shows the operation of the "expand" switch which permits checking the accuracy of scale zero and of the auto~zero capture range expand switch. Fig. 2G shows the opera-tion of the auto-zero correction circuitry, of the price by count logic and of the value computation. Fig. 2H shows the m~mer in which the condition of value, price and weight blanki~g switches are checked and the sequence in which the outputs are actually blanked. Fig. 2I shows the manner in which tare weight is manually entered into the apparatus 10. Fig. 2J shows the sequence of operations for transferring weight signals from the analog-to-digital converter to the microcomputer.
As previously indicated, Fig. 2A shows the basic opera-ting cycle for the apparatus 10. Each new cycle is initiated at the input Al to a block 25. If motion has been present on the ` output from the scale 11 during the previous cycle of the apparatus 10, a motion flag MOT~F will be set. The motion flag MOT~F may, for example, consist of a bit stored in a memory or ~- 30 the state of a flip-flop or a latch. If the motion flag MOTNF
..
is not set, the logic jumps to the El input while if the motion flag MOT~F is set, the logic proceeds to a block 26. The logic must proceed through the block 26 before a label can be printed.
- 14 _ ' .
:: .
Thus, the ~lock 25 re~iir~s a mo~ion - no motion cycle before a label is printed. In the block 26, the presence o a motion flag MOTNF is again checked. If the flag is still present, the cycle again turns to the El input while if the flay is not present, the logic proceeds to a block 27 which checks to see if the printer is in a demand or continuous mode of operation as set on a mode switch. If the system is operating in a demand or continuous mode, the logic proceeds to the A5 input, while if it is in a single mode, logic proceeds to a block 28.
In the block 28, a check is made on whether or not the printer 21 is set up to inhibit the recognition of a motion - ~ -no motion function if a previously printed label has not been removed from the printer. If the motion detector is not inhibited, logic proceeds to A7 while if it is inhibited by the printer 21, .! 15 a check is made in block 29 on whether or not a new weight measurement is required by the printer 21 due to a lack of veri-~1 fication in the data supplied to the printer 21. If a reweigh is required, the logic proceeds to A7 while if reweigh is not required, a block 30 checks to see if print data is stored in ~ -the printer 21. If print data is stored, the system returns to Al while if print data is not stored, it proceeds to a block 31 which checks on whether or not a "no tare weight" key has been pressed. If the no tare key is pressed, a block 32 checks to see if the price per pound data is equal to zero. If the price per pound data is equal to zero, a block 33 outputs a "print"
-, pulse to the printer 21 for printing a label and the cycle returns to Al. This function is provided to allow printing of labels ~hen the weight is equal to or less than 0.1 pound, for testing.
If either the no tare key is not pressed or the price per pound is not equal to zero, the system proceeds from the blocks 31 or 32, respectively, to a block 34 which checks to see if the net weight from the scale 11 is greater than 0.1 pound. If the net weight is not greater than 0.1 pound, it is :............... -- . .
10622gO
assumed that an article is not present on the scale platform 13 and the system returns to Al. If an article greater than one-tenth pound is present on the ~cale platorm 13, a block 35 checks to see if a SET latch or flip-flop is true. If it is true, it S indicates that the system interlocks have been broken and the cycle returns to Al. If SET is not true, a block 36 checks to see if the net weight is positive. If the net weight should for any reason be negative, such as when a tare weight is entered into the apparatus lO and a pac~age or article has not yet been placed upon the scale platform 13, the cycle returns to Al. If the net weight is positive, a block 37 checks to see if an OVERCAP latch or flip-flop is true. OVERCAP is trued when the weight capacity of the apparatus lO has been exceeded.
For the following description, it will be assumed that ' 15 the apparatus iO is capable of measuring up to thirty pounds so that OVERCAP will be true if a weight greater than thirty pounds ` is pLaced upon the scale platform 13. If OVERCAP is true, the cycle returns to Al. If the capacity of the apparatus lO has not been exceeded, a "print" pulse is outputed at a block 38.
From block 38 control is returned to Al. When the control is transferred to A15, block 39 causes the system to read all external inputs including the mode switch, the tare weight switches, the price switches, the price by count switches, the auto-price input from the printer and any weig~t input from the scale ll. After the external inputs are read, a block 40 checks to see if the apparatus lO is in a "price by count" mode. If ~ the apparatus lO is in the price by count mode, logic proceeds to `~ B3 while if it is not in this mode, a block 41 checks to see if auto-price data has been received from the printer 21. As pre-viously indicated, the auto-price data may be supplied from a commodity plate inserted into the printer 21. If auto-price data is received from the printer 21, a block 42 checks to see if the price data during the last cycle was also auto-price data , . . -:
. - . . . . . .
1~6ZZ9O
received from the print~r 21. If not, the system pxoceeds to B7. If the last price was also from the printer, a block 43 reads and stores the auto-prlce data inputs from the printer 2i.
m e system then proceeds to Bl.
Turning now to Fig 2B, the logic is shown for checking the various interlocks. From the input Bl, a block 46 checks for correct parity in auto-price data received from the printer.
If there is a parity error, the logic proceeds to B7. If there is no parity error, the logic proceeds to a block 47. If the printer 21 is operating in a manual mode, the diagram in Fig. 2B
is entered through B2, wherein a block 48 checks on whether or not the last cycle was also in the manual mode. If not, the cycle proceeds to B7 while if the last cycle was also manual, the logic also proceeds to the block 47. The block 47 checks on whether or not the price data input has changed. If no change has occurred, a block 49 checks an interlock on the ; printer door. If the printer door is open,-the logic proceeds to B7 while if it is not open, a check is made by a block 50 on i~ whether or not an auto-zero inhibit signal is received from the printer 21. If no inhibit signzl is received, the cycle pro-` ceeds to B8.
Returning to the block 47, if the price input data haschanged, at a block 51 the new price input data is moved to a price per pound output memory, hereinafter referred to as 25 "P/LB OUT". The cycle then proceeds to a block 52 and an inter-lock flag I~TF is set. The cycle also proceeds to the block 52 from the block 50 if an auto-zero inhibit is received from the printer 21. The interlock flag I~TF may consist of the setting of a latch or a flip-10p or a bit stored in a memory. The presence of the flag indicates the occurrence of an interlock such as a change in the printer mode, the opening of the printer door or the presence of an auto-zero inhibit signal. After the interlock flag INTF is set at the block 52, a block 53 checks to ~' . ' ' ' ' ' .
10622gOsee if an "auto-tare" switch hcl~ been actuated. If not, the logic proceeds to Il for manually entering a tare weight. If the auto-tare switch has been pushed, a block 54 updates the tare weight by storing the current measured weight in a TARE memory and again sets the interlock flag INTF. A block 55 then checks to see if the print mode has changed. If not, the logic proceeds to B12 while if the mode has changed, a block 56 updates a "print mode out" signal which indicates when the printer 21 is in the demand or continuous modes of operation. A check is then made at a block 57 to see if the interlock flag INTF is set. If not, the logic jumps to Cl. If the interlock flag INTF was set, ~ -a block 58 clears the interlock flag I~TF and sets an "initialize"
flag I~ITF. Thus, the initialize flag I~ITF is set whenever either the price input or the tare weight input has changed. This flag inhibits the printing of a label until the lock switch is manually actuated, thus preventing an erroneous change in the tare weight or price data. After the initialize flag I~IT~ is - set, a block 59 trues the SET latch to indicate that the inter-locks hav~ been broken and the system proceeds to C5.
Fig. 2C shows logic relating to operation of the lock switch which must be actuated when the initialize flag I~ITF is set. A block 62 checks to see if the initialize flag I~ITF is set. If not, the cycle jumps to C5. If the initialize flag IWITF is set, a block 63 checks to see if the mode switch is in the demand or continuous mode. If the mode switch is in either of these modes, the cycle again proceeds to C5. If not, -a block 64 checks to see if the lock switch is pressed. If not, the cycle proceeds to C5. If the lock switch is pressed, a block 65 clears the initialize flag INITF and clears the SET
latch and continues with the C5 input to a block 66. The block 66 returns the cycle back to either Al or A2, whichever was the original point of origin for arriving to the block 66.
.
., .
-The logic o~ Fig. 2D chec}cs the setting of a service switch which permits isolatiny price and value errors in printed labels between the pxinter and the logic unit which c~lculates and stores this data, and also checks ~or the presence of either an excessive weiyht or an excessive value which may cause an error in the output from the apparatus 10. From the Dl input, a block 6g checks to see if the service switch is in a "display price" position. If so, a block 70 transfers the price data stored in the P/~B OUT memory into a WEIGHT OUT memory wherein such price data is displayed on the digital weight di~play 22.
If the service switch was not in the "display price" position, a block 71 checks to see if the service switch is in the "display value" position. If not, the cycle proceeds to D3 ~hile if it is in this position, the cycle proceeds to a block 72 which causes a transfer of value data stored in a VALUE OUT memory into the WEIGHT OUT memory for displaying the value data on the digital weight display 22. Thus, if an error is present in the price shown on the printed label and the service switch is in the display price position, a comparison may readily be made between the prlce appearing on the digital weight display 22 and the price appearing on the printed label. If these ~rices are not identical, the serviceman will know that the error is due to ~, a fault in the printer 21. If the data is identical, the service-man will know that the error is caused in the logic unit 15. A
similar check may be made on the computed value.
~ The D3 input as well as tLe outputs from the blocks 70 - a~d 72 are applied to a block 73 which turns on a "ZERO" light.
-` The ZERO light indicates that the scale is properly zeroed to within 1/4 of the least significant displayed weight digit.
A block 74 then outputs all data and the printer mode to the printer 21. Subsequently, a block 75 checks to see if the ~ maximum value capacity of the apparatus 10 has been exceeded.
'' 19-- . . ~
If the maximum valu~ hc~s been exc~eded, a block 76 will set an OVERVALUE latch or flip-flop or store a bit in a memory location. After the block 76 has set OVERVALUE or if the logic jumped to D7 because the maximum value capacity was not exceeded, a block 77 checks to see if the maximum weight capacity of the scale 11 has been exceeded. If not, the cycle will proceed to C5 where it is returned to either Al or A2. If the maximum capacity of the scale 11 has been exceeded, a block 78 sets an OVERCAP latch or flip-flop or stores a bit in a memory location and an OVERCAPACITY flip~flop or ]atch is set to turn on an indicator light. The cycle then returns through C5 to either Al or A2.
In Fig. 2E, a check is made to see if weight data read from the sca]e ll is legitimate, i.e., no analog-to-digitai ; 15 conversion is occurring in the converter 14. If not, a check is made on whether or not a zero expand switch is actuated. If weight data is legitlmate, a motion check is made to see if the data has been consistent or steady for a predetermined number of cycies. -From an input El, a block 81 checks to see if a Tl flag is set. The Tl flag is set whenever new weight data has been read from the scale 11 into the logic unit 15. If the Tl flag is not set, a block 82 checks to see if a clock signal Tl is true. A true Tl represents a time interval during which weight ~ 25 data is not permitted to change. The apparatus 10 may, for `, example, operate on a 200 millisecond cycle. Tl may be set true for an arbitrary time interval, such as true for 60 milli-seconds out of each cycle and false for the remaining 140 milli-seconds. If Tl is true, logic proceeds from the block 82 to 30 E4, while if Tl is not true a block 83 sets the Tl flag and the logic proceeds to E4. At E4, a block 84 checks to see if a "zero expand" switch is actuated. If not, the logic returns to A15 while if the zero expand switch is actuated, a block 85 sets .
1062'~90 the interlock flag I~TF and the logic rcturns to A15. The zero expand switch is used for chec~ing the accuracy and adjusting the weight zero when no weight is present on the platform 13 on the scale 11. T~hen the zero expand switch i~ closed, the weight displayed on the digital weight display 22 is shifted by one decimal poin~. Thus, if the scale normally has a maximum reading of 30.00 pounds, the displayed weight will be shifted over to display X.XXX pounds or to display as low as l/lOOOth of a pound.
If the Tl flag TlF is set when the logic reaches the block 81, a block 86 checks to see if Tl is true. If not, the logic returns to E4. If Tl is true, a bloc~ 87 clears the Tl flag TlF. A block 88 then causes a weight reading to be entered - into the logic unit 15. Next block 96 causes the tare timer state to be read out from the tare timer storage space in the - 15 RAM 187. Then in accordance with block 97, if the count in the ; tare timer is not zero it is reduced by one as indicated in block 97A and the control advances to block 89. If the count recorded in the tare timer is zero the control advances directly to block 89. After the weight is read out and the tare timer decremented if required as described above, ~lock 89 checks the memory or switches for the setting of the motion detector count and the motion detector band. The motion detector count is the number of cycles or repetitions which must occur with no motion present before a label is printed. For example, switches may be set to establish that the apparatus 10 must cycle without motion at least twice or at least three times before a label can i be printed. The band is the amount of permissible change during a no motion condition. For example, it may be determined that ~- it is desirable to have a weight reading maintained within plus or minus 0.005 pound for a no motion condition. This results in a range of 0.01 pound for the motion detector regardless of the measured weight. This arrangement eliminates prior art problems in obtaining a uniform motion detector sen~itivity for all weight ._ measurements. Thc prior ar~ optical motion detectors have not had a uniform sensiti.vity. ~fter the count and band for the motion detector are determined, a block 90 calculates the weight minus the sum of the target plus the band. If this value is ; S positive, then motion is present. The block 90 also determines the weight minus the sum of the target minus the band. If this sum is negative, then motion also is present. The taryet is taken to be the last weight reading.
~; . If the block 90 calculates that there is motion, then a block 91 transfers the logic to Fl while if motion is not pres-ent, a block 92 checks to see if a motion flag MOTNF was set during the last cycle of the apparatus 10. If the motion flag is clear, logic proceeds to F2 while if a motion flag is present, a block 93 increments by one a no motion counter. After the coun-.. . .
ter is incremented, a block 94 compares the total count with theno motion count determined at the block 89. If the contents of the counter is not equal to or greater than this count, the cycle proceeds to F2 while if it is greater than or equal to the count, the motion flag MOT~F is cleared at a block 95. The cycle then proceeds to F2.
In Fig. 2F, sequence of operations is shown or the operating sequence of the zero expand, the auto-zero capture range expand and the weight overcapacity check. The Fl input, which is entered if motion is present, is applied to a block 98 which clears the no motion counter and sets the motion flag MOTNF.
~ After the flag is set, a block 99 updates the target and sub-t tracts a digital weight of eight pounds. The output from the ~;
load cell 12 and the scale 11 preferably is always positive since it is in a digital format. Some types of analog-to-digital 30 converters 14, such as a dual slope integrating converter, are more accurate if used in a range wherein they only have a positive output. This may be accomplished by offsetting the out-- put from the scale ll to fall within the range of from 8 pounds ' .
. - . .: . : -to 38 pounds. Th-ls, the zero is arbitrarily offset by 8 pounds.
The block 99 subtracts an initial weight of eiyht pounds from the scale reading to zero the weight signal when no weight is present on the pla~ter 13. After the eight pounds is subtracted, S a block 100 checks to see whether or not the zero expand switch is actuated or true. If the zero expand switch i5 actuated, a block 101 moves the four least significant digits of the meas-ured weight, or the digits X.XXX pounds, to the WEIGHT OUT memory and clears an AUT0-ZER0 correction counter. Thus, the digital weight display 22 will now show the true zero weight setting of the apparatus 10 to within one-tenth of a normal weight gradua-tion. Since the auto-zero operation is inhibited, a block 102 turns off the ZER0 light and logic jumps to Dl.
If the zero expand switch is not closed, sequence pro-ceeds from the block 100 to a block 103 which checks to see if an "auto-zero capture range expand" switch is closed. If not, sequence proceeds to F6. ~ormally, the weight reading used by the apparatus 10 for calculating a value is automatically zeroed if the weight from the scale 11 is less than 0.005 pound when no weight is present on the platter 13 . However, when the auto-zero capture range expand switch is closed, a block 104 will check to determine if the weight recorded in the raw weight register is equal to or less than 0.6 pound.
If the weight reading is greater than 0.6 pound, the sequence jumps to G7. If it is less, block 106 causes this weight, up to 0.6 pound, to be recor~ed in the zero error correc-tion register in the AUT0-ZER0 register. The weight is then corrected at a block 105 by the contents of the AUT0-ZER0 register and moved to the WEIGHT OUT memory.
After the zero is corrected, a check is made to see if the maximum weight capacity of the apparatus 10 has been exceeded. Such maximum capacity has arbitrarily been set at thirty pounds which is generally sufficient for apparatus of the type described when used in the meat department of a grocery store. A block i07 checks to see if the corrected weight stored in the WEIG~ OUT memory is greater than thirty pounds. If it is, a block 108 sets an OVERCAP latch, flip-flop or similar memory device. If the maximum weight is not exceeded, a block 109 clears OVERCAP. Blocks 108 and 109 are connected to a block 110 which checks to see if a motion flag MOTNF is present. If not, logic proceeds to Gl, while if motion is present, a bloc};
111 checks to see if SET is true. If SET is true, the logic proceeds to G7 while if it is not true, a block 112 blanks the weight output and the logic proceeds to Dl.
Fig. 2G shows the sequence of operations of the auto-zero correction circuitry, of the price by count mode of opera-tion and of the value computation if a mode other than price bycount is selected. A correction is automatically made to errors -. .;~ .
, in the scale zero when the absolute value of the previously corrected weight is less than 0.005 pound. A total correction may be made up to 0.6 pound in 0.001 pound increments, or in other suitable incremental values. Furthermore, gross zero ~i corrections of up to 0.6 pound may be made by use of the zero capture range expand switch which stores correction weight up ~ ;, to 0.6 pound to be stored in an AUTO-ZERO memory.
The Gl input to a block 115 is compared to see if the :
` 25 absolute value of the corrected weight is less than or equal to ~ 0.005 pound. If not, a block 116 clears the 1/4 graduation flag ; to turn off a light which indicates that the weight reading used by the logic unit 15 for computing a value is within 1/4 of one graduation displayed on the digital weight display 22. From the ` 30 block 116, sequence of operations proceeds to G7, skipping any changes in the contents or correction factors stored in an AUTO-ZERO correction register. If the absolute value of the corrected weight is less than or equal to 0.005 pound, a block 117 checks ,- .
;.
to see if t~ dbsclut~ weicJht is less th~l or equal to 0.002 pound. If not, ~ block 118 sets the zero count register to twelve which in turn causes the 1/4 graduation indicator light to be turned off later in the cyc]e.
If the absolute value o~ the corrected weight is less than 0.002 pound, a block 120 indicates that the count stored in the zero count register is read out of this register but also remains stored in this register. In accordance with block 119, the zero count register is checked to determine if zero is recorded in this register. If the count is zero, block 132 chec~s the weight to determine if the weight is zero. If it is, the sequence jumps to G7. If the weight is not zero, the sequence continues to block 121. If the count in the zero count register is not zero, block 114 indicates that the count in this register is incremented by one. Thereafter, the sequence - goes to block 132 and then as described.
After the 1/4 graduation flag is set at the block 120, or af~er the logic has jumped to G5, a block ]21 checks to see if the total auto-zero correction factor stored in the AUTO-ZERO
A' 20 register is less than or equal to 0.6 pound, the maximum permis-sible correction factor. If the correction factor is greater than or equal to 0.6 pound, no ch~nge is made in the correction factor and the logic jumps to G7, w~ile if it is less than 0.6 pound the factor stored in AUTO-ZERO is modified by 0.001 pound at a block 122. After the sequence of operations jumps to G7 or after the AUTO-ZERO ccrrection factor is modified in the block 122, a block 123 causes the tare weight stored in the TARE memory to be sub--tracted from the corrected scale weight and the four most signi-ficant weight digits are moved to WEIGHT OUT. Thus, it will be apparent that an auto-zero correction is made regardless of the - fact that a tare weight may have previously been.entered into the apparatus 10.
~' .
After we~i~ht dat:a is stored in WEIGHT OUT, a block 124 checks to see if the printer mode switch has been set to a price by count mode of operation. If not, the logic jumps to G12 and subsequently a value is computed. If the apparatus 10 is in a price by count mode, a block 125 causes a factor or count received from the price by count switch to be stored in the P/~B OUT memory for supplying to the printer. A block 126 then checks to see if the price by count factor has changed from the last cycle of the apparatus 10. If a change has occurred, 10 a jump is made to A15 and all external inputs are again read.
If no change has occurred, a bloc~ 127 causes the price per - pound data entered through the price switches to be stored in the V~LUE OUT memory. If the logic has jumped to G12 and price per pound data from the switches or from the printer is present, the 15 price per pound data is moved to the P/LB OUT memory location at a block 128 and zeros are forced into a register which stores the price by count factor read from the input switches 17. ~
blocX 129 then computes a value by multiplying the contents or ~--è the P/LB OUT memory by the contents of the WEIGHT OUT memory and 20 stores the answer in the VALUE OUT memory. After the value is -computed and stored, a bloc~ 130 compares this value with $1QO, the maximum value capacity of the apparatus 10. This maximum ` value has been arbitrarily selected to limit the number of print wheels required by the printer since measuring apparatus of this 25 type, when used for labeling meat in the meat department of a groc~ry store, will normally not be required to exceed $100. If the computed value is greater than $100, a bloc~ 131 writes zeros in the V~LUE OUT memory and the logic jumps to C5 while if the maximum permissible value has not been exceeded, the logic jumps 30 to ~
... .
:~
~, .
1062;~90 In ~om~ instancc~, an operatol of thc apparatus 10 may wish to p~lnt a label which does not include all three of the price, the weigh~ ~Id the value. The weight, for example, is blanked whenever the apparatus 10 is operating in a price by S count mode. or, it may be desired to print a label bearing only the weight. This may be desirable in a wholesale operation where the wholesale purchaser will reprice the article for retail sales.
Therefore, the apparatus 10 may be provided with manual switches which permit seIectively blanking the price, the weight and the value from the printed label. The logic for performing these functions is shown in Fig. 2H.
The Hl input is connected to a block 134 which checks to see if a "blank price" switch has been actuated. If the switch is actuated, a block 135 causes blanks or numbers which index the print wheels to blank spaces to be stored in the P/LB OUT memory location. If the blank price switch is not actuated, or after blanks have been stored in the P/LB OUT memor-y, a block 136 checks to see if a "blank weight" switch has been actuated. If the blank weight switch is actuated, a block 137 checks to see if the apparatus 10 is operating in a price by count mode. If the apparatus 10 is in the price by count mode, the weight wiil already have been blanked and logic jumps to H6 while if it is not in the price by count mode, a block 138 blanks the WEIGHT OUT memory. If the blank welght switch was not actuated, a block 139 checks to see if the scale is in the price by count mode. If not, logic jumps to H6 while if it -s ` in this mode, the block 138 will blank the WEIGHT OUT memory.
If the WEIGHT OUT memory has been blanked or the logic has ~umped to H6, a block 140 checks to see if a "blank value"
switch has been actuated and, if not, the logic jumps to Dl while if it is actuated, a block 141 blanks the VALUE OUT memory and the logic then jumps to Dl.
. .
- - .
Fig. 2I shows the manner in ~hich the tare weight is manually en~ered into the apparatus 10. The tare weight, which is stored in the TARE memory, is subtracted from the measured gross article weight for obtaining a net weight used in com-puting a value. A check is made at a block 144 to see if a"no tare" switch has been pushed. If the no tare switch is pushed, the TARE memory is cleared and the interlock flag INTF
is set at a block 145 and the logic then jumps to Bl0. If the no tare switch was not pushed when the logic was at the block 144, a block 146 checks to see if any other tare switch is pushed.
If not, the logic jumps to B10 while if a tare switch is pushed, the bloc~ 147 checks to see if a three second time interval has elapsed since the last tare switch was pushed. If three seconds has elapsed, a block 148 clears t~e TARE memory and, subsequently, the tare weight represented by the pushed tare switch is stored in the TARE memory and the interlock flag I~TF is set. If the three second interval has not elapsed when the block 147 is reached, the contents of the TARE memory are updated by adding the tare value represented by the pushed tare switch to the contents of the TARE memory. Thus, the tare weight stored in ` the TARE memory will then represent the accumulation of tare weights from two tare switches. For example, an operator may push a 0.10 pound tare switch and a 0.06 pound tare switch within a three second time interval and the total tare weight stored in the ~ARE memory will equal 0.16 pound. From the block 149, the logic returns to B10. ~ne three second time interval was ;-selected on the basis that most people can select and push two - switches in this interval. Of course, a different time interval s may be used.
- 30 Fig. 2J shows an exemplary sub-routine or sequence of operations for causing weight signals received from the analog-.
' ... . .
to-digital converter to be entered in the weight registers of the microprocessor employed in the present invention. The sub-routine or sequence o~ operations shown in Fig. 2J are repre-sented in Fig. 2E by bloc~ 88.
The remaining drawinys show details of logic and cir-cuitry of an exemplary embodiment of the invention for performiny the functions described in the description of Fig. 2. Turning first to Fig. 3, the input switches 17 including the price, printer mode and tare weight data input switches are shown in detail. Price by count data, price per unit weight data, tare ; weight data and printer mode data is all supplied to the input/
output buffer and memory 16 in the control unit 15 on nine switch buses 155 which represent the digits one through nine. It will be apparent that no bus is needed for a zero entry which corres-ponds to the absence of a signal on any of the nine buses 155.
When the apparatus 10 is operated in a price by colnt mode, a count or factor is entered through a price by count switch 156.
The price by count switch 156 is as a two-wafer or two-pole rotary switch having eleven contacts for selectively entering a count two through a count twelve. It will be appreciated that a count of one would not normally be used nor is there normally a need for a count greater th~n twelve, although this may be accomplished by providing additional contacts on the switch 156.
A count of two through a count of nine is entered into the control 25 unit 15 by setting the switch 156 and strobing or grounding a strobe line 157 while a count of ten, eleven or twelve is entered by setting the switch 156 and strobing a strobe line 158.
When the price by count switch 156 is set to a factor between two and nine, a signal on the strobe line 157 causes an appropriate output on one of the nine switch buses 155. Similarly, when a ,~' . . .
_ ~9 _ . . .
, ~ . ' - - '' ' ' ' . ' 10~i2290 signal is appli~d on the strobe lirle 158 ~nd the price by count switch 156 is set to a factox of ten, eleven or twelve, a signal will also appear on one of the switch buses lS5.
The apparatus 10 is designed for calculating an article value from price per unit weight data having three significant ; digits or from $0.01 up to $9.99 per pound. The price per unit weight data is manually entered through three switches 159-161.
Each of the price switches 159-161 is a ten-contact rotary switch.
A contact representing zero is not connected while contacts on the switches representing the digits one through nine are con-nected to corresponding ones o~ the nine switch buses 155. The switch 159 is used for entering pennies, or the least significant digit of the price data. A strobe line 162 is connected for providing a signal on the common ~erminal of the penny switch 159.
When a signal is applied on the strobe line 162, the penny price data is entered on the connected one of the switch buses 155. The switch 160 is provided for entering dimes price data when a signal - is received on a dime strobe line 163. Similarly, the switch 161 is connected for supplying dollar price data when a signal is received on a strobe line 164. Thus, price data up to a ma~imum ~ of $9.99 per pound may be entered through the three price switches - 159-161. Of course, it will be apparent that the number of price switches may be varied to meet other requirements for the apparatuS
10 and the monetary units represented by the price switches may be changed to the local currency where the apparatus 10 is used.
Tare weight is entered into the logic unit 15 by means o~ nine momentary contact tare switches 165 which enter tare weight in l/lOOth pound increments from 0.01 pound to 0.09 pound and a switch 166 which enters a tare weight of 0.10 pound. A
signal is periodically applied by the logic unit 15 on a strobe line 167 which is connected to the l/lOOth pound tare switches 165. These switches 165 are normally open push button switches.
In the event that one of the switches 165 is pushed when a signal ~ 30 -~ .
1062Z90 .
appears on the s~robe line 167, an outpu appears on the associated one of the switch buses 155. A strobe line 168 is con-nected to the 0.10 pound tare switch 166, also a push button switch, and to an "auto-tare" switch 170 and a "no tare" switch 171. In the event that any o~ the switches 166, 170 or 171 is pushed when a signal appears on the strobe line 168, an output - will appear on an associated one of the switch buses 155.
The apparatus 10 is designed for operation with a key-board tare weight ranging from a min~mum of 0.01 pound to a lQ maximum of 0.19 pound. This is accomplished b~ providing a timing circuit in the control unit 15 which is initiated whenever one of the switches 165 or 166 is actuated. If one of the switches 165 is actuated and within the measured time interval the switch 166 is actuated, the tare weights for the two switches are summed. Similarly, if the switch 166 is actuated first and ~; within the measured time interval one of the switches 165 is actuated, the total of the two tare weights is again summed.
If two of the tare switches 165 are actuated within the time interval, only the most recent value is entered. The time interval may, for example, be about three seconds which should afford sufficient time for an operator to select and actuate ; two of the tare switches 165 and 166. If a greater time elapses, only the most recent are weight entered through a switch 165 or 166 is accepted by the control unit 15.
A printer mode switch 172 also supplies data over the switch buses 155. The printer mode switch 172 is a rotary switch ' having a common terminal connected to a printer mode strabe 173.
: .
When a signal is received over the strobe 173, an output appears on one of the switch buses 155, depending upon the setting of the mode switch 172. In an exemplary embodiment of the invention, the printer mode switch permits selecting between a "single"
mode, a "demand" mode, a "continuous" mode, a Uprice by count-single" mode, a "price by count-demand" mode and a "price by count-contlnuous" mod~. In either of the single modes of opera-tion, a single label is printed each time an article i5 weighed.
The printer is actuated each time the scale goes through a motion -no motion cycle, a value is computed and the previous label has S been removed from the printer 21. In the demand modes of opera-tion, labels are printed as previous ones are removed from the printer. In the continuous modes of operation, the printer will continuously print a series of labels haviny the same weight, price per unit weight and value until printing is manually terminated.
The switches 17 also include an "auto-price" switch 174. When price information is to be supplied automatically from a commodity plate in the printer, the auto-price switch 174 is actuated. When the switch 174 is actuated, an indicator light 175 is automatically illuminated to annunciate this fact. A
switch 176 is provided for expanding the capture range of the auto-zero circuitry from a normal range of zero plus or minus 0.005 pound to up to plus or minus 0.6 pound. The switch 176 is a momentary push button switch. A switch 177 is provided for inhibiting operation of the auto-zero circuitry to permit govern-ment inspectors to chec~ the weighing accuracy of the apparatus 10. Finally, a switch 178 is provided for expanding the weight ~- reading shown on the digital weight display 22. The zero expand switch is normally used by maintenance people in calibrating the ^ 25 zero weight setting for the apparatus 10. When the zero expand switch 178 is actuated, the displayed weight which is normally . .j .
in a format of XX.XX pounds is shifted over by one digit to dis- -:, .,~ . .
play a weight reading of X.XXX pounds. This permits calibrating the scale zero to within l/lOOOth of a pound. Finally, the .
switches 17 include a "lock" switch 179. Any time there is a change in data entered into the apparatus 10 other than weight data, the apparatus 10 moves from what is normally referred to as - a "ready" state to a "set" state to indicate that an interlock ; ,.
., .
:.. , . .. .. , - . ~ : : : ; ~
lQ62290 has been broke~. The lock switch 179 must be manually actuated to return the apparatus 10 to the ready state. Thus, an operator cannot accidentally bump one of the tare switches 165 and 166 or the price switches 159-161 after the apparatus 10 is in the ready state and print erroneous labels.
Fig. 3A shows an exemplary arrangement for multiplexing the output decimal digits from the analog-to-digital converter o the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent so that this infor-mation may be transmitted over four data conductors or leads.
In addition, four address leads are required to indicate which of the decimal digits is being transmitted over the four common leads at any particular instant or interval of time.
While both the above-identified patents to Williams, Jr.
et al and the present exemplary embodiment of the invention show five decimal digits, it is obvious that any suitable number of decimal digits may be employed merely by increasing the num~er of counterstages and latches and related equipment.
~ The arrangement shown in Fig. 3A is controlled by a i source of control signals 350. This source of signals may be an oscillator or any other source of control or clock signals which may be derived from the analog-to-digital converter such as a clock source of this converter which would be divided down to a much slower pulse or cloc~ rate.
The clock source 350 is further divided by five by equip-ment 351 which may be of any suitable form. The output of thisdividing circuit as shown in Fig. 3A comprises a binary output having conductors 1, 2 and 4. This is the weight of the signals output from the frequency divider 351. These signals are then applied to the multiplexing interface circuits 352, 353, 354 and 355 which may be all the same. These devices are arranged to switch the five input leads shown to the one out~ut lead under control of the input binary address signals on conductors 1, 2 and 4. Thus, when the conductors 1, 2 a~d 4 are all zero, the .
. ., ~ . .
- , . :
input leads Al, ~2, A4 ~nd A8 are connected respectively to WT. DATA 1, WT. D~T~ 2, WT. D~TA 4 and WT. D~TA 8 leads. When a one signal i5 applied to the conductor 1 input address conductor and the other two address conductors are zero, then the Bl, B2, B4 and B8 input leads are connected to the respective WT. DATA 1 lead, the WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 conductors, respectively. In a similar manner, the other input conductors of these switching devices are connected to the output weight data leads.
10The input leads Al, A2, A4 and A8 are connected to the four binary output leads from the first decade of latches 136 of the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al. Similarly, `i the input conductors Bl, B2, B4 and B8 are connected to the four binary output leads from the second decade of latches 137. The ~ ' ` 15 remaining input leads are similarly connected to the corresponding binary leads of the other output decade latches 138, 139 and 140 of the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent.
In addition, the output binary coded signals over con-ductors 1, 2 and 4 from the divider 351 are connected to a transla-20 ting circuit arrangement 356 such that when all zeros are applied -~on the leads 1, 2 and 4, zero will be also applied to the digit - selector leads DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D AND DIG SEL E thus .
indicating that the first decade signals appear on the weight data leads WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DAT~ 4 and WT. DATA 8.
When a one is applied to the number one lead, a one or voltage signal will be applied to the DIG SEL B conductor thus indicating that the B decade signal will be transmitted over the WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 leads. Similarly, a one signal will be applied to the digit selector leads C, D and E
when the corresponding weight data signal of these decimal digits -is applied to the WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA
.:, 8 leads.
Tha switching devices for switching any one of the input . . .
:: . - ................... . .
: . ~
~ 06~Z~0 lines to ~n output line are similar to the eight-line to one-line decoders 198, 199, 200, 202 of Fig. 4B except that the last three of the eight-line conductors are not connected. Similarly, the dividing arrangements 351 and the tr~slating arrangement 356 are S well-known and commercially available.
Details o an exemplary control unit 15 are shown in Fig. 4. ~ig. 4 consists of Fig. 4A, Fig. 4B and Fig. 4C which are arranged as shown on the first sheet of the drawings. In an exemp-lary embodiment of the invention the control unit 15 is a micro-computer 185 which fu~ctions to compute the value of each weighedarticle and to control the operating sequence of the apparatus 10.
The microcomputer 185, for example, may be of a type commercially available in integrated circuits and in the exemplary em~odiment described hexein the microcomputer 185 comprises a Model MCS-4 Microcomputer Set manufactured by Intel Corporation of Santa Clara, California. Such a microcomputer employed in the exemplary embodiment of the present invention describe~ herein includes a central processing unit (CPU) 186, a random access memory (RAM) 187 and five read only memories (ROM) 188-192. In the exemplary arrangement described herein, the CPU 186 is an Intel Type 4004 integrated circuit, the RAM 187 is an Intel Type 4002 integrated circuit and the ROM's 188-192 are Intel Type 4001 integrated circuits. However, it will be ~ppreciated that other commerciall~
available integrated circuit microcomputers or other types of commercially available computers will operate in accordance with the principles described herein.
These various CPU, RAM and ROM units are interconnected in the manner shown in Fig. 4A, as required in order for these units to cooperate one with another as required by the circuit con-figurations of these standard commercially available units. Theconnections are clearly described in the Users Manual for the MCS-~Microcomputer Set published by the Intel Corporation. Briefly, the ROM's, RAM and the CPU are all interconnected in parallel by tha .
data bus system shown at the top of Fig. 4A. These connections are in accordance with the requirements of the computer as com-mercially available. These connections permit the cooperation between the ROM's, the RAM and the CPU. Thus, the CPU will trans-~it an address over the bus system which defines a storage space in one of the ROM's, for example. The ROM having this storage ` space has internal control circuitry which will respond to this address and in turn cause information stored at the designated address to be transmitted back over the data bus system to the CPU
which then responds to this information in the usual manner.
The storage portion of the RAM, the ROM's and the sequence controlling portion of the CPU comprise the sequence controller 19 shown in Fig. 1. Arithmetic unit 18 of Fig. 1 comprises the arith-metic unit of the CPU 186. The data registers 20 also comprise registers in the CPU 186 and the registers in the RAM 187. Input/
output ports of the ROM's 188-192 and the RAM 187 and the related equipment comprise the input/output buffer and memory 16 shown in ~ -Fig. 1.
The read only memory units referred to herein as ROM's j 20 188-192 store fixed data and also store a series of control orders or instructions for controlling the operating sequence of the entire apparatus 10. These orders or instructions, as is well understood by persons of ordinary skill in the programming and computer art, , control the central processing unit CPU 186. These orders or in-structions are readily obtained by persons of ordinary skill in the ~~ programming and computer art from the flow charts of Fig. 2A-2J by ;~1 translation of the flow charts into computer language as required by the particular microcomputer and set forth in the instructions in the users manual for the respective computer. A program listing for performing the operations specified in Figs. 2A-2J is attached as an Appendix to this specification. The program in the Appendix is in the language required for an Intel MCS-4 microcomputer, as . ~ , .
~ specified in the Users Manual for the MCS-4 Microcomputer Set.
.~. .
s~ - 36 -.; .... ..
. , : .
.- . : . : - -.- . -~
Fig. 7 shows the storage areas of the R~M 187 and the storage areas assi~ned to various reyisters for controlling input and output data, as well as process data, so that the data con-trol apparatus will operate to automatically correct the zero indication of the scale in accordance with the present invention.
The control orders or instructions control the CPU 186 so that it will obtain the necessary fixed information from the ROM's 188-192 as well as the required control orders and instruc-tions and obtain the data from the RAM 187 and from the various input devices so that the correct weight of each weighed article ~; will be accurately determined and then, after various conditions are met, its value computed, and after the value is computed and various other conditions are met, causes a label to be printed.
The data used by the microcomputer 185 consists of data 15 from the switch buses 155, data from the scale 11, data from the printer 21 and data from various interlocks. Four address out-puts 193 fro~ the RAM 187 are connected through inverters 194 to four address buses 195. Address information and other data supplied from the RAM 187 to the address buses 195 determines the data supplied to the microcomputer 185 and the data supplied from the con~rol unit 15 to the printer 21. External data from, for example, the switches 17, is supplied to the microcomputer 185 on four input data buses 196 connected to the ROM 188. At :.
-~ the proper time interval, the external input data on the buses 25 196 passes through the ROM 188 onto four input/output data buses 197 connected in parallel with the five ROM's 188-192, the RAM
187 and the CPU 186.
` The external input data is multiplexed onto the buses 196 by means of four 8-line to 1-line decoders 198-201 and a . - .
; 30 decimal-to-binary coded decimal (BCD) decoder 202. Each of the four 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201 has a single output con-nected to a different one of the external input data buses 196 connected to the ROM 188. Three of the four data address buses .. . .
............... . ,. , : . - ..
106Z~90 195 from the RAM 187 are connected in parallel to the four decoders 198-201 for selecting the inputs to the decoders 198-201 which are connected simultaneously to the buses 196. Thus, correspondinq ones of the eight inputs to the four decoders 198-201 are connected to the outputs for such decoders. The zeroinputs for each of the four decoders 198-201 are connected to the four outputs from the decimal-to-BCD decoder 202. when a zero address is supplied to the data select inputs of the decoders 198-201, the nine switch buses 155 are connected in series through the decimal-to-8CD decoder 202 and the line zero inputs of the decoders 198-201 to the four data input buses 196 to the micro-computer 185.
While the switch buses lS5 are connected to the microcomputer 185, signals are sequentially applied to the price 15 switch strobes 162-164, the price by count strobes 157 and 158, ~-^ the tare switch strobes 167 and 168 and the mode switch strobe 173 for entering this data into the microcomputer 185. The strobe signals are applied on these strobe lines from a BCD-to-decimal decoder 203. The ROM 190 has four data outputs 204 con-~i! 20 nected respectively through four inverters 205 to four address ~'l buses 206. The address buses 206 supply address data to the BCD-to-decimal decoder 203 for sequentially scanning the ten outputs ~- which strobe the price switch strobes 162-164, the price by count strobes 157 and 158, the tare switch strobes 167 and 168 and the mode switch strobe 173.
When price per unit weight data is received in an automatic mode from a commodity plate in the printer 21, such data is received over four lines 210-213. The four lines 210-213 are connected, respectively to the line one inputs on the 30 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201.' Four weight digit selection inputs 214-217 are connected to the line two inputs to the decoders 198-201, respectively, and four weight data lines 218-221 are connected, respectively, to the line three inputs to the ' .,... ... ' ` ~: ' - ' : '' -decoder~ 198~201. The data appearing on the digit selection inputs 214-217 identifies which weight digit is present on the weight data lines 218-221. The weight data appearing on the lines 218-221 at any given time is a single digit of weight in a S BCD format. If five digits of weight are to be received from the ~- scale 11, the five weight digits are sequentially read by alternately receiving the digit selection data on the lines 214-217 and the actual weight data on the lines 218-221.
Interlock information is supplied to the microcomputer 185 by means of the line four through line six inputs of the decoders 198-200 and the line four through line seven inputs of the decoder 2Ql. The line four input to the decoder 198 receives data from the lock switch 179, the line five input is connected to a motion detector inhibit output from a manual print switch in the printer 21 and the line six input receives a "reweigh" signal from the printer 21. The line four input to the decoder 199 is -connected to a price contact on a service switch which, when actuated, connects thé line four input to ground. When the service switch is actuated, price data is shifted into a weight memory for displaying on the digital weight display 22. The line five input to the decoder l9g is connected to a lead 222 which receives a signal when a label is printed, as will be dis-cussed in greater detail below. The line six input to the .:. . .
decoder 199 is connected to receive an acknowledgment signal from ; 25 the printer 21 when prlnt data for a label has been stored.
The line four input to the decoder 200 is connected to a value contact on the service switch which, when actuated, causes the computed value to be shown on the digital weight dis-~i play 22. The line five input to the decoder 200 is connected ~ 30 to the auto-price switch 174 and through an amplifier 223 to the `'! auto-price indicator 175. When the apparatus 10 is operated with an auto-price received from the printer 21, a parity check is made to verify the accuracy of the price per unit weight data.
~" ' ` .
An auto-price parity sisnal is a~plied on a line 224 to the line six input to the decoder 200. The printer door has an interlock switch connected to the line four input to the decoder 201. This interlocX prevents accidental actuation o~ the printer while an S operator has the door open for changing commodity plates or for maintenance. The line five input to the decoder 201 is connected to the zero eYpand switch 178 (Fig. 3), the line six input is connected to the Tl clock (not shown) which provides a pulse signal to indicate the time interval during which weight data may be read from the scale 11. As previously indicated in the discussion of Fig. 2, the Tl clock may have a 200 millisecond cycle, comprised of 60 milliseconds in which weight data may be ~ ~-;' read from the scale 11 and 140 milliseconds in which new weight data is measured by the scale 11. Finally, the line seven input to the decoder 201 is connected to the capture range expand switch 176.
~i The line seven inputs to -the decoders 198-200 are , connected to three switches 225-227, respectively. one of the , switches 225-227 is closed to esta~lish the number of sequential hits or no motion cycles of the motion detector before a label is printed. The switches may, for example, indicate that only a single hit is required if the switch 225 is closed, two hits are required if the switch 226 is closed and three hits are ~ required if the switch 227 is closed.
-~i 25 Output data from the microcomputer 185 is stored within a random access memory 228. Weight, price and computed value 1 data is supplied to the RAM 228 from the RAM 187 in the micro--~ computer 185 over the buses 195. Address information for storing . data in the RAM 228 is supplied from the ROM 190 over the buses 30 206. The buses 2Q6 are connected through an address selector 229 to address inputs on the RAM 228. The ROM 189 is connected over a line 230 to an input to the address selector 229 for connecting the buses 206 to the RAM 228 for supplying a data storage or :: . , . I . . .
write address or for connecting four buses 231 to the RAM 228 for supplying a readout address. Thus, when weight data or price data is supplied to the microcomputer 185, such data is also stored in the RAM 228 and when a value is cornputed, the computed value is also stored in the RAM 228. The ROM 189 enables writing or storing data in the RAM 228 by applying a "write enable"
signal through an amplifier 236 to a line 237. The RAM 228 has four output buses 232 which are connected in parallel for supply-ing data to the printer 21 and to the weight display 22. The output buses 232 are also connected through three exclusive OR
gates 233-235 for generating a parity bit from the output data.
A BCD signal is generated in the printer corresponding to the setting of each print wheel in the printer 21. A parity bit generated from the setting of each print wheel is compared with -i 15 the corresponding parity bit from the gates 233-235 for verifying ~.
the accuracy of the printer setup. If there is a lack o~ parity, a "reweigh" signal is applied from the printer 21 to the line six input to the decoder 198.
As indicated above, an output address is supplied to ;~
~ 20 the ~AM 228 over the readout address buses 231. The output ;~3 address buses 231 are also connected to supply an output data address to the weight display 22 and are connected through ampli-fiers 240 to supply address data on outputs 240' to the printer 21. An address is applied on the buses 231 from a four bit address counter 241. A clock s.ignal is applied from a clock , source (not shown~ to a decade counter 242. One output of the t counter 242 is applied through an inverter 243 for counting up the four bit address counter 241. A different output from the decade counter 242 is applied through an inverter 244 for supplying a clock signal to the printer 21.
_ 41 -., 106Z~90 An output 245 from the XOM 189 in the microcomputer 185 is connected throu~h an inverter 246 to a line 247 which enables quad bistable latches 248. When the latches 248 are enabled, data present on the address and data buses 195 from the RAM 187 is set into the latches 248. One output 249 from the latches 248 is a memory update request. The memory update request line 249 is connected to a NAND gate 250. The ~AND gate 250 has an output -~ -connected through an AND gate 251 to an enable input on the four bit address counter 241. Th2 address selection line 230 con-nected from the ROM 189 is also connected to a second input of the A~D gate 251. A signal is applied on the line 230 to the AND gate 251 at the same time the readout address lines 231 are connected to the R~M 228. If the output of the ~A~D gate 250 is high at the same time, the A~D gate 251 will enable the four bit .
address counter 241 for supplying a se~uence of addresses for reading data from the RAM 228. The ~AND gate 250 also has four ` inputs connected to the address buses from the counter 241 and a printer off input from the printer which is high when the , printer is off. Thus, when the bistable latches 248 are set to apply a signal on the memory update request line 249 or when the printer is off, the address counter 241 will cycle whenever a signal is received from the ROM 189 on the line 230. Once a cycle is started by a signal on either the memory update request line 249 or by a pulse on the printer off line, the address counter 241 will continue to cycle until all of the address buses 231 go to a logic zero.
The ~istable latches 248 also include an output 252 which indicates when the weight readlng is below zero. The output 252 is connected through an inverter 253 to supply a MINUS sign output 254 to the printer 21 and also to the weight display 22. Still another output 255 from the latches 248 is ~onnected through an inverter 256 to an output 257 which illuminates an out-of-range indicator lamp. A fourth output 258 :, ~
from the la~ches 248 is connected through a NAND gate 259 to illuminate a r~ady indicator lamp. A "print stored" input 260 from the printer 21 is connected through an inverter 261 to a second input of the NAND gate 2S9. The output 258 from the latches 248 is also connected through an inverter 262 to a line 263 which supplies a SET signal to the printer. The line 263 is also connec~ed through an amplifier 264 for illuminating a SET
indicator lamp. The printer also supplies the REWEIGH signal on a line 265 through an amplifier 266 to illuminate a "weigh again"
indicator lamp, a "take label" signal over a line 267 through an amplifier 268 to a take label indicator lamp and an "add label"
signal over a line 269 through an amplifier 270 to an add label indicator lamp. An indicator is also provided for indicating when the apparatus 10 is operating within the weight zero limit ; .
or within a predetermined fraction of a weight graduation of zero. ~-`
, This has previously been referred to as the 1/4 graduation lamp.
I The ROM 192 has a single output 271 which is connected through an inverter 272 to 2 line 273. The line 273 is connected through an ~^ inverter 274 for energizing the zero limit indicator la~p.
During normal operation of the microcomputer 185, the ROM 189 applies a periodic pulse on the line 247 for resetting the bistable latches 248. This pulse will appear once each time - the microcomputer 185 goes through a complete program cycle.
In typical operation of the microcomputer 185, the pulse will appear at about 0.2 second intervals. However, it is possible for a noise pulse or some other disturbance to cause the central processing unit 186 to end up at an incorrect or nonexistent address. In such event, the microcomputer 185 becomes "hung up"
and is in effect "dead". When this condition occurs, the micro-computer 185 must be restarted before a label can be printed.Timing circuitry is provided for automatically restarting the microcomputer 185 in the event that two sequential periodic pulses are missing from the line 247.
- ' `
. - .
The lin~ 247 i9 connected through an inverter 28I, a current limiting resistor 282 and a diode 283 to the input of a threshold or level detec~or 284. The input of the threshold detector 284 is also connected through a high value resistor 285 to a voltage source and through a capacitor 286 to ground. When the voltage on the input of the threshold detector 284 is below a predetermined level, the threshold detector 284 will have a high or positive output. However, if the input of the threshold ; detector 284 exceeds a predetermined voltage level, the output 10 of the threshold detector 284 will go negative. The capacitor 286 is charged at a relatively slow rate through the resistor 285.
Each time a cycle pulse appears on the line 247, the inverter 281 will have a low output for rapidly discharging the capacitor 286 through the diode 283 and the current limiting resistor 282. Unde~
normal operation o~ the microcomputer 185, the cycle pulses on the line 247 maintain the charge on the capacitor 286 below the threshold level of the detector 284. However, in the event of two sequential cycle pulses failing to appear on the line 247, the capacitor 286 will become sufficiently charged as to cause the threshold detector 284 to change states.
When the output of the threshold detector 284 goes negative, a capacitor 287 is discharged through a diode 288 and a current limiting resistor 289. A decrease in the voltage on the capacitor 287 causes a second threshold detector 290 to change ` 25 from a negative to a positive output which is applied through a resistor 291 to the base of a transistor 292. The transistor 292 then switches states of conduction for applying a recycle or - restart signal on a line 293 connected in parallel to the CPU
186, the RAM 187 and the ROM's 188-192 in the microcomputer 185.
30 A resistor 294 and a diode 295 are connected in series between the input and the output of the threshold detector 284. After the threshold level is reached and the output of the detector 284 goes negative, the capacitor 286 is discharged through the .
- ~-1062;Z 90 resistor 294 and th~ diode 295 until the output from the de~ector again becomes posi~ive. The capacitor 287 is then charsed through a resistor 296, thereby causing the outputs of the detector 290 and the transistor 292 to change. If two more S cycle pulses are absent from the line 247, the capacitor 286 will again become charged sufficiently for the outputs of the detectors 284 and 290 and the transistor 292 to change states, applying another clear and restart signal to the microcomputer 185.
Fig. 7 is a diagram showing one of many possible memory location arrangements in the random access ~emory ~WM 187 of the exemplary arrangement of the apparatus of the present invention.
As indicated in Fig. 7, the RAM is provided with ~our memory register areas. Each of these memory register areas is arranged to store four binary digit words which in the exemplary embodiment described herein usually are ~oded to represent a decimal digit. Each memory area 16 is arranged to store 16 of ` these four binary digit numbers or other information. The register areas are selected by address designated "4 HIGH" above each one of the areas. Thus, the address of the first area is 0000. The address for the other three memory register areas is shown above each of these register areas. In addition, each of the four binary digits forming a word or number in each of the areas is assigned an address, which address is shown to the left , 25 of the first memory area. As indicated, the address for the.'1 . :
memory areas comprlse the first four high numbers, or binary digits of the address, while the address of the individual words or nu~bers within each area is designated by an address designated "4 LOW". Thus, at least certain of the same address symbols may be employed to designate both memory areas and also the words ` within the memory areas. Thus, two addresses are distinguished by their location in the addresses as is well known by persons of ordinary skill in the art of microcomputer operation.
- 45 - .
.. ..
The R~M 187 also includes four status registers shown in the lower part of Fig. 7. Each of the status registers has an address similar to the corresponding memory register area as indicated above each of the status registers. The rectangles in S the status registers represent a storage space for a single binary digit or bit. Thus, each of the status registers may store four four-bit binary words. In addition, each of the bits of each of the words may be employed to store a binary bit which is independent of the other binary bits of a particular word at the particular address. In other words, as indicated, the zero correction sign bit, 714, is used to store the sign of the zero correction. This bit is stored in this bit space independently of the information stored in the other three bits spaces of the last word of the first status register.
As indicated in Fig. 7, the first five word spaces 710 in the first register space are employed to store the five binary 1 coded decimal digits o~ the raw weight received from the weighing apparatus and are designated raw registar. The next five four-~1 bit register word spaces 735 are employed to store the five decimal digits of the motion target weight. The next word, or register space 726, is employed to store the count or number of hits employed to determine whether or not there is motion upon ~ the platter of the scale. The last five word spaces 711 are -~ employed as a zero correction register and store the five BCD
digits employed to correct the zero indication of the scale.
The other register spaces are designated to indicate the manner in which the particular register spaces are employed.
The various status register spaces shown at the bottom - of Fig. 7 are similarly designated with the name of the bit or bits employed to record the v~rious information required to provide the various features of the present invention, as described herein.
.: . , .:.. .. . . ...
OPERATI ON OF T~IE SYSTEM
As described in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al, the sensor controlled by the load cell 12 of the scale provides an output voltage which represents the load on the load cell, which in turn is a function of the load on the scale. This output voltage is then amplified and processed so as to remove an unwanted direct current component and to reduce or remove unwanted variations in this voltage so that the voltage accurately repre- -sents the load on the load cell and the load on the scale. This analog voltage is then employed to control an analog/digital converter 14.
Also the analog-to-digital converter employed in the exemplary system described herein, in addition to generating a digital signal representing the weight on the scale to be dis-played also generates a digital signal repre~enting a fraction ofthe weight represented by the least significant digit of the displayed weight. In th~ exemplary embodiment described herein, it is assumed that this additional signal represents tenths of , :
the weight represented by the least significant digit displayed. ~ -However, this additional digital signal may represent any other ~ suitable or desirable fraction of the weight represented by the `~ least significant digit displayed.
The analog-to-digital converter in effect samples this corrected analog voltage at repeatedly recurring instants of time.
These sample voltages are then employed to control the output of the digital converter. Thus the output of the digital converter is a digital signal which accurately represents the load on the load cell and thus the load on the scale. In the exemplary arrangement described in the above-identified patent to Williams, JS. et al, and in the exemplary arrangement described herein, the analog-to-digital converter requires a cycle of about 200 , .~ .
.
, --10~2Z90 milliseconds. This cycle is thus repeat~d approximately five times a second. Near the end of each cycle o~ operation of the analog-to-digital converting apparatus, this apparatus transfers digital signals representing the analog weight input to a set of latches. These latches then maintain these digital signals for a predetermined interval of time. Duriny a portion of this interval of time, the analog-to-digital converter also applies an output signal to the Tl lead. This Tl signal is obtained from device 100 of Figure 2 of the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent. Thus during the time the output signal is applied to the Tl conductor, output from the latches remains constant so that the input to the multiplex switching devices 352, 353, 354 and ` 355 of Fig. 3A remains constant. Consequently, the output ~! signals applied in sequence to the weight data conductors WT.
DATA 1, WT. DAT~ 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 represent the respective decimal digits of the output weight from the analog-~ to-digital converter. The frequency or speed of the clock pulses i~ from source 350 are such that the equipment of Fig. 3A will `i operate through a plurality of cycles during the time an output ~! 2C signal is applied to the Tl conductor. In other words, each of the binary representations of the five decimal digits representing the weight will be applied in succession to the output weight data conductors WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 a plurality of times during the time an output signal is applied to the Tl conductor.
Concurrently with the application of the respective decimal digits to the weight data lines WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8, corresponding signals are applied either to none or to one of the data selecting conductors B, C, D and E indicating the specific of the five declmal digit ~, .
- . ~: . . . .
signals applied to the weight dat~ conductors WT. DATA 1, WT.
DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 at each of the instants o time.
Assume now that power has been applied to the system S so that the analog-to-digital converter will start to develop an analog conversion and provide a digital output signal after an interval of time. At the same time, the control equipment 15 will perform an initializing operation in the usual manner and cause zeros to be stored in each and every register space in the RAM 187. Thus, zeros will be stored in all of the register spaces of this RAM 187 shown in Fig. 7.
After zeros are stored in all of the register spaces, the control of the system is transferred to the main program Al shown in Fig. 2A. Block 25 causes the memory space 718 of Fig.
15 7 to be tested to determine whether a one or a zero is recorded ~ ~-in this space. This space, which is des-gnated "MOT~F", ~j represents a motion ~lag and under the assumed conditions, a zero will be recorded in this space with the result that the program is now transferred to El of Fig. 2E. As a result, the system then tests the storage space TlF 717 to determine whether , a one or zero is stored in this space. Under the assumed con-ditions, a zero will be stored in this storage spot. This ~ storage space is designated a Tl flag. Since a zero is stored j in this storage space, the program proceeds from box 81 to box 82 2S where the condition of the Tl clock lead (see the bottom of Fig.
4B) is tested to determine whether one signal or a zero signal is present on this lead.
Under the ass~med conditions, a zero will be present on this lead so that the program proceeds to block 83. With the zero present on this lead, the analog-to-digital converter ';
- - 49 ~
.
. - - - .: . .. . ~ . . - .
indicat~q that a ~atisfactory out~ut: signal i9 not present on the output leads from the analog-~o-dig;tal converter.
In block 83 the computer is directed to change the information stored in the storage bit space 717 to a one, - 5 indicating that the analog-to-digital convert~r is in the process of providing a valid output digital signal, but that such signal is not present at this time on the output leads from ; the analog-to-digital converter.
From block 83 the control then goes to block 84 where the zero expand switch is tested. A flag or bit stored in a ~; status register bit space 719 indicates the setting of the zero expand switch. slnce this switch is assumed to be off, the zero expand is not true and the control is thus transferred to Al5 of Fig. 2A at which time the control equipment successively . . .
lS reads all of the various external inputs and stores their con-dition in the third one of the storage registers having an address 0010 of Fig. 7. After all of these switches have been - tested and ~heir condition recorded in the corresponding resis-` ter spaces assigned to them, the control then proceeds to block 40 where the price by count mode switch is tested. Under : ~ .
assumed conditions, this switch wili be conditioned so that price by count is not the mode of operation. Consequ~ntly, con-trol is then transferred to blocX 41.
Again, assuming this system is not operating in the auto price mode, a zero will be stored in the auto price bit storage location in the status regis~er 0001 and, as a result, the control of the program is transferred to block 48 of Fig. 2B
via transfer B2. As a result, block 48 tests the status register storage space 738 designated auto price in the status register 0001. Assuming that the last cycle was not auto price and that .. .. .
.
a zoro blt 1~ ~toroa in ~ r~gister indicatin~ that thc las~
cyclo wa~ ~190 a m~nual ~ric~ ~ntry, tho control 1~ tran~ferred from block 4~ to block 47. Block 47 da~ermine~ wh~th~r or not tho price ~nput ha~ chanq~d.
Thus, block ~7 compare~ th~ information ~UB~ recorded in the stora~e space~ SW-.OP throuyh 5~-.PO with th~ previous price outp~t reglst~r~ in the output prlca r~ister 73g in tho re~t~r 0011~ ~nd~r the a~sumed conditiolls, ~he pric~ may or may not be th~ ~am~. If the manual switche~ are all set on zero~
then th~sR prices will be thQ samc and the price will not have changed 80 far as the control equipmznt is concerncd. A~ ~ .
result, the control ~oes to block 49 of Fig. ~B where a ~afet~ : :
,~
~witch on the printer door 1~ checlced, since thi~ will be c108ed, control then goe~ to block 50 wh~re the condi~ion oP an auto zero inh$bit switch i~ test~d. If thi~ switch is operated, it 1~ desirable to di~able to the auto zero correction operation3 a8 described her~in.
Aesuming that ~he auto zero inhibiting ewi~ch is of~, ~hen the control i~ tran~erred to block 53 over the tran~fer :~. 20 B8. Block ~3 t¢~ts the auto tare ~witch~
Under the aseumed conditions, the information stored ~n the storage space 8W-.T in the storag~ register 0010 lnd~cates that the AUT0-TARE switch i9 not puahed with the resu~t that the pro~ram now transfer~ to block 144 v~a tranqfer Il of ~ig. 2I.
.. CROSS-REF,E~E~C$ TO RELATED,P~TENT APP~IC~TIO~ -Thi~ appl~cat~on is related ~o Canadian application Sarial ~o,-212,5B7, filed Octobar 29, 1974.
Thl~ application discloses ~eatures claimed in and also claim~ featur~s discloQed ~n the following copending . Canadian patent applicationss the ap~lication o R. C. Lo~hbough,.~ , Ser~al ~o. 251,3~6 ~iled April 2g, 1976 ~or "Motion Detecting ,i Scale" which application is r~la~ed to the prior filed applica-tion Seri~l ~o~ 212,623 fil2d Octobar ~0, lg74 and now abandoned~
the application of R. C. Loshbough et al, S~rlal No. 251,492 i f~led April 29, 1976 for nWeight Measuring ~par~t~ which appl~-cat~on i9 r~lated to ~h~ pr~or ~iled ~pplicatlon Ser~al No.
212,706 flled Octob~r 30, 1974 and now abandoned5 th~ applica- --~, 25 t~o~ of G. D. Roba~k~ew~c~, 8erial No. 251,377 filed Aprll 29, ;, 1976 for ~Apparatu~ ~or I~olatlng ~rrors ln Printed Re~ords~
~hidh appl~cat~on is related to the pr~or f~led appl~catlon S~r~al ~lo. 212,704 f~led October 30, 1974~ ~he appllcation o~ -D. I.~-Ball, 8er~a~ ~o. 251,378 flled A~?r~l 2g, 1976 for, "W~lgh t ~aeuring And Inalcat$ng ~ppaxatu~" which application i~
~ , ~
. . ' ' . ', :.' . .
ral~od ~o tho prior ~ 3d appllcatlon Sarial N~. 212, 690 ~ a oc~cob~r 30, 197~t and n~ b.~ndonct~ th~ ~p~l~cat~on o~ R. C.
I~o~l~bough et al, S~rl~l No. 251,420 ~iled ~prll 29, lg76 for "6cale wlth l~anual Tare Enl:~y" which appllcation 1~ rel~1 od to S the prior ~led zpplica'cioI~ ~erial No. 21~,6~6 fll~d Octc~bar 30, 197~ and now ~bandoncd~ thQ a~plication o~ G. ~. ~o~a~z~siowicz, ~erial ~o. 251,41~ ~iled ~pril 29, 197~ ~or "Claar and ~as~car~
Arrang~nent ~or Digltal ~ca~uring ~pparatus " whlch applicatlon i~ r~lat~d to th~ pr~o~ ~iled t~pplicatlon Serial l~o. 212,691 ~:
~ d Octob~ 30, 1974 and now abandonad.
BAcKGRau~D OF ~ VE~TION
Thi~ invention ralatas to we~ight mea~ur~ng ar~d V~llU8 com~uti~ ~pparatus ~nd more paxtlcularly to improved ~ paratus ~or weighing, computing a value and printing an article lab~
~how~ng tbs weight, price per un~t weight and computed ~alue o~
each o~ a plurality of successive articles.
In recent ysar~ the demand for increased efficiency has creatad the need fer high speed measuring apparatu~ capable o~
~0 automatically weighing succes~ive article~ and, for each woighed ar~icle, computlnq a value ba~ed upon a predeterminod price per ~nit weight an~ print~ng an article lab~l bearing ~uch welght, pr~ce per unit weight ana computed value. Such mea~uring : apparatu~ ~ comm~nly used,. for example, in ~upermarket meat departments. ~ter a butcher cut~ and divide~ meat lnto package port~ons, the meat may be automat~cally packaged and subGaguently ., .
labsled by automatlc weigh~ mea~uring, valu~ computing and label ~r~nting app~ratu~. .
In ~e past, appara'cu~ for w~ighing an ~rt~cle, com-~uti~g un art~cle price an~ prlntlng ~n ar~lcle la~el haYe ., .
. - 2 ~
.
, 1062~90 included a combination of mechanical, optical and electrical element~. A typical prior art system of this type is described in United States Patent 3,384,193 which issued on May 21, 1968 to William C. Susor et al and United States Patent 3,453,422 which issued on July 1, 1969 to William C. Susor. This system includes a mechanical-optical scale which generates a digital signal corresponding to an article weight. A computer multiplies the measured weight by a price per unit weight, using a partial products method of multiplication, to obtain the article's value.
~ 10 The measured weight data, the price data and the computed value data are then supplied to a printer for producing an article label. The system is provided with various interloc~s which reduce the chances of printing erroneous labels or multiple labels for a single article. For example, if the price per unit weight or the tare weight data are changed, a "lock" switch must be manually pushed to prevent accidental changes in thls data.
A la~el cannot be printed if the weight or the computed value exceed the capa~ility of the system. After a label is printed, another interlock prevents printing the next label until the printed label is removed from the printer for application to the ; article. The system also includes a scale no motion detector .
which inhibits computing an article value and printing a label until the measured wei~ht reaches a steady state.
Although systems of this type have been extremely successful, there-has been a need for faster-operating and more accurate systems. Since the prior systems generally have included mechanical-optical devices for performing the weight measurement, periodic maintenance is required to maintain the mechanical linkages and the optical components in peak operating conditions. Furthermore, the systems must be manually checked . ' ... . .
.~, ' , . . .
and set to zero whcn an article ls not present on the ~cale platform. Some prlor art ~ystems also have been cnpable of produclng errors of as much as several pennies in the calculated srticle value.
SUMMARY OF T~IE INVENTION
In accordance with the present invention, electronic apparatus is provided for successively measuring the weight of articles to be labeled, for computing an article value from each measured weight and a price per unit weight supplied to the apparatus, and, for each weighed article, fo~ printing a label bearing the measured weight, the computed value and the price per unit weight used for computing such value. The apparatus is capable of operating at a high speed with a high degree of accuracy in the measured weight and the computed value.
Specifically, the present invention relates to a : computing and printing weighing scale comprising, in combination, an integrated circuit microcomputer, load cell means for supplying weight data and data input means including four ., , - ...
data input buses for supplying price data. The microcomputer computes the value of successive weighed articles from the - weight and price data, such data being supplied to the micro-computer on the four data input buses. Interface means are , provided for multiplexing such data onto the four data input buses and includes four decoders, each having a single output connected to a different one of the data input buses.
The article weight measurements are made by means of an electronic scale including at least one load cell for producing an analog signal proportional to the article weight ant an analog-to-digital converter for converting the analog . , .
_ 4 _ ~vb/mb 106Z'~90 weight signal into a digital format. The measured artlcle welght is compensated for any tare welght and for scale zero errors snd displayed on a digital indicator. Price per unit welght data i8 entered into the apparatus either through a manually operated keyboard or automatlcally from a commodlty plate in the label prlnter. The commodity plate carrles printlng type for printlng the commodity or article name on the label and coded price per unit weight data which is automatically read by the apparatus. When desired or required, a tare weight is supplied to the apparatus either through the keyboard or automatically from the scale for use in obtaining a net weight which is in turn used in ' :
: :
- - - ~ 4a -~vb~mb 10~;2'~9C~
computing the commodity value. The appara~us may also include a "price by count" mode of operation wherein labels are printed for article~ sold as so many for a particular price, such as six oranges for one dollar. Normally no weight measurement is used in printing the label in this operating mode.
The digital weight data, tare weight data and the price per unit weight data are multiplexed through an interface to an integrated circuit microcomputer which calculates the article value and controls the operating cycle of the apparatu.s.
Timing circuitry is provided to assure normal, periodic cycling of the microcomputer. Under normal operation, a value is com-puted and is multiplexed with the weight and price per unit weight data through the interface to the printer which is activated to print a label. Weight data is also multiplexed through the interface to the digital weight indicator. ~o label is printed if various interlocks and conditions exist. All interlocks normally found in apparatus of this type are provided for .. .
assuring accurate operation of the system. One interlock ' includes a lo-ck switch which must be manually actuated each time the price per unit weight data is changed before new ~ commodity values will be calculated and labels will be printed.
"7 , In addition, the scale is automatically zeroed to within a fraction of one weight graduation prior to computing a value.
, Provisions are made for expanding the displayed weight by one q 25 decimal or least significant digit to check operation of the scale automatic zeroing circuitry. A digital no motion detector is also responsive to a fraction of one significant weight digit for inhibiting label printing in the event that the scale output ~ .
' :, '.
. ,~
:, -_ s lOf~Z~290 is not within a predet~mined no motion band for a predetermined time intervaL.
When desirable or required, a tare weight is supplied to the apparatus either through a keyboard or automatically for s obtaining a net weight which is used in computing the article value. At least some of the tare weight keys are cumulative when the keys are pushed within a predetermined time interval.
If the time interval between the successive operation of the tare keys is exceeded, the last tare key pushed represents the total tare weight entered into the apparatus.
Circuitry including a manual switch is provided for selectively displaying the price per unit weight data or the computed value data from the microcomputer on the weight display.
The displayed data is then compared with the printed data for isolating the source of any error.
Accordingly, it is an object of the invention to provide electronic apparatus for successively measuring the weight of articles to be labeled, for computing a value for each ~ -weighed article and for printing a label for each weighed article.
Other objects and advantages of the invention will become apparent from the following detailed description, with reference being made to the accompanying drawings.
.
.::
~- BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
~ .
~`' 25 Fig. 1 is a schematic block diagram of apparatus embodying the principles of the present invention for weighing, computing a value and printing a label showing the weight, price per unit weight and computed value of each of a plurality of ~; successive articles;
- 6 -- . - . .
- ~0~;2Z90 Fig. 2, composed of Figs. 2A - 2J, shows a flow diagram illustratiny the operating sequence of apparatus embodying the principles of the present invention;
Fig. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a switch arrangement for entering data into apparatus for weighing, computing a value and printing a label for each of a plurality ; of successive articles;
Fig. 3A shows a multiplex interface between the analog-to-digital converter and the microcomputer multiplex input interface.
; Fig. 4, composed of Figs. 4A - 4C, is a schematic logic diagram of circuitry for controlling the operating sequence and computing a value in apparatus for weighing, com-puting a value and printing a labçl for each of a plurality of successive articles;
Fig. 5 is a schematic logic diagram showing multi-... . .
-~ plexing circuitry for supplying data to a digital weight display;
Fig. 6 is a bloc~ diagram of a printer for use in ~-apparatus accbrding to the present invention; and Fig. 7 is a diagram of one possible memory location arrangement in the random access memory in the microcomputer of the exemplary apparatus of the present invention.
. ' ' , .
' DESCRIPTION OF AN EXEMP~ARY EMBODIMENT
,,~,r' 25 Referring now to the drawings and particularly to Fig. 1, a block diagram is shown of apparatus 10 embodving the principles of the present invention for weighing articles and, , for each weighed article, for computing a value based upon a -predetermined price per unit weight and subsequently printing .
an article label bearing the weight, the price per unit weight a~d the computed value for the article. The weight of each article is measured by a scale 11. Although the scale 11 may be of various known designs using mechanics, optics and electronics, it is preferably an electronic scale of the typeshown in United States Patcnt 3,709,~09 which issucd on January 9, 1973 to Williams, Jr. et al.
The scale 11 generally comprises a load cell 12 which generates an analog output signal proportional to the weight of an article placed on a platter or weight platform 13. The analog output from the load cell 12 is applied to an analog-to-digital converter 14 which has a digital output corresponding to the gross weight of the article on the platter 13. The digital weight signal from the converter 14 is preferably in a binary coded decimal (BCD) format which is particularly desirable for use in computing an article value. The binary coded deci~al (ECD) format comprises four binary digits for each decimal digit. The weights given to the binary digits are 1, 2, 4, 8 respectively of each decimal digit. The converter 14 may be arranged to provide any desired number of decimal digits, depending upon the maxim~m weight to be weighed on the scale and also upon an increment represented by the least significant decimal digit. In the ~, "^! exemplary emkodiment described herein, as well as in the exemplary embodiment set forth in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al, it is assumed that five decim~l digits will be supplied by the analog-to-digital converter 14.
, The above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al discloses circuitry for automatically cancelling unw~.~ed direct - current signals from the direct current or analog signals from the load cell, sensor, transducer, or strain gauge. In addition, this patent discloses circuitry for aut atically zeroing the analog portion of the system while the transducer output is mamentarily interrupted and for filling in gaps in the analog signal resulting from interruption of the transducer or strain gauge output.
mb/~ 8 --~ s ~xplaincd in the above-identiEied patent to Willi~ns, Jr. et al, it i5 sometimes desirable to indicate a negative weight from the overall arrangement from the scale load cell through the converter and digital control arrangement.
Thus, when the scale has been corrected to read net weight and the container and the commodity are both rernoved from the platter, the scale should indicate a negative weight equal to ; the weight of the container which is the tare weight for which the scale has been adjusted. The overall arrangement in accor-dance with the exemplary embodiment of this invention is accordingly arranged to indicate a negative weight under these circumstances and also under other conditions described herein.
However, the arrangement for making the various analog corrections described in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al do not prevent the zero output display of the scale from varying or wandering in a random manner.
In accordance with the present invention, the digital output or display from the scale mechanism is further corrected in the manner described herein to correct for the random wandering :
; 20 of the zero display of the scale.
A digital weight signal from the scale 11 is applied to a control unit 15 through interface circuits of Fig. 3A and circuits 24 of Fig. 48. The control unit 15 includes an input/
output buffer and memory 16 which receives the digital weight ;
data through the interface circuits of Fig. 3A and the circuits 24 from the scale 11. Data input switches 17 are also connected to the input/output buffer and memory 16. The data input switches 17 include a ~anually operated keyboard for entering price data, a printer mode switch and tare weight . 30 switches. The input/output buffer and memory 16 functions as ~n ; interface with an arithmetic logic unit 18. A sequence controller 19 causes the arithmetic logic unit 18 and data memory or _ g _ :
. - . - : . .................... . .
. - . .. .
registers 20 to compute the value of each weighed artiele and to supply such value through the input/output buffer and me~ory 16 to a printer 21. l'he arithmetic logie unit 18, the sec~u~nce eontroller 19 and the data registers 20 are preferably ineluded in an integrated eireuit microcomputer, as will be discussed in greater detail belc~.
m e value is ec ~ uted from a price per unit weight `~ which is obtained either from the data input switches 17 or from a cc~mmodity plate inserted-into the printer 21. m e cc~nmodity plate automatically supplies price informatian to the input/output buffer 16 in a ma~ner similar to that described in United States Patent 3,459,272 which issued to Susor on August 5, 1969. m e cx~nmodity plate ineludes raised type for use in printing the ec~Smodity or article name on a label. Price per unit weight information is eneoded on the eommodity plate by means of the presenee or absence of a plurality of holes~or notches at pre-determined loeations. An optieal or other~suitable type of reader is provided in the printer 21 for sensing the presence or absence of the holes and for eonverting the priee per unit weight information to a BCD output. q'he weight data from the .~
~ scale is eorreeted for any tare weight and zero error by the . .
arithmetie logie unit 18 and supplied to the printer 21 and to a digital weight display 22. After a steady state weight reading is reeeived by the logie unit 15 from the seale 11, the sequence eontroller 19 eauses the arithmetie logie unit 18 to compute an article value. me computed artiele value, the net artiele weight and the priee per unit weight information are used by the printer 21. The sequenee controller 19 controls data output to the printer and initiates printing a labèl.
, :, -.:
lO~Z290 ~ ft~r n lnb~l ifi prin~n~, the s~quen~ controllor lg will normal~ ir,hibit the arlthm~tlc 1Gg1C unit 18 untll the label haQ b(sen removed ~rom the pr~nter 21 and n mot~on - no ~otion cycle ha~ appeared on the sc~le 11 to lndic~te ~hat ~he S weig~ed Articl~ ha~ b0~n rcmoved ~n~ a n~w artlcle has been placed on the scalQ 11. Tho Bequence controller 19 may ~l~o ~nhlblt the arithmstic logic unit 18 in ths ev~nt o~ the occur-rence o~ variou~ conditlons. Yor example, 1~ th-3 prico c)r tEIro lnformation i~ changed, the apparatus 1~ i~ adapted to go into -a "lock" condition whlch prevents prlnting ~ lab~l until a "loclc" swltch is man~lally actuated to extingui~h an indicator li~h~. Such an lnterlocX prevent~ an accidental change in price or tare welght data, as wh~n an operator acc~dentally bu~p~ one of t~e switches 17. Anoth~r interlock may be provided to pre-. :
15 vent print~ng a label lf data print wheels are not properly -.
~et up to the correct value, weight and price data. 8till anoSher interlock may pr6vent printing an erroneous labcl ~n the event that either the maxl~um weight capacity of the scals i 11 or the maxImum value capacity ha~ baen exceeded. ~ -For convenience, the apparatu~ 10 i8 ~dapted for : .
operating ln several dlfferent modes. The dif~erent mode~ of op~ratlon a~ect the mannor in which the printor 21 prints a label. Iho data lnput ~witches 17 include the modo switch w~ich permlts ~lecting either ~lngle~, ~dom~nd" or a ~continuou~ mode of operatlon ~or prlnting labels ln which the value $~ computed for each weighed articlo. ~n th- ~ingla m~de of operatlon, the apparatus 10 must be manually a¢tu~ted for each label which i8 prlnted. ~n the demand mode of opera-tlon, a n~w l~bel i8 printQd each time a printed label i8 removed from ~he prir.ter 21 and tho scalo 11 ha~ gone through n motlon - no ~otlon c~clo to C~UBe the comput~tion of a n~w valu9.
.
- , ' .
, In the continuous Inode o operation, the printer 21 will con-tinuously print la~els all hearing the same weight, price per unit weight and value. ~rhe mode switcll may further include "price by count" modes of "cinyle", "demand" and "continuous".
In the price by count mode of operation, the printer 21 will print labels bearing a count or factor of the number of pieces in each article or package to be labeled and the total price for this number of pieces. For example, a grocery store may package six oranges or six pears together. If the package price is, for 10 example, six for $1.29, then the label will be printed bearing the legend "$1.29" in the place of the article valu~ and "6/$1.29l' in place of the price per unit weight.
In the following description of an exemplary embodi-ment of the present invention, it is assumed that the automatic 15 zero correction feature will work within a range of -0.005 pounds - and ~0.005 pounds. However, these limits may obviously be changed to any desired value. In addition, an expanded range switch or button is provided which will allow the zero correcting feature to operate within other weight limits. For example, by 20 operating this expanded range button under certain circumstances, the automatic zero correcting arrangement may be employed to correct in the range from 0.105 pounds and 0.095 pounds. However, the arrangement in accordance with this invention is also arranged to prevent any operation of the zero correcting arrangement if t . ..
25 the indication of the weight on the scale platter or pan exceeds 0.6 pounds.
Also, a ready lamp or other indicator is provided which is turned on when indication from the scale is within - +0.002 pounds and -0.002 pounds for a predetermined interval of ; 30 time. The lamp is employed to indicate that the scale is properly corrected and in condition to weigh another object or commodity. The automatic zero wander correction does not stop at 0.002 pounds, but continues on to be corrected to zero , - ,.......... . . . ..
: . .. . . .: . -.
accuxately. The automatically operated correcting feature operates sufficiently rapid so that correction will all be completed prior to the time the ready lamp is turned on and thus prior to the time an object or commodity to be weighed is placed on the platter or pan to be weighed.
It is obvious that the predetermined limits of -0.002 and +0.002 pounds, +O.OOS pounds and -0.005 pounds and the limits of 0.6 and -0.6 pound have been ar~itrarily set or selected and that any other set of suitable limits may be selected and provided by obvious minor changes in the control equipment in accordance with the present invention.
Turning now to Figs. 2A through 2J, a flow diagram is -shown for an exemplary operating sequence of the apparatus lO for measuring the weight of an article, computing from the measured lS weight and a price per unit weight the article value and printing an article label. The flow diagram consists of a series of diamonds or rhombuses and rectangles. Each diamond zorresponds to a question having either a yes or a no answer which may be ;1~ obtained by conventional methods. Each rectangular block cor-i~ 20 responds to the performance of a specific function such as ;~ causing a label to be printed. The numbers placed in the circles to the top and left of the blocks represent input locations.
For example, an "A2" in a circle on the left of the flow diagram in Fig. 2A represents an input to the second biock from the top in sheet A of Fig. 2. The numbers in the circles to the right ` of the blocks in the flow diagram represent an output connected to a different location in the flow diagram. For example, the , first or uppermost block in Fig. 2A has an output to "El" if the answer to the question is no. This indicates that if the J 30 answer is no, a jump is made to El or the input on the first .,, ~
' block in sheet E of Fig. 2.
., :~
. .
1062~90 For convcllience, Fig. 2 has been ~eparated into parts A through J. Generally spec~king, Fig. 2A covers the basic cycling of the app~ratus 10. Upon the occurrence of a predetermined sequence of conditions, the cycle is completed with a print pulse.
S Fig. 2B represents the logic of a check of various interlocks for the occurrence of new data. Fig. 2C shows the seguence of opera-tions for the operation of the lock switch which must be pressed when data is changed and the printer 21 is in the "single" mode of operation. Fig. 2D shows the logic for checking the setting of the service switch which affects the weight display 22 and for checking for the presence of excess weight and excess value.
Fig. 2E generally represents the operation of the scale motion detector. Fig. 2F shows the operation of the "expand" switch which permits checking the accuracy of scale zero and of the auto~zero capture range expand switch. Fig. 2G shows the opera-tion of the auto-zero correction circuitry, of the price by count logic and of the value computation. Fig. 2H shows the m~mer in which the condition of value, price and weight blanki~g switches are checked and the sequence in which the outputs are actually blanked. Fig. 2I shows the manner in which tare weight is manually entered into the apparatus 10. Fig. 2J shows the sequence of operations for transferring weight signals from the analog-to-digital converter to the microcomputer.
As previously indicated, Fig. 2A shows the basic opera-ting cycle for the apparatus 10. Each new cycle is initiated at the input Al to a block 25. If motion has been present on the ` output from the scale 11 during the previous cycle of the apparatus 10, a motion flag MOT~F will be set. The motion flag MOT~F may, for example, consist of a bit stored in a memory or ~- 30 the state of a flip-flop or a latch. If the motion flag MOTNF
..
is not set, the logic jumps to the El input while if the motion flag MOT~F is set, the logic proceeds to a block 26. The logic must proceed through the block 26 before a label can be printed.
- 14 _ ' .
:: .
Thus, the ~lock 25 re~iir~s a mo~ion - no motion cycle before a label is printed. In the block 26, the presence o a motion flag MOTNF is again checked. If the flag is still present, the cycle again turns to the El input while if the flay is not present, the logic proceeds to a block 27 which checks to see if the printer is in a demand or continuous mode of operation as set on a mode switch. If the system is operating in a demand or continuous mode, the logic proceeds to the A5 input, while if it is in a single mode, logic proceeds to a block 28.
In the block 28, a check is made on whether or not the printer 21 is set up to inhibit the recognition of a motion - ~ -no motion function if a previously printed label has not been removed from the printer. If the motion detector is not inhibited, logic proceeds to A7 while if it is inhibited by the printer 21, .! 15 a check is made in block 29 on whether or not a new weight measurement is required by the printer 21 due to a lack of veri-~1 fication in the data supplied to the printer 21. If a reweigh is required, the logic proceeds to A7 while if reweigh is not required, a block 30 checks to see if print data is stored in ~ -the printer 21. If print data is stored, the system returns to Al while if print data is not stored, it proceeds to a block 31 which checks on whether or not a "no tare weight" key has been pressed. If the no tare key is pressed, a block 32 checks to see if the price per pound data is equal to zero. If the price per pound data is equal to zero, a block 33 outputs a "print"
-, pulse to the printer 21 for printing a label and the cycle returns to Al. This function is provided to allow printing of labels ~hen the weight is equal to or less than 0.1 pound, for testing.
If either the no tare key is not pressed or the price per pound is not equal to zero, the system proceeds from the blocks 31 or 32, respectively, to a block 34 which checks to see if the net weight from the scale 11 is greater than 0.1 pound. If the net weight is not greater than 0.1 pound, it is :............... -- . .
10622gO
assumed that an article is not present on the scale platform 13 and the system returns to Al. If an article greater than one-tenth pound is present on the ~cale platorm 13, a block 35 checks to see if a SET latch or flip-flop is true. If it is true, it S indicates that the system interlocks have been broken and the cycle returns to Al. If SET is not true, a block 36 checks to see if the net weight is positive. If the net weight should for any reason be negative, such as when a tare weight is entered into the apparatus lO and a pac~age or article has not yet been placed upon the scale platform 13, the cycle returns to Al. If the net weight is positive, a block 37 checks to see if an OVERCAP latch or flip-flop is true. OVERCAP is trued when the weight capacity of the apparatus lO has been exceeded.
For the following description, it will be assumed that ' 15 the apparatus iO is capable of measuring up to thirty pounds so that OVERCAP will be true if a weight greater than thirty pounds ` is pLaced upon the scale platform 13. If OVERCAP is true, the cycle returns to Al. If the capacity of the apparatus lO has not been exceeded, a "print" pulse is outputed at a block 38.
From block 38 control is returned to Al. When the control is transferred to A15, block 39 causes the system to read all external inputs including the mode switch, the tare weight switches, the price switches, the price by count switches, the auto-price input from the printer and any weig~t input from the scale ll. After the external inputs are read, a block 40 checks to see if the apparatus lO is in a "price by count" mode. If ~ the apparatus lO is in the price by count mode, logic proceeds to `~ B3 while if it is not in this mode, a block 41 checks to see if auto-price data has been received from the printer 21. As pre-viously indicated, the auto-price data may be supplied from a commodity plate inserted into the printer 21. If auto-price data is received from the printer 21, a block 42 checks to see if the price data during the last cycle was also auto-price data , . . -:
. - . . . . . .
1~6ZZ9O
received from the print~r 21. If not, the system pxoceeds to B7. If the last price was also from the printer, a block 43 reads and stores the auto-prlce data inputs from the printer 2i.
m e system then proceeds to Bl.
Turning now to Fig 2B, the logic is shown for checking the various interlocks. From the input Bl, a block 46 checks for correct parity in auto-price data received from the printer.
If there is a parity error, the logic proceeds to B7. If there is no parity error, the logic proceeds to a block 47. If the printer 21 is operating in a manual mode, the diagram in Fig. 2B
is entered through B2, wherein a block 48 checks on whether or not the last cycle was also in the manual mode. If not, the cycle proceeds to B7 while if the last cycle was also manual, the logic also proceeds to the block 47. The block 47 checks on whether or not the price data input has changed. If no change has occurred, a block 49 checks an interlock on the ; printer door. If the printer door is open,-the logic proceeds to B7 while if it is not open, a check is made by a block 50 on i~ whether or not an auto-zero inhibit signal is received from the printer 21. If no inhibit signzl is received, the cycle pro-` ceeds to B8.
Returning to the block 47, if the price input data haschanged, at a block 51 the new price input data is moved to a price per pound output memory, hereinafter referred to as 25 "P/LB OUT". The cycle then proceeds to a block 52 and an inter-lock flag I~TF is set. The cycle also proceeds to the block 52 from the block 50 if an auto-zero inhibit is received from the printer 21. The interlock flag I~TF may consist of the setting of a latch or a flip-10p or a bit stored in a memory. The presence of the flag indicates the occurrence of an interlock such as a change in the printer mode, the opening of the printer door or the presence of an auto-zero inhibit signal. After the interlock flag INTF is set at the block 52, a block 53 checks to ~' . ' ' ' ' ' .
10622gOsee if an "auto-tare" switch hcl~ been actuated. If not, the logic proceeds to Il for manually entering a tare weight. If the auto-tare switch has been pushed, a block 54 updates the tare weight by storing the current measured weight in a TARE memory and again sets the interlock flag INTF. A block 55 then checks to see if the print mode has changed. If not, the logic proceeds to B12 while if the mode has changed, a block 56 updates a "print mode out" signal which indicates when the printer 21 is in the demand or continuous modes of operation. A check is then made at a block 57 to see if the interlock flag INTF is set. If not, the logic jumps to Cl. If the interlock flag INTF was set, ~ -a block 58 clears the interlock flag I~TF and sets an "initialize"
flag I~ITF. Thus, the initialize flag I~ITF is set whenever either the price input or the tare weight input has changed. This flag inhibits the printing of a label until the lock switch is manually actuated, thus preventing an erroneous change in the tare weight or price data. After the initialize flag I~IT~ is - set, a block 59 trues the SET latch to indicate that the inter-locks hav~ been broken and the system proceeds to C5.
Fig. 2C shows logic relating to operation of the lock switch which must be actuated when the initialize flag I~ITF is set. A block 62 checks to see if the initialize flag I~ITF is set. If not, the cycle jumps to C5. If the initialize flag IWITF is set, a block 63 checks to see if the mode switch is in the demand or continuous mode. If the mode switch is in either of these modes, the cycle again proceeds to C5. If not, -a block 64 checks to see if the lock switch is pressed. If not, the cycle proceeds to C5. If the lock switch is pressed, a block 65 clears the initialize flag INITF and clears the SET
latch and continues with the C5 input to a block 66. The block 66 returns the cycle back to either Al or A2, whichever was the original point of origin for arriving to the block 66.
.
., .
-The logic o~ Fig. 2D chec}cs the setting of a service switch which permits isolatiny price and value errors in printed labels between the pxinter and the logic unit which c~lculates and stores this data, and also checks ~or the presence of either an excessive weiyht or an excessive value which may cause an error in the output from the apparatus 10. From the Dl input, a block 6g checks to see if the service switch is in a "display price" position. If so, a block 70 transfers the price data stored in the P/~B OUT memory into a WEIGHT OUT memory wherein such price data is displayed on the digital weight di~play 22.
If the service switch was not in the "display price" position, a block 71 checks to see if the service switch is in the "display value" position. If not, the cycle proceeds to D3 ~hile if it is in this position, the cycle proceeds to a block 72 which causes a transfer of value data stored in a VALUE OUT memory into the WEIGHT OUT memory for displaying the value data on the digital weight display 22. Thus, if an error is present in the price shown on the printed label and the service switch is in the display price position, a comparison may readily be made between the prlce appearing on the digital weight display 22 and the price appearing on the printed label. If these ~rices are not identical, the serviceman will know that the error is due to ~, a fault in the printer 21. If the data is identical, the service-man will know that the error is caused in the logic unit 15. A
similar check may be made on the computed value.
~ The D3 input as well as tLe outputs from the blocks 70 - a~d 72 are applied to a block 73 which turns on a "ZERO" light.
-` The ZERO light indicates that the scale is properly zeroed to within 1/4 of the least significant displayed weight digit.
A block 74 then outputs all data and the printer mode to the printer 21. Subsequently, a block 75 checks to see if the ~ maximum value capacity of the apparatus 10 has been exceeded.
'' 19-- . . ~
If the maximum valu~ hc~s been exc~eded, a block 76 will set an OVERVALUE latch or flip-flop or store a bit in a memory location. After the block 76 has set OVERVALUE or if the logic jumped to D7 because the maximum value capacity was not exceeded, a block 77 checks to see if the maximum weight capacity of the scale 11 has been exceeded. If not, the cycle will proceed to C5 where it is returned to either Al or A2. If the maximum capacity of the scale 11 has been exceeded, a block 78 sets an OVERCAP latch or flip-flop or stores a bit in a memory location and an OVERCAPACITY flip~flop or ]atch is set to turn on an indicator light. The cycle then returns through C5 to either Al or A2.
In Fig. 2E, a check is made to see if weight data read from the sca]e ll is legitimate, i.e., no analog-to-digitai ; 15 conversion is occurring in the converter 14. If not, a check is made on whether or not a zero expand switch is actuated. If weight data is legitlmate, a motion check is made to see if the data has been consistent or steady for a predetermined number of cycies. -From an input El, a block 81 checks to see if a Tl flag is set. The Tl flag is set whenever new weight data has been read from the scale 11 into the logic unit 15. If the Tl flag is not set, a block 82 checks to see if a clock signal Tl is true. A true Tl represents a time interval during which weight ~ 25 data is not permitted to change. The apparatus 10 may, for `, example, operate on a 200 millisecond cycle. Tl may be set true for an arbitrary time interval, such as true for 60 milli-seconds out of each cycle and false for the remaining 140 milli-seconds. If Tl is true, logic proceeds from the block 82 to 30 E4, while if Tl is not true a block 83 sets the Tl flag and the logic proceeds to E4. At E4, a block 84 checks to see if a "zero expand" switch is actuated. If not, the logic returns to A15 while if the zero expand switch is actuated, a block 85 sets .
1062'~90 the interlock flag I~TF and the logic rcturns to A15. The zero expand switch is used for chec~ing the accuracy and adjusting the weight zero when no weight is present on the platform 13 on the scale 11. T~hen the zero expand switch i~ closed, the weight displayed on the digital weight display 22 is shifted by one decimal poin~. Thus, if the scale normally has a maximum reading of 30.00 pounds, the displayed weight will be shifted over to display X.XXX pounds or to display as low as l/lOOOth of a pound.
If the Tl flag TlF is set when the logic reaches the block 81, a block 86 checks to see if Tl is true. If not, the logic returns to E4. If Tl is true, a bloc~ 87 clears the Tl flag TlF. A block 88 then causes a weight reading to be entered - into the logic unit 15. Next block 96 causes the tare timer state to be read out from the tare timer storage space in the - 15 RAM 187. Then in accordance with block 97, if the count in the ; tare timer is not zero it is reduced by one as indicated in block 97A and the control advances to block 89. If the count recorded in the tare timer is zero the control advances directly to block 89. After the weight is read out and the tare timer decremented if required as described above, ~lock 89 checks the memory or switches for the setting of the motion detector count and the motion detector band. The motion detector count is the number of cycles or repetitions which must occur with no motion present before a label is printed. For example, switches may be set to establish that the apparatus 10 must cycle without motion at least twice or at least three times before a label can i be printed. The band is the amount of permissible change during a no motion condition. For example, it may be determined that ~- it is desirable to have a weight reading maintained within plus or minus 0.005 pound for a no motion condition. This results in a range of 0.01 pound for the motion detector regardless of the measured weight. This arrangement eliminates prior art problems in obtaining a uniform motion detector sen~itivity for all weight ._ measurements. Thc prior ar~ optical motion detectors have not had a uniform sensiti.vity. ~fter the count and band for the motion detector are determined, a block 90 calculates the weight minus the sum of the target plus the band. If this value is ; S positive, then motion is present. The block 90 also determines the weight minus the sum of the target minus the band. If this sum is negative, then motion also is present. The taryet is taken to be the last weight reading.
~; . If the block 90 calculates that there is motion, then a block 91 transfers the logic to Fl while if motion is not pres-ent, a block 92 checks to see if a motion flag MOTNF was set during the last cycle of the apparatus 10. If the motion flag is clear, logic proceeds to F2 while if a motion flag is present, a block 93 increments by one a no motion counter. After the coun-.. . .
ter is incremented, a block 94 compares the total count with theno motion count determined at the block 89. If the contents of the counter is not equal to or greater than this count, the cycle proceeds to F2 while if it is greater than or equal to the count, the motion flag MOT~F is cleared at a block 95. The cycle then proceeds to F2.
In Fig. 2F, sequence of operations is shown or the operating sequence of the zero expand, the auto-zero capture range expand and the weight overcapacity check. The Fl input, which is entered if motion is present, is applied to a block 98 which clears the no motion counter and sets the motion flag MOTNF.
~ After the flag is set, a block 99 updates the target and sub-t tracts a digital weight of eight pounds. The output from the ~;
load cell 12 and the scale 11 preferably is always positive since it is in a digital format. Some types of analog-to-digital 30 converters 14, such as a dual slope integrating converter, are more accurate if used in a range wherein they only have a positive output. This may be accomplished by offsetting the out-- put from the scale ll to fall within the range of from 8 pounds ' .
. - . .: . : -to 38 pounds. Th-ls, the zero is arbitrarily offset by 8 pounds.
The block 99 subtracts an initial weight of eiyht pounds from the scale reading to zero the weight signal when no weight is present on the pla~ter 13. After the eight pounds is subtracted, S a block 100 checks to see whether or not the zero expand switch is actuated or true. If the zero expand switch i5 actuated, a block 101 moves the four least significant digits of the meas-ured weight, or the digits X.XXX pounds, to the WEIGHT OUT memory and clears an AUT0-ZER0 correction counter. Thus, the digital weight display 22 will now show the true zero weight setting of the apparatus 10 to within one-tenth of a normal weight gradua-tion. Since the auto-zero operation is inhibited, a block 102 turns off the ZER0 light and logic jumps to Dl.
If the zero expand switch is not closed, sequence pro-ceeds from the block 100 to a block 103 which checks to see if an "auto-zero capture range expand" switch is closed. If not, sequence proceeds to F6. ~ormally, the weight reading used by the apparatus 10 for calculating a value is automatically zeroed if the weight from the scale 11 is less than 0.005 pound when no weight is present on the platter 13 . However, when the auto-zero capture range expand switch is closed, a block 104 will check to determine if the weight recorded in the raw weight register is equal to or less than 0.6 pound.
If the weight reading is greater than 0.6 pound, the sequence jumps to G7. If it is less, block 106 causes this weight, up to 0.6 pound, to be recor~ed in the zero error correc-tion register in the AUT0-ZER0 register. The weight is then corrected at a block 105 by the contents of the AUT0-ZER0 register and moved to the WEIGHT OUT memory.
After the zero is corrected, a check is made to see if the maximum weight capacity of the apparatus 10 has been exceeded. Such maximum capacity has arbitrarily been set at thirty pounds which is generally sufficient for apparatus of the type described when used in the meat department of a grocery store. A block i07 checks to see if the corrected weight stored in the WEIG~ OUT memory is greater than thirty pounds. If it is, a block 108 sets an OVERCAP latch, flip-flop or similar memory device. If the maximum weight is not exceeded, a block 109 clears OVERCAP. Blocks 108 and 109 are connected to a block 110 which checks to see if a motion flag MOTNF is present. If not, logic proceeds to Gl, while if motion is present, a bloc};
111 checks to see if SET is true. If SET is true, the logic proceeds to G7 while if it is not true, a block 112 blanks the weight output and the logic proceeds to Dl.
Fig. 2G shows the sequence of operations of the auto-zero correction circuitry, of the price by count mode of opera-tion and of the value computation if a mode other than price bycount is selected. A correction is automatically made to errors -. .;~ .
, in the scale zero when the absolute value of the previously corrected weight is less than 0.005 pound. A total correction may be made up to 0.6 pound in 0.001 pound increments, or in other suitable incremental values. Furthermore, gross zero ~i corrections of up to 0.6 pound may be made by use of the zero capture range expand switch which stores correction weight up ~ ;, to 0.6 pound to be stored in an AUTO-ZERO memory.
The Gl input to a block 115 is compared to see if the :
` 25 absolute value of the corrected weight is less than or equal to ~ 0.005 pound. If not, a block 116 clears the 1/4 graduation flag ; to turn off a light which indicates that the weight reading used by the logic unit 15 for computing a value is within 1/4 of one graduation displayed on the digital weight display 22. From the ` 30 block 116, sequence of operations proceeds to G7, skipping any changes in the contents or correction factors stored in an AUTO-ZERO correction register. If the absolute value of the corrected weight is less than or equal to 0.005 pound, a block 117 checks ,- .
;.
to see if t~ dbsclut~ weicJht is less th~l or equal to 0.002 pound. If not, ~ block 118 sets the zero count register to twelve which in turn causes the 1/4 graduation indicator light to be turned off later in the cyc]e.
If the absolute value o~ the corrected weight is less than 0.002 pound, a block 120 indicates that the count stored in the zero count register is read out of this register but also remains stored in this register. In accordance with block 119, the zero count register is checked to determine if zero is recorded in this register. If the count is zero, block 132 chec~s the weight to determine if the weight is zero. If it is, the sequence jumps to G7. If the weight is not zero, the sequence continues to block 121. If the count in the zero count register is not zero, block 114 indicates that the count in this register is incremented by one. Thereafter, the sequence - goes to block 132 and then as described.
After the 1/4 graduation flag is set at the block 120, or af~er the logic has jumped to G5, a block ]21 checks to see if the total auto-zero correction factor stored in the AUTO-ZERO
A' 20 register is less than or equal to 0.6 pound, the maximum permis-sible correction factor. If the correction factor is greater than or equal to 0.6 pound, no ch~nge is made in the correction factor and the logic jumps to G7, w~ile if it is less than 0.6 pound the factor stored in AUTO-ZERO is modified by 0.001 pound at a block 122. After the sequence of operations jumps to G7 or after the AUTO-ZERO ccrrection factor is modified in the block 122, a block 123 causes the tare weight stored in the TARE memory to be sub--tracted from the corrected scale weight and the four most signi-ficant weight digits are moved to WEIGHT OUT. Thus, it will be apparent that an auto-zero correction is made regardless of the - fact that a tare weight may have previously been.entered into the apparatus 10.
~' .
After we~i~ht dat:a is stored in WEIGHT OUT, a block 124 checks to see if the printer mode switch has been set to a price by count mode of operation. If not, the logic jumps to G12 and subsequently a value is computed. If the apparatus 10 is in a price by count mode, a block 125 causes a factor or count received from the price by count switch to be stored in the P/~B OUT memory for supplying to the printer. A block 126 then checks to see if the price by count factor has changed from the last cycle of the apparatus 10. If a change has occurred, 10 a jump is made to A15 and all external inputs are again read.
If no change has occurred, a bloc~ 127 causes the price per - pound data entered through the price switches to be stored in the V~LUE OUT memory. If the logic has jumped to G12 and price per pound data from the switches or from the printer is present, the 15 price per pound data is moved to the P/LB OUT memory location at a block 128 and zeros are forced into a register which stores the price by count factor read from the input switches 17. ~
blocX 129 then computes a value by multiplying the contents or ~--è the P/LB OUT memory by the contents of the WEIGHT OUT memory and 20 stores the answer in the VALUE OUT memory. After the value is -computed and stored, a bloc~ 130 compares this value with $1QO, the maximum value capacity of the apparatus 10. This maximum ` value has been arbitrarily selected to limit the number of print wheels required by the printer since measuring apparatus of this 25 type, when used for labeling meat in the meat department of a groc~ry store, will normally not be required to exceed $100. If the computed value is greater than $100, a bloc~ 131 writes zeros in the V~LUE OUT memory and the logic jumps to C5 while if the maximum permissible value has not been exceeded, the logic jumps 30 to ~
... .
:~
~, .
1062;~90 In ~om~ instancc~, an operatol of thc apparatus 10 may wish to p~lnt a label which does not include all three of the price, the weigh~ ~Id the value. The weight, for example, is blanked whenever the apparatus 10 is operating in a price by S count mode. or, it may be desired to print a label bearing only the weight. This may be desirable in a wholesale operation where the wholesale purchaser will reprice the article for retail sales.
Therefore, the apparatus 10 may be provided with manual switches which permit seIectively blanking the price, the weight and the value from the printed label. The logic for performing these functions is shown in Fig. 2H.
The Hl input is connected to a block 134 which checks to see if a "blank price" switch has been actuated. If the switch is actuated, a block 135 causes blanks or numbers which index the print wheels to blank spaces to be stored in the P/LB OUT memory location. If the blank price switch is not actuated, or after blanks have been stored in the P/LB OUT memor-y, a block 136 checks to see if a "blank weight" switch has been actuated. If the blank weight switch is actuated, a block 137 checks to see if the apparatus 10 is operating in a price by count mode. If the apparatus 10 is in the price by count mode, the weight wiil already have been blanked and logic jumps to H6 while if it is not in the price by count mode, a block 138 blanks the WEIGHT OUT memory. If the blank welght switch was not actuated, a block 139 checks to see if the scale is in the price by count mode. If not, logic jumps to H6 while if it -s ` in this mode, the block 138 will blank the WEIGHT OUT memory.
If the WEIGHT OUT memory has been blanked or the logic has ~umped to H6, a block 140 checks to see if a "blank value"
switch has been actuated and, if not, the logic jumps to Dl while if it is actuated, a block 141 blanks the VALUE OUT memory and the logic then jumps to Dl.
. .
- - .
Fig. 2I shows the manner in ~hich the tare weight is manually en~ered into the apparatus 10. The tare weight, which is stored in the TARE memory, is subtracted from the measured gross article weight for obtaining a net weight used in com-puting a value. A check is made at a block 144 to see if a"no tare" switch has been pushed. If the no tare switch is pushed, the TARE memory is cleared and the interlock flag INTF
is set at a block 145 and the logic then jumps to Bl0. If the no tare switch was not pushed when the logic was at the block 144, a block 146 checks to see if any other tare switch is pushed.
If not, the logic jumps to B10 while if a tare switch is pushed, the bloc~ 147 checks to see if a three second time interval has elapsed since the last tare switch was pushed. If three seconds has elapsed, a block 148 clears t~e TARE memory and, subsequently, the tare weight represented by the pushed tare switch is stored in the TARE memory and the interlock flag I~TF is set. If the three second interval has not elapsed when the block 147 is reached, the contents of the TARE memory are updated by adding the tare value represented by the pushed tare switch to the contents of the TARE memory. Thus, the tare weight stored in ` the TARE memory will then represent the accumulation of tare weights from two tare switches. For example, an operator may push a 0.10 pound tare switch and a 0.06 pound tare switch within a three second time interval and the total tare weight stored in the ~ARE memory will equal 0.16 pound. From the block 149, the logic returns to B10. ~ne three second time interval was ;-selected on the basis that most people can select and push two - switches in this interval. Of course, a different time interval s may be used.
- 30 Fig. 2J shows an exemplary sub-routine or sequence of operations for causing weight signals received from the analog-.
' ... . .
to-digital converter to be entered in the weight registers of the microprocessor employed in the present invention. The sub-routine or sequence o~ operations shown in Fig. 2J are repre-sented in Fig. 2E by bloc~ 88.
The remaining drawinys show details of logic and cir-cuitry of an exemplary embodiment of the invention for performiny the functions described in the description of Fig. 2. Turning first to Fig. 3, the input switches 17 including the price, printer mode and tare weight data input switches are shown in detail. Price by count data, price per unit weight data, tare ; weight data and printer mode data is all supplied to the input/
output buffer and memory 16 in the control unit 15 on nine switch buses 155 which represent the digits one through nine. It will be apparent that no bus is needed for a zero entry which corres-ponds to the absence of a signal on any of the nine buses 155.
When the apparatus 10 is operated in a price by colnt mode, a count or factor is entered through a price by count switch 156.
The price by count switch 156 is as a two-wafer or two-pole rotary switch having eleven contacts for selectively entering a count two through a count twelve. It will be appreciated that a count of one would not normally be used nor is there normally a need for a count greater th~n twelve, although this may be accomplished by providing additional contacts on the switch 156.
A count of two through a count of nine is entered into the control 25 unit 15 by setting the switch 156 and strobing or grounding a strobe line 157 while a count of ten, eleven or twelve is entered by setting the switch 156 and strobing a strobe line 158.
When the price by count switch 156 is set to a factor between two and nine, a signal on the strobe line 157 causes an appropriate output on one of the nine switch buses 155. Similarly, when a ,~' . . .
_ ~9 _ . . .
, ~ . ' - - '' ' ' ' . ' 10~i2290 signal is appli~d on the strobe lirle 158 ~nd the price by count switch 156 is set to a factox of ten, eleven or twelve, a signal will also appear on one of the switch buses lS5.
The apparatus 10 is designed for calculating an article value from price per unit weight data having three significant ; digits or from $0.01 up to $9.99 per pound. The price per unit weight data is manually entered through three switches 159-161.
Each of the price switches 159-161 is a ten-contact rotary switch.
A contact representing zero is not connected while contacts on the switches representing the digits one through nine are con-nected to corresponding ones o~ the nine switch buses 155. The switch 159 is used for entering pennies, or the least significant digit of the price data. A strobe line 162 is connected for providing a signal on the common ~erminal of the penny switch 159.
When a signal is applied on the strobe line 162, the penny price data is entered on the connected one of the switch buses 155. The switch 160 is provided for entering dimes price data when a signal - is received on a dime strobe line 163. Similarly, the switch 161 is connected for supplying dollar price data when a signal is received on a strobe line 164. Thus, price data up to a ma~imum ~ of $9.99 per pound may be entered through the three price switches - 159-161. Of course, it will be apparent that the number of price switches may be varied to meet other requirements for the apparatuS
10 and the monetary units represented by the price switches may be changed to the local currency where the apparatus 10 is used.
Tare weight is entered into the logic unit 15 by means o~ nine momentary contact tare switches 165 which enter tare weight in l/lOOth pound increments from 0.01 pound to 0.09 pound and a switch 166 which enters a tare weight of 0.10 pound. A
signal is periodically applied by the logic unit 15 on a strobe line 167 which is connected to the l/lOOth pound tare switches 165. These switches 165 are normally open push button switches.
In the event that one of the switches 165 is pushed when a signal ~ 30 -~ .
1062Z90 .
appears on the s~robe line 167, an outpu appears on the associated one of the switch buses 155. A strobe line 168 is con-nected to the 0.10 pound tare switch 166, also a push button switch, and to an "auto-tare" switch 170 and a "no tare" switch 171. In the event that any o~ the switches 166, 170 or 171 is pushed when a signal appears on the strobe line 168, an output - will appear on an associated one of the switch buses 155.
The apparatus 10 is designed for operation with a key-board tare weight ranging from a min~mum of 0.01 pound to a lQ maximum of 0.19 pound. This is accomplished b~ providing a timing circuit in the control unit 15 which is initiated whenever one of the switches 165 or 166 is actuated. If one of the switches 165 is actuated and within the measured time interval the switch 166 is actuated, the tare weights for the two switches are summed. Similarly, if the switch 166 is actuated first and ~; within the measured time interval one of the switches 165 is actuated, the total of the two tare weights is again summed.
If two of the tare switches 165 are actuated within the time interval, only the most recent value is entered. The time interval may, for example, be about three seconds which should afford sufficient time for an operator to select and actuate ; two of the tare switches 165 and 166. If a greater time elapses, only the most recent are weight entered through a switch 165 or 166 is accepted by the control unit 15.
A printer mode switch 172 also supplies data over the switch buses 155. The printer mode switch 172 is a rotary switch ' having a common terminal connected to a printer mode strabe 173.
: .
When a signal is received over the strobe 173, an output appears on one of the switch buses 155, depending upon the setting of the mode switch 172. In an exemplary embodiment of the invention, the printer mode switch permits selecting between a "single"
mode, a "demand" mode, a "continuous" mode, a Uprice by count-single" mode, a "price by count-demand" mode and a "price by count-contlnuous" mod~. In either of the single modes of opera-tion, a single label is printed each time an article i5 weighed.
The printer is actuated each time the scale goes through a motion -no motion cycle, a value is computed and the previous label has S been removed from the printer 21. In the demand modes of opera-tion, labels are printed as previous ones are removed from the printer. In the continuous modes of operation, the printer will continuously print a series of labels haviny the same weight, price per unit weight and value until printing is manually terminated.
The switches 17 also include an "auto-price" switch 174. When price information is to be supplied automatically from a commodity plate in the printer, the auto-price switch 174 is actuated. When the switch 174 is actuated, an indicator light 175 is automatically illuminated to annunciate this fact. A
switch 176 is provided for expanding the capture range of the auto-zero circuitry from a normal range of zero plus or minus 0.005 pound to up to plus or minus 0.6 pound. The switch 176 is a momentary push button switch. A switch 177 is provided for inhibiting operation of the auto-zero circuitry to permit govern-ment inspectors to chec~ the weighing accuracy of the apparatus 10. Finally, a switch 178 is provided for expanding the weight ~- reading shown on the digital weight display 22. The zero expand switch is normally used by maintenance people in calibrating the ^ 25 zero weight setting for the apparatus 10. When the zero expand switch 178 is actuated, the displayed weight which is normally . .j .
in a format of XX.XX pounds is shifted over by one digit to dis- -:, .,~ . .
play a weight reading of X.XXX pounds. This permits calibrating the scale zero to within l/lOOOth of a pound. Finally, the .
switches 17 include a "lock" switch 179. Any time there is a change in data entered into the apparatus 10 other than weight data, the apparatus 10 moves from what is normally referred to as - a "ready" state to a "set" state to indicate that an interlock ; ,.
., .
:.. , . .. .. , - . ~ : : : ; ~
lQ62290 has been broke~. The lock switch 179 must be manually actuated to return the apparatus 10 to the ready state. Thus, an operator cannot accidentally bump one of the tare switches 165 and 166 or the price switches 159-161 after the apparatus 10 is in the ready state and print erroneous labels.
Fig. 3A shows an exemplary arrangement for multiplexing the output decimal digits from the analog-to-digital converter o the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent so that this infor-mation may be transmitted over four data conductors or leads.
In addition, four address leads are required to indicate which of the decimal digits is being transmitted over the four common leads at any particular instant or interval of time.
While both the above-identified patents to Williams, Jr.
et al and the present exemplary embodiment of the invention show five decimal digits, it is obvious that any suitable number of decimal digits may be employed merely by increasing the num~er of counterstages and latches and related equipment.
~ The arrangement shown in Fig. 3A is controlled by a i source of control signals 350. This source of signals may be an oscillator or any other source of control or clock signals which may be derived from the analog-to-digital converter such as a clock source of this converter which would be divided down to a much slower pulse or cloc~ rate.
The clock source 350 is further divided by five by equip-ment 351 which may be of any suitable form. The output of thisdividing circuit as shown in Fig. 3A comprises a binary output having conductors 1, 2 and 4. This is the weight of the signals output from the frequency divider 351. These signals are then applied to the multiplexing interface circuits 352, 353, 354 and 355 which may be all the same. These devices are arranged to switch the five input leads shown to the one out~ut lead under control of the input binary address signals on conductors 1, 2 and 4. Thus, when the conductors 1, 2 a~d 4 are all zero, the .
. ., ~ . .
- , . :
input leads Al, ~2, A4 ~nd A8 are connected respectively to WT. DATA 1, WT. D~T~ 2, WT. D~TA 4 and WT. D~TA 8 leads. When a one signal i5 applied to the conductor 1 input address conductor and the other two address conductors are zero, then the Bl, B2, B4 and B8 input leads are connected to the respective WT. DATA 1 lead, the WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 conductors, respectively. In a similar manner, the other input conductors of these switching devices are connected to the output weight data leads.
10The input leads Al, A2, A4 and A8 are connected to the four binary output leads from the first decade of latches 136 of the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al. Similarly, `i the input conductors Bl, B2, B4 and B8 are connected to the four binary output leads from the second decade of latches 137. The ~ ' ` 15 remaining input leads are similarly connected to the corresponding binary leads of the other output decade latches 138, 139 and 140 of the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent.
In addition, the output binary coded signals over con-ductors 1, 2 and 4 from the divider 351 are connected to a transla-20 ting circuit arrangement 356 such that when all zeros are applied -~on the leads 1, 2 and 4, zero will be also applied to the digit - selector leads DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D AND DIG SEL E thus .
indicating that the first decade signals appear on the weight data leads WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DAT~ 4 and WT. DATA 8.
When a one is applied to the number one lead, a one or voltage signal will be applied to the DIG SEL B conductor thus indicating that the B decade signal will be transmitted over the WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 leads. Similarly, a one signal will be applied to the digit selector leads C, D and E
when the corresponding weight data signal of these decimal digits -is applied to the WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA
.:, 8 leads.
Tha switching devices for switching any one of the input . . .
:: . - ................... . .
: . ~
~ 06~Z~0 lines to ~n output line are similar to the eight-line to one-line decoders 198, 199, 200, 202 of Fig. 4B except that the last three of the eight-line conductors are not connected. Similarly, the dividing arrangements 351 and the tr~slating arrangement 356 are S well-known and commercially available.
Details o an exemplary control unit 15 are shown in Fig. 4. ~ig. 4 consists of Fig. 4A, Fig. 4B and Fig. 4C which are arranged as shown on the first sheet of the drawings. In an exemp-lary embodiment of the invention the control unit 15 is a micro-computer 185 which fu~ctions to compute the value of each weighedarticle and to control the operating sequence of the apparatus 10.
The microcomputer 185, for example, may be of a type commercially available in integrated circuits and in the exemplary em~odiment described hexein the microcomputer 185 comprises a Model MCS-4 Microcomputer Set manufactured by Intel Corporation of Santa Clara, California. Such a microcomputer employed in the exemplary embodiment of the present invention describe~ herein includes a central processing unit (CPU) 186, a random access memory (RAM) 187 and five read only memories (ROM) 188-192. In the exemplary arrangement described herein, the CPU 186 is an Intel Type 4004 integrated circuit, the RAM 187 is an Intel Type 4002 integrated circuit and the ROM's 188-192 are Intel Type 4001 integrated circuits. However, it will be ~ppreciated that other commerciall~
available integrated circuit microcomputers or other types of commercially available computers will operate in accordance with the principles described herein.
These various CPU, RAM and ROM units are interconnected in the manner shown in Fig. 4A, as required in order for these units to cooperate one with another as required by the circuit con-figurations of these standard commercially available units. Theconnections are clearly described in the Users Manual for the MCS-~Microcomputer Set published by the Intel Corporation. Briefly, the ROM's, RAM and the CPU are all interconnected in parallel by tha .
data bus system shown at the top of Fig. 4A. These connections are in accordance with the requirements of the computer as com-mercially available. These connections permit the cooperation between the ROM's, the RAM and the CPU. Thus, the CPU will trans-~it an address over the bus system which defines a storage space in one of the ROM's, for example. The ROM having this storage ` space has internal control circuitry which will respond to this address and in turn cause information stored at the designated address to be transmitted back over the data bus system to the CPU
which then responds to this information in the usual manner.
The storage portion of the RAM, the ROM's and the sequence controlling portion of the CPU comprise the sequence controller 19 shown in Fig. 1. Arithmetic unit 18 of Fig. 1 comprises the arith-metic unit of the CPU 186. The data registers 20 also comprise registers in the CPU 186 and the registers in the RAM 187. Input/
output ports of the ROM's 188-192 and the RAM 187 and the related equipment comprise the input/output buffer and memory 16 shown in ~ -Fig. 1.
The read only memory units referred to herein as ROM's j 20 188-192 store fixed data and also store a series of control orders or instructions for controlling the operating sequence of the entire apparatus 10. These orders or instructions, as is well understood by persons of ordinary skill in the programming and computer art, , control the central processing unit CPU 186. These orders or in-structions are readily obtained by persons of ordinary skill in the ~~ programming and computer art from the flow charts of Fig. 2A-2J by ;~1 translation of the flow charts into computer language as required by the particular microcomputer and set forth in the instructions in the users manual for the respective computer. A program listing for performing the operations specified in Figs. 2A-2J is attached as an Appendix to this specification. The program in the Appendix is in the language required for an Intel MCS-4 microcomputer, as . ~ , .
~ specified in the Users Manual for the MCS-4 Microcomputer Set.
.~. .
s~ - 36 -.; .... ..
. , : .
.- . : . : - -.- . -~
Fig. 7 shows the storage areas of the R~M 187 and the storage areas assi~ned to various reyisters for controlling input and output data, as well as process data, so that the data con-trol apparatus will operate to automatically correct the zero indication of the scale in accordance with the present invention.
The control orders or instructions control the CPU 186 so that it will obtain the necessary fixed information from the ROM's 188-192 as well as the required control orders and instruc-tions and obtain the data from the RAM 187 and from the various input devices so that the correct weight of each weighed article ~; will be accurately determined and then, after various conditions are met, its value computed, and after the value is computed and various other conditions are met, causes a label to be printed.
The data used by the microcomputer 185 consists of data 15 from the switch buses 155, data from the scale 11, data from the printer 21 and data from various interlocks. Four address out-puts 193 fro~ the RAM 187 are connected through inverters 194 to four address buses 195. Address information and other data supplied from the RAM 187 to the address buses 195 determines the data supplied to the microcomputer 185 and the data supplied from the con~rol unit 15 to the printer 21. External data from, for example, the switches 17, is supplied to the microcomputer 185 on four input data buses 196 connected to the ROM 188. At :.
-~ the proper time interval, the external input data on the buses 25 196 passes through the ROM 188 onto four input/output data buses 197 connected in parallel with the five ROM's 188-192, the RAM
187 and the CPU 186.
` The external input data is multiplexed onto the buses 196 by means of four 8-line to 1-line decoders 198-201 and a . - .
; 30 decimal-to-binary coded decimal (BCD) decoder 202. Each of the four 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201 has a single output con-nected to a different one of the external input data buses 196 connected to the ROM 188. Three of the four data address buses .. . .
............... . ,. , : . - ..
106Z~90 195 from the RAM 187 are connected in parallel to the four decoders 198-201 for selecting the inputs to the decoders 198-201 which are connected simultaneously to the buses 196. Thus, correspondinq ones of the eight inputs to the four decoders 198-201 are connected to the outputs for such decoders. The zeroinputs for each of the four decoders 198-201 are connected to the four outputs from the decimal-to-BCD decoder 202. when a zero address is supplied to the data select inputs of the decoders 198-201, the nine switch buses 155 are connected in series through the decimal-to-8CD decoder 202 and the line zero inputs of the decoders 198-201 to the four data input buses 196 to the micro-computer 185.
While the switch buses lS5 are connected to the microcomputer 185, signals are sequentially applied to the price 15 switch strobes 162-164, the price by count strobes 157 and 158, ~-^ the tare switch strobes 167 and 168 and the mode switch strobe 173 for entering this data into the microcomputer 185. The strobe signals are applied on these strobe lines from a BCD-to-decimal decoder 203. The ROM 190 has four data outputs 204 con-~i! 20 nected respectively through four inverters 205 to four address ~'l buses 206. The address buses 206 supply address data to the BCD-to-decimal decoder 203 for sequentially scanning the ten outputs ~- which strobe the price switch strobes 162-164, the price by count strobes 157 and 158, the tare switch strobes 167 and 168 and the mode switch strobe 173.
When price per unit weight data is received in an automatic mode from a commodity plate in the printer 21, such data is received over four lines 210-213. The four lines 210-213 are connected, respectively to the line one inputs on the 30 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201.' Four weight digit selection inputs 214-217 are connected to the line two inputs to the decoders 198-201, respectively, and four weight data lines 218-221 are connected, respectively, to the line three inputs to the ' .,... ... ' ` ~: ' - ' : '' -decoder~ 198~201. The data appearing on the digit selection inputs 214-217 identifies which weight digit is present on the weight data lines 218-221. The weight data appearing on the lines 218-221 at any given time is a single digit of weight in a S BCD format. If five digits of weight are to be received from the ~- scale 11, the five weight digits are sequentially read by alternately receiving the digit selection data on the lines 214-217 and the actual weight data on the lines 218-221.
Interlock information is supplied to the microcomputer 185 by means of the line four through line six inputs of the decoders 198-200 and the line four through line seven inputs of the decoder 2Ql. The line four input to the decoder 198 receives data from the lock switch 179, the line five input is connected to a motion detector inhibit output from a manual print switch in the printer 21 and the line six input receives a "reweigh" signal from the printer 21. The line four input to the decoder 199 is -connected to a price contact on a service switch which, when actuated, connects thé line four input to ground. When the service switch is actuated, price data is shifted into a weight memory for displaying on the digital weight display 22. The line five input to the decoder l9g is connected to a lead 222 which receives a signal when a label is printed, as will be dis-cussed in greater detail below. The line six input to the .:. . .
decoder 199 is connected to receive an acknowledgment signal from ; 25 the printer 21 when prlnt data for a label has been stored.
The line four input to the decoder 200 is connected to a value contact on the service switch which, when actuated, causes the computed value to be shown on the digital weight dis-~i play 22. The line five input to the decoder 200 is connected ~ 30 to the auto-price switch 174 and through an amplifier 223 to the `'! auto-price indicator 175. When the apparatus 10 is operated with an auto-price received from the printer 21, a parity check is made to verify the accuracy of the price per unit weight data.
~" ' ` .
An auto-price parity sisnal is a~plied on a line 224 to the line six input to the decoder 200. The printer door has an interlock switch connected to the line four input to the decoder 201. This interlocX prevents accidental actuation o~ the printer while an S operator has the door open for changing commodity plates or for maintenance. The line five input to the decoder 201 is connected to the zero eYpand switch 178 (Fig. 3), the line six input is connected to the Tl clock (not shown) which provides a pulse signal to indicate the time interval during which weight data may be read from the scale 11. As previously indicated in the discussion of Fig. 2, the Tl clock may have a 200 millisecond cycle, comprised of 60 milliseconds in which weight data may be ~ ~-;' read from the scale 11 and 140 milliseconds in which new weight data is measured by the scale 11. Finally, the line seven input to the decoder 201 is connected to the capture range expand switch 176.
~i The line seven inputs to -the decoders 198-200 are , connected to three switches 225-227, respectively. one of the , switches 225-227 is closed to esta~lish the number of sequential hits or no motion cycles of the motion detector before a label is printed. The switches may, for example, indicate that only a single hit is required if the switch 225 is closed, two hits are required if the switch 226 is closed and three hits are ~ required if the switch 227 is closed.
-~i 25 Output data from the microcomputer 185 is stored within a random access memory 228. Weight, price and computed value 1 data is supplied to the RAM 228 from the RAM 187 in the micro--~ computer 185 over the buses 195. Address information for storing . data in the RAM 228 is supplied from the ROM 190 over the buses 30 206. The buses 2Q6 are connected through an address selector 229 to address inputs on the RAM 228. The ROM 189 is connected over a line 230 to an input to the address selector 229 for connecting the buses 206 to the RAM 228 for supplying a data storage or :: . , . I . . .
write address or for connecting four buses 231 to the RAM 228 for supplying a readout address. Thus, when weight data or price data is supplied to the microcomputer 185, such data is also stored in the RAM 228 and when a value is cornputed, the computed value is also stored in the RAM 228. The ROM 189 enables writing or storing data in the RAM 228 by applying a "write enable"
signal through an amplifier 236 to a line 237. The RAM 228 has four output buses 232 which are connected in parallel for supply-ing data to the printer 21 and to the weight display 22. The output buses 232 are also connected through three exclusive OR
gates 233-235 for generating a parity bit from the output data.
A BCD signal is generated in the printer corresponding to the setting of each print wheel in the printer 21. A parity bit generated from the setting of each print wheel is compared with -i 15 the corresponding parity bit from the gates 233-235 for verifying ~.
the accuracy of the printer setup. If there is a lack o~ parity, a "reweigh" signal is applied from the printer 21 to the line six input to the decoder 198.
As indicated above, an output address is supplied to ;~
~ 20 the ~AM 228 over the readout address buses 231. The output ;~3 address buses 231 are also connected to supply an output data address to the weight display 22 and are connected through ampli-fiers 240 to supply address data on outputs 240' to the printer 21. An address is applied on the buses 231 from a four bit address counter 241. A clock s.ignal is applied from a clock , source (not shown~ to a decade counter 242. One output of the t counter 242 is applied through an inverter 243 for counting up the four bit address counter 241. A different output from the decade counter 242 is applied through an inverter 244 for supplying a clock signal to the printer 21.
_ 41 -., 106Z~90 An output 245 from the XOM 189 in the microcomputer 185 is connected throu~h an inverter 246 to a line 247 which enables quad bistable latches 248. When the latches 248 are enabled, data present on the address and data buses 195 from the RAM 187 is set into the latches 248. One output 249 from the latches 248 is a memory update request. The memory update request line 249 is connected to a NAND gate 250. The ~AND gate 250 has an output -~ -connected through an AND gate 251 to an enable input on the four bit address counter 241. Th2 address selection line 230 con-nected from the ROM 189 is also connected to a second input of the A~D gate 251. A signal is applied on the line 230 to the AND gate 251 at the same time the readout address lines 231 are connected to the R~M 228. If the output of the ~A~D gate 250 is high at the same time, the A~D gate 251 will enable the four bit .
address counter 241 for supplying a se~uence of addresses for reading data from the RAM 228. The ~AND gate 250 also has four ` inputs connected to the address buses from the counter 241 and a printer off input from the printer which is high when the , printer is off. Thus, when the bistable latches 248 are set to apply a signal on the memory update request line 249 or when the printer is off, the address counter 241 will cycle whenever a signal is received from the ROM 189 on the line 230. Once a cycle is started by a signal on either the memory update request line 249 or by a pulse on the printer off line, the address counter 241 will continue to cycle until all of the address buses 231 go to a logic zero.
The ~istable latches 248 also include an output 252 which indicates when the weight readlng is below zero. The output 252 is connected through an inverter 253 to supply a MINUS sign output 254 to the printer 21 and also to the weight display 22. Still another output 255 from the latches 248 is ~onnected through an inverter 256 to an output 257 which illuminates an out-of-range indicator lamp. A fourth output 258 :, ~
from the la~ches 248 is connected through a NAND gate 259 to illuminate a r~ady indicator lamp. A "print stored" input 260 from the printer 21 is connected through an inverter 261 to a second input of the NAND gate 2S9. The output 258 from the latches 248 is also connected through an inverter 262 to a line 263 which supplies a SET signal to the printer. The line 263 is also connec~ed through an amplifier 264 for illuminating a SET
indicator lamp. The printer also supplies the REWEIGH signal on a line 265 through an amplifier 266 to illuminate a "weigh again"
indicator lamp, a "take label" signal over a line 267 through an amplifier 268 to a take label indicator lamp and an "add label"
signal over a line 269 through an amplifier 270 to an add label indicator lamp. An indicator is also provided for indicating when the apparatus 10 is operating within the weight zero limit ; .
or within a predetermined fraction of a weight graduation of zero. ~-`
, This has previously been referred to as the 1/4 graduation lamp.
I The ROM 192 has a single output 271 which is connected through an inverter 272 to 2 line 273. The line 273 is connected through an ~^ inverter 274 for energizing the zero limit indicator la~p.
During normal operation of the microcomputer 185, the ROM 189 applies a periodic pulse on the line 247 for resetting the bistable latches 248. This pulse will appear once each time - the microcomputer 185 goes through a complete program cycle.
In typical operation of the microcomputer 185, the pulse will appear at about 0.2 second intervals. However, it is possible for a noise pulse or some other disturbance to cause the central processing unit 186 to end up at an incorrect or nonexistent address. In such event, the microcomputer 185 becomes "hung up"
and is in effect "dead". When this condition occurs, the micro-computer 185 must be restarted before a label can be printed.Timing circuitry is provided for automatically restarting the microcomputer 185 in the event that two sequential periodic pulses are missing from the line 247.
- ' `
. - .
The lin~ 247 i9 connected through an inverter 28I, a current limiting resistor 282 and a diode 283 to the input of a threshold or level detec~or 284. The input of the threshold detector 284 is also connected through a high value resistor 285 to a voltage source and through a capacitor 286 to ground. When the voltage on the input of the threshold detector 284 is below a predetermined level, the threshold detector 284 will have a high or positive output. However, if the input of the threshold ; detector 284 exceeds a predetermined voltage level, the output 10 of the threshold detector 284 will go negative. The capacitor 286 is charged at a relatively slow rate through the resistor 285.
Each time a cycle pulse appears on the line 247, the inverter 281 will have a low output for rapidly discharging the capacitor 286 through the diode 283 and the current limiting resistor 282. Unde~
normal operation o~ the microcomputer 185, the cycle pulses on the line 247 maintain the charge on the capacitor 286 below the threshold level of the detector 284. However, in the event of two sequential cycle pulses failing to appear on the line 247, the capacitor 286 will become sufficiently charged as to cause the threshold detector 284 to change states.
When the output of the threshold detector 284 goes negative, a capacitor 287 is discharged through a diode 288 and a current limiting resistor 289. A decrease in the voltage on the capacitor 287 causes a second threshold detector 290 to change ` 25 from a negative to a positive output which is applied through a resistor 291 to the base of a transistor 292. The transistor 292 then switches states of conduction for applying a recycle or - restart signal on a line 293 connected in parallel to the CPU
186, the RAM 187 and the ROM's 188-192 in the microcomputer 185.
30 A resistor 294 and a diode 295 are connected in series between the input and the output of the threshold detector 284. After the threshold level is reached and the output of the detector 284 goes negative, the capacitor 286 is discharged through the .
- ~-1062;Z 90 resistor 294 and th~ diode 295 until the output from the de~ector again becomes posi~ive. The capacitor 287 is then charsed through a resistor 296, thereby causing the outputs of the detector 290 and the transistor 292 to change. If two more S cycle pulses are absent from the line 247, the capacitor 286 will again become charged sufficiently for the outputs of the detectors 284 and 290 and the transistor 292 to change states, applying another clear and restart signal to the microcomputer 185.
Fig. 7 is a diagram showing one of many possible memory location arrangements in the random access ~emory ~WM 187 of the exemplary arrangement of the apparatus of the present invention.
As indicated in Fig. 7, the RAM is provided with ~our memory register areas. Each of these memory register areas is arranged to store four binary digit words which in the exemplary embodiment described herein usually are ~oded to represent a decimal digit. Each memory area 16 is arranged to store 16 of ` these four binary digit numbers or other information. The register areas are selected by address designated "4 HIGH" above each one of the areas. Thus, the address of the first area is 0000. The address for the other three memory register areas is shown above each of these register areas. In addition, each of the four binary digits forming a word or number in each of the areas is assigned an address, which address is shown to the left , 25 of the first memory area. As indicated, the address for the.'1 . :
memory areas comprlse the first four high numbers, or binary digits of the address, while the address of the individual words or nu~bers within each area is designated by an address designated "4 LOW". Thus, at least certain of the same address symbols may be employed to designate both memory areas and also the words ` within the memory areas. Thus, two addresses are distinguished by their location in the addresses as is well known by persons of ordinary skill in the art of microcomputer operation.
- 45 - .
.. ..
The R~M 187 also includes four status registers shown in the lower part of Fig. 7. Each of the status registers has an address similar to the corresponding memory register area as indicated above each of the status registers. The rectangles in S the status registers represent a storage space for a single binary digit or bit. Thus, each of the status registers may store four four-bit binary words. In addition, each of the bits of each of the words may be employed to store a binary bit which is independent of the other binary bits of a particular word at the particular address. In other words, as indicated, the zero correction sign bit, 714, is used to store the sign of the zero correction. This bit is stored in this bit space independently of the information stored in the other three bits spaces of the last word of the first status register.
As indicated in Fig. 7, the first five word spaces 710 in the first register space are employed to store the five binary 1 coded decimal digits o~ the raw weight received from the weighing apparatus and are designated raw registar. The next five four-~1 bit register word spaces 735 are employed to store the five decimal digits of the motion target weight. The next word, or register space 726, is employed to store the count or number of hits employed to determine whether or not there is motion upon ~ the platter of the scale. The last five word spaces 711 are -~ employed as a zero correction register and store the five BCD
digits employed to correct the zero indication of the scale.
The other register spaces are designated to indicate the manner in which the particular register spaces are employed.
The various status register spaces shown at the bottom - of Fig. 7 are similarly designated with the name of the bit or bits employed to record the v~rious information required to provide the various features of the present invention, as described herein.
.: . , .:.. .. . . ...
OPERATI ON OF T~IE SYSTEM
As described in the above-identified patent to Williams, Jr. et al, the sensor controlled by the load cell 12 of the scale provides an output voltage which represents the load on the load cell, which in turn is a function of the load on the scale. This output voltage is then amplified and processed so as to remove an unwanted direct current component and to reduce or remove unwanted variations in this voltage so that the voltage accurately repre- -sents the load on the load cell and the load on the scale. This analog voltage is then employed to control an analog/digital converter 14.
Also the analog-to-digital converter employed in the exemplary system described herein, in addition to generating a digital signal representing the weight on the scale to be dis-played also generates a digital signal repre~enting a fraction ofthe weight represented by the least significant digit of the displayed weight. In th~ exemplary embodiment described herein, it is assumed that this additional signal represents tenths of , :
the weight represented by the least significant digit displayed. ~ -However, this additional digital signal may represent any other ~ suitable or desirable fraction of the weight represented by the `~ least significant digit displayed.
The analog-to-digital converter in effect samples this corrected analog voltage at repeatedly recurring instants of time.
These sample voltages are then employed to control the output of the digital converter. Thus the output of the digital converter is a digital signal which accurately represents the load on the load cell and thus the load on the scale. In the exemplary arrangement described in the above-identified patent to Williams, JS. et al, and in the exemplary arrangement described herein, the analog-to-digital converter requires a cycle of about 200 , .~ .
.
, --10~2Z90 milliseconds. This cycle is thus repeat~d approximately five times a second. Near the end of each cycle o~ operation of the analog-to-digital converting apparatus, this apparatus transfers digital signals representing the analog weight input to a set of latches. These latches then maintain these digital signals for a predetermined interval of time. Duriny a portion of this interval of time, the analog-to-digital converter also applies an output signal to the Tl lead. This Tl signal is obtained from device 100 of Figure 2 of the above-identified Williams, Jr. et al patent. Thus during the time the output signal is applied to the Tl conductor, output from the latches remains constant so that the input to the multiplex switching devices 352, 353, 354 and ` 355 of Fig. 3A remains constant. Consequently, the output ~! signals applied in sequence to the weight data conductors WT.
DATA 1, WT. DAT~ 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 represent the respective decimal digits of the output weight from the analog-~ to-digital converter. The frequency or speed of the clock pulses i~ from source 350 are such that the equipment of Fig. 3A will `i operate through a plurality of cycles during the time an output ~! 2C signal is applied to the Tl conductor. In other words, each of the binary representations of the five decimal digits representing the weight will be applied in succession to the output weight data conductors WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 a plurality of times during the time an output signal is applied to the Tl conductor.
Concurrently with the application of the respective decimal digits to the weight data lines WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8, corresponding signals are applied either to none or to one of the data selecting conductors B, C, D and E indicating the specific of the five declmal digit ~, .
- . ~: . . . .
signals applied to the weight dat~ conductors WT. DATA 1, WT.
DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 at each of the instants o time.
Assume now that power has been applied to the system S so that the analog-to-digital converter will start to develop an analog conversion and provide a digital output signal after an interval of time. At the same time, the control equipment 15 will perform an initializing operation in the usual manner and cause zeros to be stored in each and every register space in the RAM 187. Thus, zeros will be stored in all of the register spaces of this RAM 187 shown in Fig. 7.
After zeros are stored in all of the register spaces, the control of the system is transferred to the main program Al shown in Fig. 2A. Block 25 causes the memory space 718 of Fig.
15 7 to be tested to determine whether a one or a zero is recorded ~ ~-in this space. This space, which is des-gnated "MOT~F", ~j represents a motion ~lag and under the assumed conditions, a zero will be recorded in this space with the result that the program is now transferred to El of Fig. 2E. As a result, the system then tests the storage space TlF 717 to determine whether , a one or zero is stored in this space. Under the assumed con-ditions, a zero will be stored in this storage spot. This ~ storage space is designated a Tl flag. Since a zero is stored j in this storage space, the program proceeds from box 81 to box 82 2S where the condition of the Tl clock lead (see the bottom of Fig.
4B) is tested to determine whether one signal or a zero signal is present on this lead.
Under the ass~med conditions, a zero will be present on this lead so that the program proceeds to block 83. With the zero present on this lead, the analog-to-digital converter ';
- - 49 ~
.
. - - - .: . .. . ~ . . - .
indicat~q that a ~atisfactory out~ut: signal i9 not present on the output leads from the analog-~o-dig;tal converter.
In block 83 the computer is directed to change the information stored in the storage bit space 717 to a one, - 5 indicating that the analog-to-digital convert~r is in the process of providing a valid output digital signal, but that such signal is not present at this time on the output leads from ; the analog-to-digital converter.
From block 83 the control then goes to block 84 where the zero expand switch is tested. A flag or bit stored in a ~; status register bit space 719 indicates the setting of the zero expand switch. slnce this switch is assumed to be off, the zero expand is not true and the control is thus transferred to Al5 of Fig. 2A at which time the control equipment successively . . .
lS reads all of the various external inputs and stores their con-dition in the third one of the storage registers having an address 0010 of Fig. 7. After all of these switches have been - tested and ~heir condition recorded in the corresponding resis-` ter spaces assigned to them, the control then proceeds to block 40 where the price by count mode switch is tested. Under : ~ .
assumed conditions, this switch wili be conditioned so that price by count is not the mode of operation. Consequ~ntly, con-trol is then transferred to blocX 41.
Again, assuming this system is not operating in the auto price mode, a zero will be stored in the auto price bit storage location in the status regis~er 0001 and, as a result, the control of the program is transferred to block 48 of Fig. 2B
via transfer B2. As a result, block 48 tests the status register storage space 738 designated auto price in the status register 0001. Assuming that the last cycle was not auto price and that .. .. .
.
a zoro blt 1~ ~toroa in ~ r~gister indicatin~ that thc las~
cyclo wa~ ~190 a m~nual ~ric~ ~ntry, tho control 1~ tran~ferred from block 4~ to block 47. Block 47 da~ermine~ wh~th~r or not tho price ~nput ha~ chanq~d.
Thus, block ~7 compare~ th~ information ~UB~ recorded in the stora~e space~ SW-.OP throuyh 5~-.PO with th~ previous price outp~t reglst~r~ in the output prlca r~ister 73g in tho re~t~r 0011~ ~nd~r the a~sumed conditiolls, ~he pric~ may or may not be th~ ~am~. If the manual switche~ are all set on zero~
then th~sR prices will be thQ samc and the price will not have changed 80 far as the control equipmznt is concerncd. A~ ~ .
result, the control ~oes to block 49 of Fig. ~B where a ~afet~ : :
,~
~witch on the printer door 1~ checlced, since thi~ will be c108ed, control then goe~ to block 50 wh~re the condi~ion oP an auto zero inh$bit switch i~ test~d. If thi~ switch is operated, it 1~ desirable to di~able to the auto zero correction operation3 a8 described her~in.
Aesuming that ~he auto zero inhibiting ewi~ch is of~, ~hen the control i~ tran~erred to block 53 over the tran~fer :~. 20 B8. Block ~3 t¢~ts the auto tare ~witch~
Under the aseumed conditions, the information stored ~n the storage space 8W-.T in the storag~ register 0010 lnd~cates that the AUT0-TARE switch i9 not puahed with the resu~t that the pro~ram now transfer~ to block 144 v~a tranqfer Il of ~ig. 2I.
2~ Block 144 causes the computor to test the ~torago ~reas SW-.T and SW-.OT and if nona of the tare ~witc~es has b~en : operated, the program 1~ tr~nsferred to ~lock 145 which causes ~he taro regl~ter ~rea 720 of Fig. 7 to be all returned to zero, . or ~ero~ again recorded in aroa under the assumed cond~tions.
; 30 ~n add~tlon, a one 1~ record~d in the ~T~ ~tatus r~gi~tor ~pace 736 o~ th~ ~tatu~ regist~r 0010. Thsn the control 1~ tran~- .
- ~erro~ to block 5S vla B10 o~ Fl~. 2B.
., ; .
- 51 - . :
.
Block 55 cau~e9 the computer to compare the printer mode recorded in space 722 of register 0010 with the recordings in the status register bits 723 and 724. Since it is assumed herein that the printer mode will be the manual mode, these S registers will not have changed so the operation will be trans-ferred to block 57 via transfer B12. In block 57, the condition of the interlocked flag in the status bit register 736 is inter-rogated and as pointed out above, this flag has been set to a one so that control then goes to block 58 where the interlock flag is changed from one to zero and the initialized flag I~ITF
stored in space 727 is set to a one. Next, the set bit in space 737 of the status register 0011 is set and the control transfer-red to block 66 via C5. Since this cycle of operations started -from block 25, block 66 causes the computer to transfer control back to block 25 via transfer Al.
Since the motion flag is not set, that is, since a zero is still stored in the status register storage space 718, the control will be transferred to block 81 via transfe~ El.
.
At this time, the block 81 causes the computer to again test the TlF flag, that is, the TlF storage space 717. During the previous cycle, as described above, a one was stored in this block indicating that TlF is set. Consequently, at this time the con-trol will be transferred to block 86, instead of 82, as described in the previous cycle. However, under the assumed conditions, i 2S the signal on the Tl clock lead is still zero so that control will be now transferred to block 84 via the transfer E4. There-after, block 84 tests the zero expand switch which, as assumed to be unoperated, so that control will then be transferred to block 39 via transfer A15. Thereafter the remainder of the second cycle is substantially th2 same as described above - assuming that none of the various keys or switch~s have been actuated.
., .
At th2 end oE the second cycle, control will be tran~-ferred to the block 25 via Al transfer in the manner described above and each succe~ding cycle of the main program will be repeated in accordance with the above description of the second cycle so long as the si~nal from the analog-to-digital converter on the Tl clock lead remains zero. During each of these cycles, the TlF or Tl flag si~nal is set in a one state by a one being stored in the storage space 717 and a zero signal remains on the Tl clock lead from the analog-to-digital converter.
: 10NO MOTION DETECTION
Assume now that during some one of the above-described cycles of the main program, the analog-to-digital converter 14 completes a conversion and supplies digital output signals to the control equipment 15. Consequently, the analog-to-digital con-verter 14 will also apply a one signal to the Tl clock lead. Asa result, when a control is transferred to the block 86 during the next main program cycle, as described above, the T1 lead will ~- test one or true so that the control is now transferred to block 87 where the TlF or Tl flag is cleared. In other words, a zero is now stored in the TlF status register space 717 instead of a on~
Thereafter, the control goes to block 88 where the weight output signals from the analog converter 14 are read into the raw weight register 710 of Fig. 7.
l Fig. 2J shows a flow chart of an exemplary sub-routine 'd, 25 for entering weight signals from the analog-to-digital converter in the raw weight register 710 of Fig. 7O
As described above when the analog-to-digital converter is in condition for transferring digital signals to the raw weight register 710, an output signal is applied by the analog-to-digital converter to the Tl lead. As a result the control sequence proceeds from block 86 thsough block 87 to block 88 as described above. Within block 88 the control is transferred to block 370. This block indicates that the R0 register within _ ~3 _ the CPU unit is set to eleven~ The Pl register is set to zero and the ~3 register also set to zero. These registers being located within the CPU unit.
The R0 register is employed to indicate when all of the digits of the weight are transferred to the raw weight - register 710. The Pl register is employed to direct the digits - to the proper register spaces within the raw weight register.
The R3 register is employed to select the desired decimal digit to be transferred from the analog-to-digital converter to the raw weight register 710. Thus initially with these registers set as described above, the block 371 to which the control is transferred from block 370 first reads the R3 register and finds ; a zero recorded therein. Block 370 then translates this zero to indicate that the zero should be read from each one of the leads DIG SEL B, DIG SE1 C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E. The translation order or sequence is designated KBP which translates the binary digit in the R3 regist~r into a one-out-of-four code. ~ext block 372 tests the digit select leads B, C, D and E and if any signal condition on these leads other than zero on all of them is found, the control is transferred back to transfer point J2 and the above cycle repeated. The small loop including blocks - 371 and 372 are then repeated until zero is found on all four of the digit select leads DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E.
When a zero is found on all of these leads, the controi is then transferred to the block 373 where the value of this digit is read into the raw weight register area selected by the Pl register in the CPU unit. This will be the first digit space in the raw weight register 710 since a zero was previously set in the Pl register in the CPU unit.
. ' ~ ~ 54 ~
., : .. , : .
1062Z~0 After the fir5t digit is thus transferred to the raw weight register 710, the zero in the R3 register in the CPU unit is again translated by the KBP operations into a one-out-of-four code and the signals on the digit select conductors DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E compared with this code. If under the assumed conditions zeros are found on all of these leads, thus corresponding to the zero in register R3 after being translated to the one-out-of-four code, the control is advanced to block 376.
If on the other hand the signals on the weight data conductors WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 change during the time the weight is ~eing read into the raw weight register 710, then when the signals on the digit select - leads DIG SE~ B, DIG SEL C, DIG S~L D and DIG SEL E are again compared with the setting of the R3 register by block 375 these signals will have changed so that the control is then trans-ferred back to transfer point Jl and thus to block 370 instead of block 376. Under these assumed conditions wherein the signals on the B, C, D and E digit select conductors change during the reading in of a digit, it is assumed that the digit transferred to the raw weight register will be in error. Consequently, the transfer operations are startad over again and proceed as ` described above. ~amely, the control will be first transferred to block 370 where the registers R0, Pl and R3 are set as ' 25 described above. Then the control is advanced to block 371 and the setting ~f the R3 register translated to a one-out-of-four code and again compared with the B, C, D and E select conductors.
.. ~ .
This cycle is then repeated until the signals on these conductors ~re the same as the translated setting of the R3 register at which time the digit on the weight data conductors 1, 2, 4 and 8 is ~, again transferred to the raw weight register.
Assume that the signals on these digit select conductors do not change so that when they are again tested by the block 375 they will again correspond to the translated setting of the R3 register. Cons~quently, the con~rol is advanced to block 376 where the setting of th~se three registers Pl, R3 and R0 are all incremented by one. The control then advances to block 377 where the number stored in the R0 register is tested. Under the assumed conditions this number is now twel~e (eleven plus one). Since this number is not zero, the control i3 transferred to the J2 transfer point and thus to block 371 where the above cycles of operation are repeated until the second of the decimal digits of the raw weight are transf~rred from the analog-to-digital converte:~
to the raw weight register. The control is then again trans-ferred to block 376. Assuming that the signals on the B, C, D
and E digit select conductors have not been changed during the recording of the value of the second digit in accordance with 15 block 376, the registers Pl, R3 and RO are again incremented so that the next or number three digit will be transmitted from the interface equipment of Fig. 3A to the raw weight register 710.
~; After the fifth digit has been thus selec.ed and trans-. . ~ .
ferred to the raw weight register 710, the R0 register in the CPU
unit will have recorded in it fifteen. This is incremented by the sub-routine of block 376. As a result, the setting of this R0 register will now be zero. Since this is a four digit binary register when the register is incremented wi~h fifteen stored in it, it is resto~ed to zero. With the result that the control is now transferred from reading the weight to the block 89 o~ Fig. 2E.
From block 88 the control sequence advances through blocks 96 and 97 and at times through block 97A which blocks are employed to advance the tare timer in a well-known manner.
Briefly, the block 96 causes the count stored in the tare timer space 728 to be read out. Then block 97 determines if the ` count read out is zero. If it is zero the control sequence advances to block 89. If the count read out is not zero then the - `
control sequence advances to block 97A where one is subtracted from the count read out and the new count restored in the tare timer storage spaccs 728.
Next, in block 90, the computer determines whether or not there has been motion or a change in weight on the scale platform. The arrangement, in accordance with the exemplary embodiment of this invention, is arranged so that if the weight changes or is less than a predetermined amount, that is within a prdetermined band, it is assumed that there is no motion of the platform scale. If, on the other hand, a weight change exceeds the predetermined band, then it is assumed that there is motion of a scale platform. In accord~lce with the present invention, the bandwidth may be predetermined to any desired value, which value is stored in the pre-assigned storage spaces in one of the ROM's.
Under the assumed conditions, zeros will be stored in the motion target weight register 735. Assume now that the band is .003 pound, plus or minus, and that a weight of .004 pound is read into the raw weight register 710 from the analog-to-digital converter 14 during this cycle of the control equipment 15. Then in accordance with block 90, the zero weight from the motion target weight register 735 is subtracted from the weight in the raw weight register 710 and then the band .003 subtracted from the difference which leaves +.001. Since the final difference is positive, it indicates that motion is present. ~ext, the weight ~
in the targe~ weight register is subtracted from the weight in the -raw weight register and the band of .003 pound added to the dif- -~ ference, and since this sum is not negative, it does not indicate -- m~tion. However, motion was indicated by the first calculation.
i 30 Thereafter, in response to the motion indication from block 90, block 91 causes the program to transfer to block 98 via the Fl transfer. Block 98 first clears the no motion or hit counter 726 (i.e. causes all zeros to be stored in this coun~er space) and sets the motion flag MOT~. That iq, it causes a one to be stQred in the status register 718. Then block 99 causes the weight in the motion target weight register 735 to be changed to the .004 pound recorded in the raw weight register. The weight of .004 pound remains recorded in the raw weight register 710 at this time. Next, an initial weight of 8 pounds representing the weight of the scale platter on the load cell is subtracted.
The program then proceeds through blocks 100 where zero expand switch is tested and found not to be operated. At block 103 the zero range expand switch is tested and found not to be operated, so the program then jumps to block 105 via trans-fer F6 where the weight recorded in the raw weight register 710 is corrected by the auto zero weight stored in the zero correc-; tion register 11, which is zero at this time under the assumed condition. The program then proceeds to block 107 where the control equipment determines that the weight on the platter is not greater than 30 pounds. Consequently, the control then advances to block 109 where a zero is recorded in the over capacity status register space 725.
~ext, the control equipment 15 is advanced to the -block 110 where the motion flag is tested. That is, the status regis-.er space 718 is read out and since a one is recorded in this space, the program then advances to block 111 where the one recorded in the set status register space 737 is tested.
Since a one is assumed to be stored in this space, the program is then transferred to G7 so that ~he block 123 subtracts th~
tare weight in the register 720 from the weight in the raw weight register 710, causes round off operation to be performed and restores the thus corrected weight in the raw weight register and moves the four most significant digits from the raw weight register 710 to the weight out register 712.
:' ' Next, the proqram advances through blocks 124 transfer G12, block~ 12~ and 129, 130 and 131 and transfer CS to block 66.
Since this cycle of operation of the control equipment 15 started from block 25, as described above, the block 66 now S causes the program to be transferred back over transfer Al to block 25 and another cycle of the control equipment 15 is initiated.
. At this time the motion flag MOTNF is set, i.e. the status register space 718 has a one stored in it as described above, so the control sequence advances to block 26 instead of being transferred to block 81 via transfer El.
- In block 26, the status of the MOTNF status register space 718 is again tested and since a "1" is recorded in this space, this flag is not clear; consequently, the program is transferred by transfer El to block 81.
At this time the TlF flag is not set. In other words, -a zero was recorded in the status register space 717 on the last ~ cycle of the control equipment 15... Consequently the program now proceeds to biock 82 where the condition of the Tl clock lead 20 from the analog-to-digital converter is tested. At this time :~:
it is assumed that a "1" signal is on this lead with the result - that the program now transfers over the E4 transfer to block 84.
Since the zero expand switch is not operated, this zero expand is not true with the result that the program is transferred over : ~
~5 transfer A15 to block 39. The remainder of this cycle of the . ~ :
control equi~ment lS then is as described above through blocks ~ ;
40, 41 transfer B2 to blocks 48, 47, 4~, 50, 52, 53 transfer Il to block 144, then block 146 and transfer B10 to block 55. From block 55, control is transferred to block 57 over transfer B12 30 and then through block 57 transfer Cl to block 62, transfer C5 , to block 66.
; - 59 - ~ -- . .
. ~ .
~, . . ..
, :. ~
Since thi~ cycle wa~ initiated through bloc~ 26, block 66 now returns the control to block 26 over transfer A2 and the above cycle of operation~ then repeated. This cycle of operation is then continuously repeated ~o long as a "1" signal S is applied to the Tl clock lead by the analog-to-digital con-verter.
Ne~t, when the analog-to-digital converter removes the "1" signal from the Tl clock lead, the program during the next cycle of the control equipment 15 is subsequentl~ transferred to blocks 81 and 82 in the manner described above, the Tl clock ;~ lead will not be true, in other words it will test "0" so the program is then advanced to block 83 where the Tl flag is again set; that is, the "1" is recorded in the TlF storage space 717 in the status registers. Thereafter, the above cycles of opera-tion of the control equipment wil] continue as described above initially except that the block 66 of Fig. 2C will return the control to block 26 over the A2 transfer since the cycle started from this block instead of block 25 as described initially.
By the use of the TlF flag and the testing of the Tl clock control lead as described above, the output from the ` analog-to-digital converter is transferred to the control equip-ment vnly once during each of the 200 millisecond cycles of the analog-to-digital converter 14. This transfer occurs in the ; next succeeding cycle of the control equipment after the "1"
signal is applied to the T1 clock control lead. Thereafter the "1" signal has to be removed from this lead and re-applied by the analog-to-digital converter 14 before a subsequent weight will be transferred from the analog-to-digital converter to the control `1 equipment 15~ -- 30 Since the control equipment 15 operates in the above- -described manner for the various cycles, when weight information is not transferred from the analog-to-digital converter, the -operation of the control equipment 15 during such cycles will . .
not be repea~cl. Instcad the operation during only those cycles during which weight information is transmi~ted from the analog-to-digital converter to the control equipment 15 will be des-cribed. However, it is to be understood that control equipment 15 advances through numerous of these cycles in the manner des-cribed above between each of these cycles during which weight information is read out from the analog-to-digital converter and stored in the raw weight register 710.
Assume now on the next weighing cycle, that is the next time a weight is received from the analog-to-digital con-; verter and stored in the raw weight register 710, the weight stored in this register will not have changed but will be .004 pound. Consequently when the calculations at block 90 have performed in the sequence as described above, the calculations 15 will indicate that no motion is present. ~o motion would also ;
~ be present if the weight received ~rom the analog-to-digital converter does not varv more than .003 pound from the .004 pound previously received from the register.
Und-er these assumed conditions with the calculations ~ ;-performed in accordance with block 90 indicating no motion, block 91 will then cause the control to be advanced to block 92 when the motion flag MOT~F is read out and checked. This time the motion flag will not be zero since a "1" was previously stored in the status register space 718 and has not been changed. As a result, control is advanced to block 93 where the no motion counter or hit counter 726 of Fig. 7 is incremented by one.
, Under the assumed condition, "0" has been previously stored in '!, this counter so`the counter will now indicate a count of "1".
Control is then advanced to block 94 where the count in this counter 726 is read out and since it is less than some predeter-mined value, the count will not be greater than this value with the result that the control is transferred via F2 to block 99 and the remaining portion of the cycle repeated as described above.
: - ~ . - ~ , - - , On the next cycle during which weight indication i~
again received frorn the analog-to-digital converter in the manner described above, if no motion is still determined by block 90, then the hit counter 726 will again be incremented and have a count of 2. Thus each cycle during which no motion is present, this counter is incremented by "1". If, however, during any of these cycles the calculations of block 90 indicate that motion is present, then block 91 will transfer the control to block 98 via transfer Fl at which time the hit counter 726 is cleared, -~ 10 i.e. zeros are stored in the counter spaces, 'and the motion flag 718 is again set to 1; in other words, a "1" is written over the "1" already in this storage register space.
After the predetermined number of no motion indications have been obtained from calculations of blocX 90 and the control advanced through blocks 91, 92, 93 to 94, it will be determined that the counter is in excess of the required number of counts.
- Thus, to obtain a no motion indication, it is not only necessary that the scale remain within a fixed band indication of weights, but also that it remain in this band for a predeter-mined interval of time. This interval of time can be predeter-mined within increments of .200 of a second, the cycle period of an ~lalog-to-digital converter. Assuming that five such incre-ments are required thus requiring that the weight indication - remain within .003 pound for one second when the control is ~ 25 transferred to block 94 and a count of five stored in the ; counter 726, bloc~ 94 will advance control to block 95 where the , motion flag MOTNF is cleared. In other words, a "0" is now recorded in status register space 718.
; Thereafter the control is transferred to block 99 via transfer F2 and then advanced through the blocks 99, 100, 103, transfer F6 to bloc~ 105, blocX 107, block 109 and to block 110.
.
:;
.. : .
: :.
106Z2!~0 In block ?lo, the motion flag is again tested and since a "0" is no~ stored in the status register 718, the con-trol is transferrecl to block 115 over the transfer Gl and thereafter the control is transferred as described hereinafter under the heading of "Automatic zero Correction" On the next cycle of the control equipment 15, after the no motion flag is cleared as described, control is returned to the block 26. In accordance with this block, motion flag is read out and tested and since it is clear, control is advanced to block 27 where it is determined whether the scale is arranged to operate in the demand mode or continuous mode. Under.the assumed conditions, the scale is arranged to operate in the manual mode and not in ~ the demand or continuous mode so that the control continues to ; a block 28. At the block 28, a c~eck is made to`see if a -. 15 I'motion detector inhibit" switch is closed to disable the motion : .
detector portion of the apparatus 15. It is assumed that the .~ .
switch is not closed and the control continues to block 29.
~ Block 29 determines that a reweigh is not necessary at this time so control is transferred to block 30. In accordance with block 30, the control equipment under the assumed conditi~ns will determine that print ~ata is not stored so the control sequence advances to block 31. Block 31 determines that the no tare key is not pressed so that control is advanced to block 34. If the weight is greater than 0.1 pound then the control is advanced to , 25 block 35 where the set status register space 737 is tested. This :
space 737 is assumed to be true so that the control is then - transferred back to block 25 via transfer Al. If the weight as ' assumed is not greater than 0.1 pound then block 34 causes the ; control to be transferred back to block 25 via transfer Al. In either case the above-described cycle then repeats starting with block 25 for each of the various cycles described so long as the motion~flag is not set; that is so long as zero remains recorded in the status register 718.
, If the weiyht is greater than 0.1 pound, the set is not true, the wei~ht i5 not minus, and is not over the capacity of the scale, then the control sequence advances through blocks 34, 35, 36 and 37 to block 38. Block 38 causes an output print pulse which causes the weight to be printed. Then the sequence returns to block 25 via transfer ~1. Thereafter, the above-described sequences are repeated.
. AUTOMATIC ZERO CORRECTION
Assume now that either when the scale is first turned on or that after the previous object has been weighed and removed from the scale, the scale has not returned accurately to zero. Assume, for example, that the scale has returned to 00.0004. Also assume that zeros are entered in the zero correc-tion register ill and after the various operations referred to above, have been completed, 00.004 pound is entered in the raw weight register 710. A "1" will be registered in the weight sign register 715 and "1" in the zero correction sign register , 714.
The one in the sign registers indicate that the sign , ! .
of the weight or zero correction is plus and zeros entered in ... .
thes~ registers represent a negative sign or weight indication.
The manner in which the various signs are determined and entered into the respective registers will be apparent from the following description.
Thus, on the first cycle of the control equipment lS
after the previous weight has been removed from the scale and the scale returned to idle condition or the power turned on, 00.004 will be entered into the raw weight register 710 and a "1" indicating a plus will be entered in the weight sign register ,' space 715. ~ext during this same cycle of operation of the ; control unit 15, the weight in the zero correction register 711 is subtracted (block 105 Fig. 2F) from the weight in the raw - 64 _ weight registcr and th~ difference is then re--entered in the raw weight registcr 710. Undex these assumed conditions, zero will be subtracted Lrom the 00.004 recorded in the raw weight register and the di~ference 00.004 rerecorded in the raw weight register 710.
;Next the automatic zero correction limit of 00.005 pound is subtracted (block 115 Fig. 2G) from the 00.004 pvund ~ -in the raw weight register and since the 00.004 pound is less, the weight indication of the scale is within the automatic zero -10 correcting range so the control equipment will then follow addi- -tional steps re~uired to automatically correct the 00.004 pound. -~ext the 00.004 pound in the raw weight register is compared with ;~the zero or 1/4 graduation range of 00.002 pound (bloc~ 117 ~ig. 2G).
lS Aoth this comparison and the previous comparison may I be made in any desired manner such as, for example, by means of threshold circuits af any well known and suitable type. However, . .~ .
in accord~nce with the present invention, this comparison is made ~ by the central processor unit CPU 186 of the microcomputer or j 20 control unit 15. ~ -Briefly, a series of orders or instructions direct the central processing unit 186 to predetermined locations in the ROM units where the limits of 00.005 and 00.002 are stored.
~hese instructions direct the central processing unit 186 to obtain these limits and then subtract them from the weight in the raw weight r~gister. As a result, the central processing unit 186 causes the limit 00.002 obtained from the predetermined address in the ROM to be subtracted from the 00.004 stored in the raw waight r~gister 710. The result of this subtraction is 00.002 which is a positive number thus indicating that the magnitude of the weight in the raw weight register is not equal to or less than .002 pound. As a result, 12 will be entered in ~he zero count register 713 (block 118, Fig. 2G).
Next, the readlng of 12 in the zero count register 713 is read out by the control equipment (block 120~ and since this reading is less th~n 16, the zero count register 713 does not return to zero, the`count in this register is incremented by one so that a 13 is now stored in the zero count register 713 (blocks 119 and 114, Fig. 2G).
~ ext, since the weight stored in the raw weight regis-ter is not 00.000 (block 132, Fig. 2G) the weight recorded in the zero correction register 711 is compared with the 0.6 pound limit for the operation of the zero correction (block 121, Fig.
2G). In performing this comparison, a$ above, any suitable type of comparing or threshold circuits may be employed, however, in the specific arrangement described herein, the central processing unit CPU 186 will obtain, under control of orders or 15 instructions stored in the ROM's 188-192, the .6 of a pound from a predetermined location in the read only memory and then sub-tract the weight in the zero correction register 711 from this value. If the value in the zero correction register 711 is less than the 0.6 of a pound the zero correcting operation will con-tinue. This limit of 0.6 pound and also the other limits of 00.005 and 00.002 pound may be changed or determined by the value ~, stored in the read only storage devices ROM's at the ~redetermined locations employed for storing these ualues.
Since under the assumed conditions the 00.000 stored in the zero correction register is less than 0.6 pound the weight stored in the zero correction register 711 is augmented or changed by 00.001 pound (block 122, Fig. 2G) and the sign in the zero correction sign register 714 is changed to a plus.
- ~ext a round-off operation is performed by adding - 30 00.005 to the weight now recorded in the raw weight register 710.
As a result, the weight of 00.009 is rerecorded in the raw weight register 710 (block 123, Fig. 2G).
. :
106;~Z90 Next the four most significant digits recorded in the raw weight register 710 which are all zeros is transferred to the o~put weight register 712 so that they will be available for controlling the output indication of 00.00.
During a subsequent portion of this first cycle, the 13 stored in the zero count register 713 is again read out and since this number is not 16, i.e. not 0, the l/4 graduation lamp is turned off if it was on or maintained off if it was already off. Thereafter, during the remaining portion of this first cycle of the control unit 15, other operations may.be performed.
However, the values stored in the various registers described . above will remain until the next operating cycle of this control unit 15.
During the next cycle of operation of the control unit :.
lS 15, the 00.004 weight will be regist.ered again in a raw weight .
register 710 in the same manner as during the first cycle. Then the value in the zero correction register 711 which is now 00.001 pound will be subtracted from the weight in the raw weight .. register 71G and the difference is rerecorded in the raw weight 20 register 710. Thus .001 pound is now stored or recorded in the raw weight register 710.
.. - ~ext the 00.003 pound stored in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 pound operating limit of the automatic zero correcting operation which is obtained from the ~ 25 read only storage units of the system. Since the result of subtracting the 00.003 pound from the 00.005 pound is positive, the plus sign remains stored in the zero correction sign register and the system continues to perform additional operations required for the automatic zero correction in accordance with the present invention.
.
., - 67 - .
. .
` lO~;ZZ90 Next the 00.003 pound stored in the raw weight regis-ter 710 is comp~red ~ith the zero or 1/4 graduation range in the manner described above. rrhus the 00.002 pound, obtained from the read only memory at the predetermined location assigned to this limit, is subtracted from the .003 pound in the raw weight register 710. The result of this subtraction is a positive number, namely 00.00] pound.
Since the weight in the raw weight register is not less than 00.002 pound the control unit causes 12 to be ~ain entered in the zero count register 713 and then this register read out as described above. Since the count is not 16, i.e.
not 0, the count in the zero count ~yister 713 is incremented by one so that 13 is now recorded in the zero count register 713.
In addition, since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is 15 not 00.000 the wei~ht stored in the zero correction register 711 of 00.001 pound, is compared with the limits of 0.6 pound of the zero correction range by subtracting the 00.001 from the 0.6 pound. The result is positive so the weight in the zero correc-tion register 711 is augmented by 00.001 pound.
As a result 00.002 pound is now recorded in the zero correction register 711. ~ext, a roundoff operation is per-formed by adding 00.005 pound to the 00.003 pound in ~he raw weight register 710 and the result 00.008 pound recorded in the raw weight register 710.
~S Next the four most significant digits in the raw weight register, namely 0000, are transferr~d to the output weight register so they will be available for controlling the display of 0000.
Also during this second cycle, the 13 recorded in the zero count register is again read out as before and since the count is not 16, i.e. not 0, the 1/4 graduation lamp is maintained off.
.
- ~ . . . ..
,, - , ~
During the r~maining portion of thi~ second cycle of the control unit lS the information recorded in the above registers employed in the automatic zero correction operation remains substantially the same as described~
S Near the beginning of the third cycle of the operation of the control unit 15, the raw weight 00.004 pound will again be registered in the raw weight register 710. Next the 00.002 pound stored in the zero correction register 711 will be sub-tracted from the raw weight 00.004 and the difference 00.002 pound restored in the raw weight register 710.
~ ext the 00.002 pound weight in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the zero correcting limit of 00.005 pound.
The 00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710 is subtracted from the 00.005 pound and since the result of this sùbtraction ,~j , 15 is 00.003 pound. the plus sign remains stored in the zero correc-: tion sign register 714 and the zero correcting operation continues.
., ~ ~ext, the zero or 1/4 graduation range of 00.002 is ., subtracted from the 00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710.
The resulting difference of 0 indicates that the weight in the . .
` 20 raw weight register is equal to or less than the 00.002 pound recorded in the raw weight register 710. Consequently, the cont~nts of the zero count register 713 is read out which is 13 as described above. Since this is less than 16 the zero count register is incremented by l which causes 14 to be stored in this register at this time (blocks 117, 120, 119 and 114 in Fig. 2G).
Since the weight recorded in the raw weight register 710 is not 00.000, the weight of 00.002 stored in the zero correction register is compared with the 0.6 pound limit of the automatic correction range. The 00.002 is subtracted from the .6 pound and since the result is positive, 00.001 is added to the 00.002 pound stoxed in the zero correction register 711 and the sum 00.003 pound is now restored in the zero correction register 711.
:
: .
-.
Next the roundof~ operation i5 performed by adding 00.005 to the 00.002 in the xaw weight register and the sum 00.007 now stored in the raw weight register 710. Next the four most ~igniicant digits of the weight recorded in the raw weight register is transferred to the output weight register 712 where it i5 avail-able for later controlling the digital output indicator of the scale.
.~ During this third cycle of operation the 14 nowrecorded in the zero count register will again be read out and since it is less than 16, the 1/4 graduation lamp w.111 remain .
turned off. Thereafter during the remainder of the third cycle of operation of the control unit 15 after the scale has returned to zero or normal, the information recorded in the various . regist~rs described above remains unchanged.
During the fourth cycle of.operation of the control equipment 15 the raw weight of 00.004 is again stored in the raw weight register 710 and the 00.003 now stored in the zero . correction register 711 is subtracted from this 00.004 ~nd the ~ .
.resulting difference 00.001 pound is now stored in the raw weight register 710. This 00.001 pound is then compared with the 00.005 limit of the automatic zero correction and also with the 00.002 limit. As a result of both of these comparisons, the system . works as described above since the 00.001 stored in the raw weight register is less than 00.005 limit and al5O less than ~ :
. 25 00.002 limit.
' Since the 00.001 weight stored in the raw weight register is less than the 00.002 limit, the number stored in the zero count register 713 will be augmented by 1 so that 15 ~s will now be stored in this register. Later, when this register.
30 is again read out, the 15 will be less than 16 so the 1/4 graduation lamp will be maintained turned off~
_ 70 -. .. , - . . . :
- :. , - . : - :.-10~;2290 Similarly, the 00.003 now stored in the zero correc-tion register 711 is compared with 0.6 limit o~ the zero correction range and as a result 00.001 i~ added to the 00.003 in the zero correction register 711 and the resulting 00.004 now stored in this register. Next the roundo~f operation is performed by adding 00.005 to the 00.001 in the raw weight register and the resulting 00.006 sum now stored in the raw weight register 710. Thereafter the four most significant digits 00.00 of the raw weight register 710 are moved to the weight output register 712 where they are available ~or controlling the output display of the scale.
As before, during the remainder of this fourth cycle of operation of the control unit 15 the information stored in the various registers employed in the zero correcting arrange-ment remain unchanged.
During the fifth cycle of operation of the control equipment 15 the raw weight of 00.004 pound is again stored in the raw weight register 7io and the 00.004 now stored in the ~ zero correction register 711 subtracted from this 00.004.
- 20 Resulting difference 00.000 is now stored in the raw weight register.
This weight is then compared with the 00.005 limit of the automatic zero correction range and also with the 00.002 limit.
As a result of both of these comparisons the system works subst~ntially as described above. Briefly as a result of ` the comparison of the 00.000 with the 00.002 limit, the 14 now stored in the zero count register 713 is read out. Since this - count is less than 16, the count is incremented by one so that thereafter 15 is stored in the zero count register 713. At -- this time, since the weight in the raw weight re~ister 710 is 00.000 the weight stored in the zero correction register is not augmented but remains 00.004.
. .
Therea~ter, during the remaining portions of this flfth cycle of operation of the control unlt 15, the system wor~s substantially as described. When the 15 stored in the zero count register 713 is read out it will cause the 1/4 graduation lamp S to remain off because the count is less than 16.
During the next or sixth cycle of operation of the control unit 15 the system works substantially as described above except that when the zero count register is incremented it will have stored in it a count of 16. Since this register stores four binary digits, the count of 16 will cause the register to return to zero. Later when this register is again read out during this cycle of operation the 16, or zeros, recorded in the register will cause the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned on which indicates that the automatic zero correction has been made and that the scale is within 1/4 graduation of the least significant display digit. This time, as pointed out above, weight displayed on the scale will be 00.00.
Thereafter during the succeeding cycles of operation ~ of the control equ pment neither the zero correction register -- 20 711 nor the zero count register 713 will be augmented; instead the contents of these registers will be maintained substantially as described above until either a weight is placed on the scale or the zero drifts or wanders. If the zero indication should drift or wander then it will be corrected in the manner des-cribed above.
Assume now that an object weighing one pound is placed on the scale platter or pan. As a result, the load cell to-gether with its sensor and the analog=to-digital converter will cause a new raw weight including the zero error to be entered :
in the raw weight register 710.
. . .
~ - 72 -.. ....
1062Z~0 This new r~w weight will be corrected by the weight of the pan or platter as described above and as a result a weight of 01.004 will be entered in the raw weight register.
At thi~ time, under the conditions assumed above, 00.004 is still registered in the zero correction register so this 00.004 is subtracted from the 01.004 in the raw weight register 710 and the difference 01.000 is then stored in the raw weight register 710. Next the one pound weight, namely 01.000, stored in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 pound limit of the automatic zero correcting range by subtracting ~Ihe 00.005 from the 01.000 pound. The result of this subtraction is positive with the result that 13 is entered in the zero count register 713, which later causes the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off. In addition, since the one ~` 15 pound is greater than the 00.005 there is no point in comparing ~` the one pound with 00.002 limit so that the control unit 15 will immediately cause the roundoff operation by adding .005 to the i weight recorded in the raw weight register and thus cause 00.005 to be added to the 01.000 weight and cause the sum 01.005 to be -stored in the raw weight register 710.
~ ext the four most signi~icant digits, that is the 01.00 will be transferred to the output weight register 712 where they will control the output weight indication of the scale and thus accurately indicate the one pound weight or object placed on the scale platter or pan. So long as the 01.00 weight remains on the scale the above cycles of operation ; of the control unit 15 will be repeated. 00.004 remains stored in the zero correction register. 13 is repeatedly stored in - the zero count register with the result that the 1/4 graduation lamp remains turned off and 01.00 is displayed. The raw weight of 01.004 obtained from the scale is corrected by the 00.004 in the zero correction register so the correct weight 01.00 of the object on the scale is correctly displayed.
.
Assume now that after the object weighed above isremoved from the scale, the scale now returns to -00.001 instead of to 00.004 pound. This weight -00.001 pound is entered in the xaw weight register 710 after the scale has come to rest and the initial 8 pounds subtracted from the digital output of the analog-to-digital converter as described herein and a 0, indi-cating the minus sign, stored in the weight sign register 715.
Next, the plus 00.004 in the zero correction register 711 is algebraically subtracted from -00.001 in the raw weight register, the resulting difference is -00.005 which is stored in the raw weight register 710 and a minus sign or zero is - stored in the weight sign register 715.
Next, the minus 00.005 recorded in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 automatic zero correc-., :
tion limits. At this time the magnitude or absolute value of the weight in the raw weight register is compared with the limits - ~-, 00.005. Since it is egual to the lower limit, the automatic .. s ~
zero correcting sequence of operations will be performed.
; ~ext, the weight of -00.005 recorded in the raw weight . . .
~ 20 register 710 is compared with the 00.002 pound limit. Since this .;;
~ weight is greater in magnitude than the limit, a 12 is now ; recorded in the zero count register 713 and then this register read out. Since the count is less than 16, the count is incre-mented by 1 so that 13 is now recorded in this register. As described above, the 13 in this register later causes the zero or 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off or maintained off if it , is already off. Since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is not zero, the weight recorded in the zero correction register 711 is subtracted from the 0.6 pound limit and since the weight is less than the limit, 00.001 is subtracted from the weight in :~
the zero correction register 711 so that 00.003 is now recorded -- in the zero correction register 711.
.: .
Next, the roundoff operation is performed by adding 00.005 to the weight -00.005 recorded in the raw weight register 710 and the sum 00.000 rerecorded in the raw weight register.
Next the four most significant digits of this weight are trans-ferred to the output register where the output indication will then be 0000 when the other operations required to display this number have been performed during the remaining part of this first cycle of control unit 15 after the scale has become stabilized when the previous weight was removed from the pan or platter.
During the next cycle of the control unit 15, the -00.001 pound again will be entered in the raw weight register 710 and a zero indicating minus sign of the raw weight will be entered in the weight sign register 715.
- 15 ~ext, the weight of 00.003 positive now recorded in the zero corr~ction register is algebraically subtracted from the weight -~0.001 in the raw weight register 710 and the `~ resulting difference -00.004 is recorded in the raw weight ., .
register 710.
Next, this weight in the raw weight register is com-pared with the 00.005 pound which is the limit of the automatic zero correcting arrangement and since the absolute value of this weight is less than the limit, the sequence of operations of the automatic zero correction are continued.
~ext, the weight of -00.004 pound is compared with the limit OG.002 pound and since it is more than the limit, the 12 is again recorded in the zero count register 713. The 12 is then read out of the register and since it is less than 16, one is added to the 12, so 13 is now stored in the register. Later the 13 causes the zero or 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off or maintained off if it is already off, as under.the assumed S conditions.
.- .
Th~ weisht of 00.003 pound in the zero correction register is now compar~d with the .6 pound limit of the zero correcting arrangement and since it is less, 00.001 is sub-tracted from the 00.003 weight recorded in the zero correcting register and the difference 00.002 rerecorded in the zero correcting register.
Next, the roundoff operation is performed and OO.OOS
added to the weight -00.004 in the raw weight register and the sum -00.001 rerecorded in the raw weight register. Then the four most significant digits 00.00 recorded in the output weight register so that they are availa~le for controlling the output weight indication. At this time the minus sign is not displayed.
During the next cycle of operation of the control unit lS substantially the same operations are repeated except that when zero correcting register 711 contents 00.002 is subtracted from the raw weight register of -00.001, the resulting differ-ence of -00.003 is recorded in the raw weight register 710 instead of -00.004. In addition 00.001 weight is subtracted ;
from the 00.002 in the zero correction register so the weight of 00.001 will be recorded in the zero correction register 711 instead of 00.002 as in the previous cycle of operation of the control unit 15.
During the next cycle of the control unit 15, the raw weight of -00.001 pound again is entered in the raw weight register 710. ~ext the weight of .001 pound in the zero correc-ting registe. is algebraically subtracted from the -00.001 pound in the raw weight register 710 with the result that -00.002 pound is restored in the raw weight register. The magnitude of this weight is first compared with the OO.OOS limit of the automatic correcting range. Since its magnitude is less, the - various steps of the automatic correction range are repeated.
; The magnitude of the weight of -00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710 is then compared with the limit of 00.002 pound , ~
and since it is equal to this value, the 13 now stored in the zero count resister 713 is read out and since thi~ count is less than 16 it is increased by one leaving a 14 now stored in this zero count register 713. This 14 is again later read out S and employed to maintain the l/4 graduation lamp o~f. There-after weight of 00.001 in the zero correcting register is com-pared with the .6 pound of the zero correcting range and since it is less, 00.001 pound is subtracted from the 00.001 pound in the zero correcting range register and a difference 00.000 recorded in this same register. Th~reafter the roundoff and transfer operations are performed as described above.
During the next cycle of operation of the control -~ unit lS, substantially the same operations as described above are performed except that the zero correcting register 711 now lS has all zeros recorded in it so that the -00.001 remains recorded in the raw weight register. During this cycle of ` operation, the zero count register 713 is read out and since - the 14 recorded in this register is less than 16, one is added to the contents of the register and the 15 again will be recorded in this register 713. This lS is later read out and employed to maintain the 1/4 graduation lamp turned off. In addition, 00.001 is subtracted from the zero correcting register leaving -00.001 stored in this register and a minus or zero stored in the zero sign correcting register.
^ 25 During the next cycle of operation of the control unit 15, the 00.001 minus stored in the zero correcting register will be algebraically subtracted from the -00.001 pound recorded in ; the raw weight register 710 leaving all zeros recorded in the ~ raw weight register. consequently, no subtraction is made from the -00.001 pound recorded in the zero correction register.
However, one is added to the zer~ count register. One is then added to the zero count register during each succeeding cycle of the control unit lS until the predetermined number, which .. . . .
106~290 i~ 16, i.e. all zeros, in an exemplary embodiment, i5 stored in this registcr. ~hen the 1~, or all zeros is later read out of the zero count register, the control unit lS will turn on the 1/4 graduation lamp. Thereafter the contents of the various registers remains substantially as described until another article is weighed on the scale. During this time the display will correctly indicate 00.00. In addition, when the next object is weighed the zero wander of -00.001 will be corrected so the correct weight of the object will be displayed.
Assume now that for some reason after a given weighing - operation the output from the scale, load cell, sensor and analog-to-digital converter returns to 00.100 pound after the weight of 8 pounds has been subtracted as described a~ove.
Consequently, the weight of 00.100 pound will be entered in the raw weight register 710. In addition, a "1" representing a plus weight on the scale will be entered in the weight sign register 715.
- Next, the weight in the zero correction register 711, assuming this weight to be 00.003 pound, will be subtracted from the weight in the raw weight register 710 and the diffsrence 00.097 pound restored in the raw weight register. ~ext, the weight of 00.097 pound now recorded in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the automatic zero correction limit of 00.005 pound. Since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is greater than 00.005 pound, the automatic zero correcting operations are not performed and 13 is recorded in the zero count register, which later causes the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off, or maintained off if it had previously been turned off-Next, the weight in the raw weight register 710 is rounded off by adding 00.005 pou~d to the 00.097 pound recorded in this register. The sum of 00.102 pound is then rerecorded in the raw weigh~ register and the four most significant digits ~062290 00.10 are entered in the output register 712 where it is avail-able for actuat_ng the output indication of the scale.
The info~nation recorded in the various registers then remains substantially as described for the remainder of this cycle of operation of the control unit 15.
During each of the succeeding cycles of the control unit 15, the operations of the equipment relative to the raw weight register 710, the weight sign register 715, the zero correction register 711, the zero correction sign register 714 and the zero count register 7~3 and the weight output register 712 are substantially as described a~ove.
However, the attendant or operator of the scale upon noting the 00.10 weight indicated on the output of the scale will be informed that the scale is not in condition ~or another 15 weighing operation. At this time the operator may operate the zero expand range switch 176 to cause the scale to be corrected so that it will be in condition to accurately weigh the next object placed upon the pan or platter.
On the next cycle of operation of the control unit 15, after the zero capture range expand switch 176 or button has been operated, the weight of 00.100 pound will be entered in the r~w weight register 710. In addition, a "1" representing a plus sign is entered in the weight sign register 715. Also at this time 00.003 is stored in the zero correction register 711 and a "1" indicating a plus sign is stored in the zero correction sign register 714.
With the zero capture range expand switch operated and the 00.100 pound entered in the raw weight register 710, the central processing unit 186 will cause the weight entered in the raw weight register to be compared with 0.6 pound which is the assumed limit of the zero correction range.
. . .
_ 79 -,:
, Since under the assumed conditions the weight of 00.100 pound is less than 0.6 pound, the central processing unit -- 186 will cause a weight of 00.100 pound in the raw weight register 710 to be transferred to the zero correction reyister 711. As a result, 00.100 will now be stored in the zero correc-tion register 711 and then this weight is subtracted rom the wei~ht of the raw weight register 710 with the result that 00.000 will now be stored in the raw weight register 710.
` ~ext, the weight 00.000 in the raw weight register 710 ~ 10 is compared with the automatic zero correcting ranqe of .005 -; pound and since it is less than this limit, the zero correcting - operation will be performed ln the manner described above and the 00.00 indication transferred to the output weight register.
Also, the 1/4 graduation lamp will be turned on as described above.
So long as the expand button or switch 176 Is operated, -~ the above cycles of operation are repeated. When this button or switch is released, the weight stored in the zero correcting register 711 will correct the weight in the raw weight register 710 so that the corrected weight will be within the OO.OOS
: . .
-- pound correcting limits. Consequently, the above-described zero correcting operations are performed and the correct weight of an object, within the capacity of the scale, is correctly displayed.
Again, so long as the various factors affecting the zero indication of the scale do not vary more than 00.005 pound, the control arrangement 15 operates as described above and maintains the scale zero indication accurately at zero so that the scale will accurately weigh various objects or commodities ` 30 placed on its platter or pan. If the zero wander effects exceed --the 00.005 pound but do not exceed the 0.6 pound, then these effects can be corrected by the operator or attendant operating -,, : ':
' the zero captur~ range expand switch 176 ~nd the scalo is corrected as described ~hove.
The zero capture range exp~nd switch 176 together with the zero correcting operation or the scale may be employed as a self-correcting tare arrangement so long as the weight of the container is less than .6 pound and 50 long as variations from container to container, plus zero wander effects of the scale described abo~e, do not exceed OO.OOS pound.
Thus, assume that an empty container weighing 00.15 pound is placed on the scale. The scale will indicate this weight of OO.lS pound accurately providiny, of course, the automatic zero correcting arrangement was operating satisfac-torily and the 1/4 graduation lamp turned on prior to placing the container on the platter or pan of the scale. The operator 1~ or attendant will now op~rate the zero capture range expand switch 176 which will correct for the weight of the empty container and cause the scale to indicate a zero output. The attendant may then fill the container with a commodity and the scale will indicate accurately the corr~ct weight o the commodity only and compute its cost if it is so desired. ~pon removing the filled container from the scale, the scale will now indicate -OO.lS pound, assuming no zero wander e~ects. If the at~endant or operator now places another similar container on the scale of the same weight as the previous container, then the scale indication will return to zero and the automatic zero correcting operations performed providing, of course, that the variation in weight of the containers plus the variation in any zero wander effects are less than .005 pound. If, however, the - variations are greater than 00.005 pound, the 1/4 graduation lamp 30 will not light and the indication on the scale will not return to zero. The attendant can then re-operate the zero expand range ~switch and cause the scale to automatically correct thereafter for 2utomatic zero variations in the manner described herein.
If, o~ cours~, the weiyh~ oF the container or varia-tior~s in the ~/eight of the container and the zero wander exceed the predetermined operating limits described above, then the operator or attendant can use the usual tare buttons or Xeys S and operate the scale in accordance with prior art arrangements without employing the automatic zero correcting arrangement in accordance with the present invention.
As indicated above, the various limits of 00.002, 00.005 and 00.600 have been selected to illustrate the invention and may be changed as desired for various applications or uses of the scale.
ZER0 EXPA~D
,,.~
It is desirable to freq~ently check the operation of the automatic zero and the amount of correction that is being :.
~ introduced by the automatic zero in the manner described above.
. . ~
To enable the ~mount of automatic zero correction being applied ~ ~
. :s to be readily det~rmined, a zero expand switch 178 (Fig. 3) is :'?
- provided. When this switch is operated, it prevents the opera-tion of the automatic zero correction. In addition, on the next cycle of the control equipment 15, if this cycle is not one in which weight is read out of the analog-to-digital converter and entered into the raw weight register 710, then when the ; program advances to block 84, it will test this zero expand ~ 25 switch and, finding it operated or true, control is then advanced .. . . .
to block 85 which sets the interlock flag I~TF. In other words, it causes a "1" to be stored in the status register spac~ 736.
Later in this same cycle of operation of the control equipment 15, the control is advanced to block 57 as described above with , .j . ! ' the result that the interlock flag is tested. That is, the "1"
stored in the register space 736 is read out and since it is a the control i5 then advanced to block 58 which clears the .
,. ' ' ' .
, ~.,.. , ............. - . - .
.~ .. . . .
~062290 lntorlock ~l~g I~rP ~y ~nterin~ ~ ze~o in t~o regi~t~r ~p~c~ 736 and, ln a~ldition, ~at~ or entor~ a "ln ~n tho inltl~l~ze regl~ter space 727.
~h~rea~er, ~la control advanc~n to bloc~ S9 at w~llch S a ~1~ ie en~ered ln the ~torage ~pac~ 737. Th~ control th~n advanc~s to bloc~ 66 ov~r tho tran~er C5. Wlth th~e chnngen the ~bove cycl~a of operation o~ the control equipment 15 ar~
thQn repeatod untll a cycl~ ln whlch thQ raw weight 1~ read out o~ the analog-to-digital converter and stored ~n the raw weight registsr 710. During thl8 cycle the control ls advanc~d to block 100 in the manner descrlb~ herein and ~ince the zero expand swltch i~ now pressed or ~urned on, control ~ th~n advanced to ~lock 101 wh~re tha four lea~t ~gn~flcant ~igits ~n the raw weight registex 710 are read out and mo~ed to the weight out regi ter 7i2 where they later are caused to actuat~ the readout or di6play of thQ ~y~t~m whic~ will t~en indicate the four lea~t fiignlficant dlgits of the raw w~ight rea~ lnto tha raw wei~ht regi~t~r and thus lndicate the amount of correction being applled to tha ~y6tem by th~ automatic ~ero correction arrangem~nt.
`. 20 When the zero expand switch 178 i~ re~tored to normal, it ~B then nece~sary to initiali~e the ~ystem and to check the pric~ per poun~, the taro an~ finally to operate ~he lock switc~
- 179 indlc~ting that all the necessary ln~ormatlon i8 avallable for tho n~xt we~gh~ng oporation.
` 2~ . .
TIMED TARE ~NTRY
ach ti~e tho pro~ram 1~ tran~ferred to ~loc~ 144 the control apparatu~ te~ts tho ~no taro~ ~witch 171 (Flg. 3) to ~stermln~ w~eth0r or not thi- ~witch is.opQrat2d. If the ~wltch 171 ~ op~rated, th~ th~ program B~t8 the interlock flag I~TF and tran~er~ to block 14S whlch CAU~-8 tho taro regl~ter 720 to b~ ~loarod o~ ro~tor~d to ~oro an~ th~n tho program - 83 _ ;
,. .
- ' - ~ -~ 062Z90 advances to block 55 via transfer B10 and the cycle of operation is completed as described above.
If the "no tare" switch 171 is not pushed or operated as previously asqumed, then the control is advanced to block 146 where all of the other tare keys are tested to determine if any of them are operated. If none are operated the sequence trans-fers to block 55 and the cycle completed as described above.
If some one of these keys is operated, for example the tare key 0.1 pound, then the control is advanced to block 147 instead of to block 55 via transfer B10 as described above. Block 147 determines whether or not 2.6 seconds has elapsed since another tare button was pushed. It is assumed that this is the first tare button to be pushed, then 2.6 seconds will have elapsed ~ -since a previous tare button is pushed. Consequently, the tare timer spaces 728 will have all zeros sto~ed in them so the program ~; is advanced to block 148 where tare register 720 is cleaxed or returned to zero. Thereafter the control is advanced to block 149 where the 0.1 pound is entered in the tare register 720 and the interlock flag is set by entering one in storage space 736.
Thereafter the program is advanced to block 55 via transfer B10 and the cycle of operation continued in the manner described above.
In addition to entering the tare weight in the tare register space 720, the tare timer is set into operation as stated in block 149. This is accomplished by entering 13 in ;
this tare timer space 728. Then on each of the cycles during which a weight is transferred from the analog-to-digital con-verter to the raw weight register 710, one is subtracted from ~; the number stored in the tare timer 728 as indicated in blocks 96, 97 and 97A as described above. After 13 of such cycles, 30 2.6 seconds have elapsed.
.
., .
- 84 _ : - - . . .
.. . . .
If another one of the tare keys is operated in this 2.6 second period, then the cont~ol is transferred from block 147 directly to block 149 where the value of the second operated tare key is entered in the tare storage spaces 720. Also, the S tare timer is reset or recycled by again entering 13 in 'che tare timer storage spaces 728. Thus for example if the tare key .05 is actuated, then this figure will be entered in the tare register 720 with the result that the register now has entered `. in it a tare weight of .15 pound. I'hereafter the interlock and initializing conditions must be checked and the lock switch 179 must be operat:ed in order to condition the system for weighing operations involving subtracting tare weights as described herein.
If, however, the second key is operated 2.6 seconds after the previous key then the next. time the control sequence : advances to block 147 in the manner described above, the sequence transfers to block 148 which clears the tare storage areas and . then to block 149 so that the weight represented by only the last tare key operated is stored in the tare storase areas 720.
, :
. ~ .
`~ OUTPUT CO~ITROL
When a package has been placed on the scale platter and weighed, ard the weight corrected after a no motion condition has been established as described herein, control will be trans- -ferred to block 26 via transfer CS to block 66 and then to block 26. The "MOT~F" flag is cleared at this time so blocX 26 . will transfer control to block 27. Block 27 interrogates the .. printer mode switch 172 (Fig. 3) and branches around block 28 to block 29 if the system is in either the demand or the . ..
continuous mode., Since WQ are assuming single mode, block 27 -:
`. transfers control to block 28.
. - 85 _ .
- ~
Block 28 int~rro~ates the status storage space 729 status register 0001. This signal is true if, during the input operations a motion det~ctor inhibit switch in the printer i5 on. This switch is provided so that systems which are in vibratory installations (heavy machinery causing floor vibra-tions or overhead fans, for example) can have the switch turned on to guarantee only one label per weight application. If the switch is "on", control is transferred to block 29.
Block 29 examines the status of a reweigh storage space 740 of status register 0001. A one or true of this reweigh signal is an indication that the previous printer opera-tion was aborted due to a set-up malfunction. If there was a malfunction, block 29 transfers control to block 31 via A7 (this allows another print to be initiated for the same package to allow the printer to rectify the error). If there is no reweigh, block 29 trans~ers control to block 30. Block 30 interrogates the status of storage space 730 of status register 0001. A true or one in this location indicates that a print has occurred and the printed label has not been removed. If this condition exists, block 30 'ransfers control to block 25 via connector Al.
Thus no print occurs during this motion - no motion sequence.
(Motion Detector Inhibit) If a zero is stored in the print storage space in the status register 0001, block 30 transfers data to block 31 and, providing other conditions are fulfilled, a label is printed.
Blocks 28 through 30 compr~:se a system whereby only one label per weight application is allowed, unless the printer - malfunctions, in which case a subsequent motion - no motion cycle will be recognized.
If the motion detector inhibit switch is not on, block 28 transfers control to block 31 directly; thus allowing a new printer cycle for each motion - no motion detected.
- . .
Blocks 31 through 33 allow the printing of a label with the appli~d weight being below a preselected minimum value (in this ex~nple, ~10 pound). The need of the minimum value inhibit is that if none were present, the system would be S printing labels with zero weight on the platter, an undesirable condition. The ability to print labels with applied weights below the predetermlned value is necessary for tests.
If the unit price is set to zero and the no tare key . is depressed, an output print signal is generated when a motion - no motion cycle occurs, regardless of the applie~ weight.
Bloc~ 31 interroga-tes the "no tare" switch 171 for a no tare signal. If this condition exists, control is transferred to bloc~ 32 which interrogates S~7-.OP through SW-.PO (Fig. 7).
If the price is zero as indicated by SW-.OP through SW-.PO, all being zero, control is transferred to block 33 which causes a "1" to be stored in the status storage space 731 of status ~ register 0011 and the printer will generate a label. Block 33 -' then transfers control to block ~5 via Al.
If either block 31 or block 32 are not true, control is transferred to block 34. Block 34 interrogates the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7). If the weight is less than 0.1 -pound, control is returned to block 25 via Al. If the net weight is greater than 0.1 pound, control is trans~erred to block 35.
; 30 ~n add~tlon, a one 1~ record~d in the ~T~ ~tatus r~gi~tor ~pace 736 o~ th~ ~tatu~ regist~r 0010. Thsn the control 1~ tran~- .
- ~erro~ to block 5S vla B10 o~ Fl~. 2B.
., ; .
- 51 - . :
.
Block 55 cau~e9 the computer to compare the printer mode recorded in space 722 of register 0010 with the recordings in the status register bits 723 and 724. Since it is assumed herein that the printer mode will be the manual mode, these S registers will not have changed so the operation will be trans-ferred to block 57 via transfer B12. In block 57, the condition of the interlocked flag in the status bit register 736 is inter-rogated and as pointed out above, this flag has been set to a one so that control then goes to block 58 where the interlock flag is changed from one to zero and the initialized flag I~ITF
stored in space 727 is set to a one. Next, the set bit in space 737 of the status register 0011 is set and the control transfer-red to block 66 via C5. Since this cycle of operations started -from block 25, block 66 causes the computer to transfer control back to block 25 via transfer Al.
Since the motion flag is not set, that is, since a zero is still stored in the status register storage space 718, the control will be transferred to block 81 via transfe~ El.
.
At this time, the block 81 causes the computer to again test the TlF flag, that is, the TlF storage space 717. During the previous cycle, as described above, a one was stored in this block indicating that TlF is set. Consequently, at this time the con-trol will be transferred to block 86, instead of 82, as described in the previous cycle. However, under the assumed conditions, i 2S the signal on the Tl clock lead is still zero so that control will be now transferred to block 84 via the transfer E4. There-after, block 84 tests the zero expand switch which, as assumed to be unoperated, so that control will then be transferred to block 39 via transfer A15. Thereafter the remainder of the second cycle is substantially th2 same as described above - assuming that none of the various keys or switch~s have been actuated.
., .
At th2 end oE the second cycle, control will be tran~-ferred to the block 25 via Al transfer in the manner described above and each succe~ding cycle of the main program will be repeated in accordance with the above description of the second cycle so long as the si~nal from the analog-to-digital converter on the Tl clock lead remains zero. During each of these cycles, the TlF or Tl flag si~nal is set in a one state by a one being stored in the storage space 717 and a zero signal remains on the Tl clock lead from the analog-to-digital converter.
: 10NO MOTION DETECTION
Assume now that during some one of the above-described cycles of the main program, the analog-to-digital converter 14 completes a conversion and supplies digital output signals to the control equipment 15. Consequently, the analog-to-digital con-verter 14 will also apply a one signal to the Tl clock lead. Asa result, when a control is transferred to the block 86 during the next main program cycle, as described above, the T1 lead will ~- test one or true so that the control is now transferred to block 87 where the TlF or Tl flag is cleared. In other words, a zero is now stored in the TlF status register space 717 instead of a on~
Thereafter, the control goes to block 88 where the weight output signals from the analog converter 14 are read into the raw weight register 710 of Fig. 7.
l Fig. 2J shows a flow chart of an exemplary sub-routine 'd, 25 for entering weight signals from the analog-to-digital converter in the raw weight register 710 of Fig. 7O
As described above when the analog-to-digital converter is in condition for transferring digital signals to the raw weight register 710, an output signal is applied by the analog-to-digital converter to the Tl lead. As a result the control sequence proceeds from block 86 thsough block 87 to block 88 as described above. Within block 88 the control is transferred to block 370. This block indicates that the R0 register within _ ~3 _ the CPU unit is set to eleven~ The Pl register is set to zero and the ~3 register also set to zero. These registers being located within the CPU unit.
The R0 register is employed to indicate when all of the digits of the weight are transferred to the raw weight - register 710. The Pl register is employed to direct the digits - to the proper register spaces within the raw weight register.
The R3 register is employed to select the desired decimal digit to be transferred from the analog-to-digital converter to the raw weight register 710. Thus initially with these registers set as described above, the block 371 to which the control is transferred from block 370 first reads the R3 register and finds ; a zero recorded therein. Block 370 then translates this zero to indicate that the zero should be read from each one of the leads DIG SEL B, DIG SE1 C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E. The translation order or sequence is designated KBP which translates the binary digit in the R3 regist~r into a one-out-of-four code. ~ext block 372 tests the digit select leads B, C, D and E and if any signal condition on these leads other than zero on all of them is found, the control is transferred back to transfer point J2 and the above cycle repeated. The small loop including blocks - 371 and 372 are then repeated until zero is found on all four of the digit select leads DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E.
When a zero is found on all of these leads, the controi is then transferred to the block 373 where the value of this digit is read into the raw weight register area selected by the Pl register in the CPU unit. This will be the first digit space in the raw weight register 710 since a zero was previously set in the Pl register in the CPU unit.
. ' ~ ~ 54 ~
., : .. , : .
1062Z~0 After the fir5t digit is thus transferred to the raw weight register 710, the zero in the R3 register in the CPU unit is again translated by the KBP operations into a one-out-of-four code and the signals on the digit select conductors DIG SEL B, DIG SEL C, DIG SEL D and DIG SEL E compared with this code. If under the assumed conditions zeros are found on all of these leads, thus corresponding to the zero in register R3 after being translated to the one-out-of-four code, the control is advanced to block 376.
If on the other hand the signals on the weight data conductors WT. DATA 1, WT. DATA 2, WT. DATA 4 and WT. DATA 8 change during the time the weight is ~eing read into the raw weight register 710, then when the signals on the digit select - leads DIG SE~ B, DIG SEL C, DIG S~L D and DIG SEL E are again compared with the setting of the R3 register by block 375 these signals will have changed so that the control is then trans-ferred back to transfer point Jl and thus to block 370 instead of block 376. Under these assumed conditions wherein the signals on the B, C, D and E digit select conductors change during the reading in of a digit, it is assumed that the digit transferred to the raw weight register will be in error. Consequently, the transfer operations are startad over again and proceed as ` described above. ~amely, the control will be first transferred to block 370 where the registers R0, Pl and R3 are set as ' 25 described above. Then the control is advanced to block 371 and the setting ~f the R3 register translated to a one-out-of-four code and again compared with the B, C, D and E select conductors.
.. ~ .
This cycle is then repeated until the signals on these conductors ~re the same as the translated setting of the R3 register at which time the digit on the weight data conductors 1, 2, 4 and 8 is ~, again transferred to the raw weight register.
Assume that the signals on these digit select conductors do not change so that when they are again tested by the block 375 they will again correspond to the translated setting of the R3 register. Cons~quently, the con~rol is advanced to block 376 where the setting of th~se three registers Pl, R3 and R0 are all incremented by one. The control then advances to block 377 where the number stored in the R0 register is tested. Under the assumed conditions this number is now twel~e (eleven plus one). Since this number is not zero, the control i3 transferred to the J2 transfer point and thus to block 371 where the above cycles of operation are repeated until the second of the decimal digits of the raw weight are transf~rred from the analog-to-digital converte:~
to the raw weight register. The control is then again trans-ferred to block 376. Assuming that the signals on the B, C, D
and E digit select conductors have not been changed during the recording of the value of the second digit in accordance with 15 block 376, the registers Pl, R3 and RO are again incremented so that the next or number three digit will be transmitted from the interface equipment of Fig. 3A to the raw weight register 710.
~; After the fifth digit has been thus selec.ed and trans-. . ~ .
ferred to the raw weight register 710, the R0 register in the CPU
unit will have recorded in it fifteen. This is incremented by the sub-routine of block 376. As a result, the setting of this R0 register will now be zero. Since this is a four digit binary register when the register is incremented wi~h fifteen stored in it, it is resto~ed to zero. With the result that the control is now transferred from reading the weight to the block 89 o~ Fig. 2E.
From block 88 the control sequence advances through blocks 96 and 97 and at times through block 97A which blocks are employed to advance the tare timer in a well-known manner.
Briefly, the block 96 causes the count stored in the tare timer space 728 to be read out. Then block 97 determines if the ` count read out is zero. If it is zero the control sequence advances to block 89. If the count read out is not zero then the - `
control sequence advances to block 97A where one is subtracted from the count read out and the new count restored in the tare timer storage spaccs 728.
Next, in block 90, the computer determines whether or not there has been motion or a change in weight on the scale platform. The arrangement, in accordance with the exemplary embodiment of this invention, is arranged so that if the weight changes or is less than a predetermined amount, that is within a prdetermined band, it is assumed that there is no motion of the platform scale. If, on the other hand, a weight change exceeds the predetermined band, then it is assumed that there is motion of a scale platform. In accord~lce with the present invention, the bandwidth may be predetermined to any desired value, which value is stored in the pre-assigned storage spaces in one of the ROM's.
Under the assumed conditions, zeros will be stored in the motion target weight register 735. Assume now that the band is .003 pound, plus or minus, and that a weight of .004 pound is read into the raw weight register 710 from the analog-to-digital converter 14 during this cycle of the control equipment 15. Then in accordance with block 90, the zero weight from the motion target weight register 735 is subtracted from the weight in the raw weight register 710 and then the band .003 subtracted from the difference which leaves +.001. Since the final difference is positive, it indicates that motion is present. ~ext, the weight ~
in the targe~ weight register is subtracted from the weight in the -raw weight register and the band of .003 pound added to the dif- -~ ference, and since this sum is not negative, it does not indicate -- m~tion. However, motion was indicated by the first calculation.
i 30 Thereafter, in response to the motion indication from block 90, block 91 causes the program to transfer to block 98 via the Fl transfer. Block 98 first clears the no motion or hit counter 726 (i.e. causes all zeros to be stored in this coun~er space) and sets the motion flag MOT~. That iq, it causes a one to be stQred in the status register 718. Then block 99 causes the weight in the motion target weight register 735 to be changed to the .004 pound recorded in the raw weight register. The weight of .004 pound remains recorded in the raw weight register 710 at this time. Next, an initial weight of 8 pounds representing the weight of the scale platter on the load cell is subtracted.
The program then proceeds through blocks 100 where zero expand switch is tested and found not to be operated. At block 103 the zero range expand switch is tested and found not to be operated, so the program then jumps to block 105 via trans-fer F6 where the weight recorded in the raw weight register 710 is corrected by the auto zero weight stored in the zero correc-; tion register 11, which is zero at this time under the assumed condition. The program then proceeds to block 107 where the control equipment determines that the weight on the platter is not greater than 30 pounds. Consequently, the control then advances to block 109 where a zero is recorded in the over capacity status register space 725.
~ext, the control equipment 15 is advanced to the -block 110 where the motion flag is tested. That is, the status regis-.er space 718 is read out and since a one is recorded in this space, the program then advances to block 111 where the one recorded in the set status register space 737 is tested.
Since a one is assumed to be stored in this space, the program is then transferred to G7 so that ~he block 123 subtracts th~
tare weight in the register 720 from the weight in the raw weight register 710, causes round off operation to be performed and restores the thus corrected weight in the raw weight register and moves the four most significant digits from the raw weight register 710 to the weight out register 712.
:' ' Next, the proqram advances through blocks 124 transfer G12, block~ 12~ and 129, 130 and 131 and transfer CS to block 66.
Since this cycle of operation of the control equipment 15 started from block 25, as described above, the block 66 now S causes the program to be transferred back over transfer Al to block 25 and another cycle of the control equipment 15 is initiated.
. At this time the motion flag MOTNF is set, i.e. the status register space 718 has a one stored in it as described above, so the control sequence advances to block 26 instead of being transferred to block 81 via transfer El.
- In block 26, the status of the MOTNF status register space 718 is again tested and since a "1" is recorded in this space, this flag is not clear; consequently, the program is transferred by transfer El to block 81.
At this time the TlF flag is not set. In other words, -a zero was recorded in the status register space 717 on the last ~ cycle of the control equipment 15... Consequently the program now proceeds to biock 82 where the condition of the Tl clock lead 20 from the analog-to-digital converter is tested. At this time :~:
it is assumed that a "1" signal is on this lead with the result - that the program now transfers over the E4 transfer to block 84.
Since the zero expand switch is not operated, this zero expand is not true with the result that the program is transferred over : ~
~5 transfer A15 to block 39. The remainder of this cycle of the . ~ :
control equi~ment lS then is as described above through blocks ~ ;
40, 41 transfer B2 to blocks 48, 47, 4~, 50, 52, 53 transfer Il to block 144, then block 146 and transfer B10 to block 55. From block 55, control is transferred to block 57 over transfer B12 30 and then through block 57 transfer Cl to block 62, transfer C5 , to block 66.
; - 59 - ~ -- . .
. ~ .
~, . . ..
, :. ~
Since thi~ cycle wa~ initiated through bloc~ 26, block 66 now returns the control to block 26 over transfer A2 and the above cycle of operation~ then repeated. This cycle of operation is then continuously repeated ~o long as a "1" signal S is applied to the Tl clock lead by the analog-to-digital con-verter.
Ne~t, when the analog-to-digital converter removes the "1" signal from the Tl clock lead, the program during the next cycle of the control equipment 15 is subsequentl~ transferred to blocks 81 and 82 in the manner described above, the Tl clock ;~ lead will not be true, in other words it will test "0" so the program is then advanced to block 83 where the Tl flag is again set; that is, the "1" is recorded in the TlF storage space 717 in the status registers. Thereafter, the above cycles of opera-tion of the control equipment wil] continue as described above initially except that the block 66 of Fig. 2C will return the control to block 26 over the A2 transfer since the cycle started from this block instead of block 25 as described initially.
By the use of the TlF flag and the testing of the Tl clock control lead as described above, the output from the ` analog-to-digital converter is transferred to the control equip-ment vnly once during each of the 200 millisecond cycles of the analog-to-digital converter 14. This transfer occurs in the ; next succeeding cycle of the control equipment after the "1"
signal is applied to the T1 clock control lead. Thereafter the "1" signal has to be removed from this lead and re-applied by the analog-to-digital converter 14 before a subsequent weight will be transferred from the analog-to-digital converter to the control `1 equipment 15~ -- 30 Since the control equipment 15 operates in the above- -described manner for the various cycles, when weight information is not transferred from the analog-to-digital converter, the -operation of the control equipment 15 during such cycles will . .
not be repea~cl. Instcad the operation during only those cycles during which weight information is transmi~ted from the analog-to-digital converter to the control equipment 15 will be des-cribed. However, it is to be understood that control equipment 15 advances through numerous of these cycles in the manner des-cribed above between each of these cycles during which weight information is read out from the analog-to-digital converter and stored in the raw weight register 710.
Assume now on the next weighing cycle, that is the next time a weight is received from the analog-to-digital con-; verter and stored in the raw weight register 710, the weight stored in this register will not have changed but will be .004 pound. Consequently when the calculations at block 90 have performed in the sequence as described above, the calculations 15 will indicate that no motion is present. ~o motion would also ;
~ be present if the weight received ~rom the analog-to-digital converter does not varv more than .003 pound from the .004 pound previously received from the register.
Und-er these assumed conditions with the calculations ~ ;-performed in accordance with block 90 indicating no motion, block 91 will then cause the control to be advanced to block 92 when the motion flag MOT~F is read out and checked. This time the motion flag will not be zero since a "1" was previously stored in the status register space 718 and has not been changed. As a result, control is advanced to block 93 where the no motion counter or hit counter 726 of Fig. 7 is incremented by one.
, Under the assumed condition, "0" has been previously stored in '!, this counter so`the counter will now indicate a count of "1".
Control is then advanced to block 94 where the count in this counter 726 is read out and since it is less than some predeter-mined value, the count will not be greater than this value with the result that the control is transferred via F2 to block 99 and the remaining portion of the cycle repeated as described above.
: - ~ . - ~ , - - , On the next cycle during which weight indication i~
again received frorn the analog-to-digital converter in the manner described above, if no motion is still determined by block 90, then the hit counter 726 will again be incremented and have a count of 2. Thus each cycle during which no motion is present, this counter is incremented by "1". If, however, during any of these cycles the calculations of block 90 indicate that motion is present, then block 91 will transfer the control to block 98 via transfer Fl at which time the hit counter 726 is cleared, -~ 10 i.e. zeros are stored in the counter spaces, 'and the motion flag 718 is again set to 1; in other words, a "1" is written over the "1" already in this storage register space.
After the predetermined number of no motion indications have been obtained from calculations of blocX 90 and the control advanced through blocks 91, 92, 93 to 94, it will be determined that the counter is in excess of the required number of counts.
- Thus, to obtain a no motion indication, it is not only necessary that the scale remain within a fixed band indication of weights, but also that it remain in this band for a predeter-mined interval of time. This interval of time can be predeter-mined within increments of .200 of a second, the cycle period of an ~lalog-to-digital converter. Assuming that five such incre-ments are required thus requiring that the weight indication - remain within .003 pound for one second when the control is ~ 25 transferred to block 94 and a count of five stored in the ; counter 726, bloc~ 94 will advance control to block 95 where the , motion flag MOTNF is cleared. In other words, a "0" is now recorded in status register space 718.
; Thereafter the control is transferred to block 99 via transfer F2 and then advanced through the blocks 99, 100, 103, transfer F6 to bloc~ 105, blocX 107, block 109 and to block 110.
.
:;
.. : .
: :.
106Z2!~0 In block ?lo, the motion flag is again tested and since a "0" is no~ stored in the status register 718, the con-trol is transferrecl to block 115 over the transfer Gl and thereafter the control is transferred as described hereinafter under the heading of "Automatic zero Correction" On the next cycle of the control equipment 15, after the no motion flag is cleared as described, control is returned to the block 26. In accordance with this block, motion flag is read out and tested and since it is clear, control is advanced to block 27 where it is determined whether the scale is arranged to operate in the demand mode or continuous mode. Under.the assumed conditions, the scale is arranged to operate in the manual mode and not in ~ the demand or continuous mode so that the control continues to ; a block 28. At the block 28, a c~eck is made to`see if a -. 15 I'motion detector inhibit" switch is closed to disable the motion : .
detector portion of the apparatus 15. It is assumed that the .~ .
switch is not closed and the control continues to block 29.
~ Block 29 determines that a reweigh is not necessary at this time so control is transferred to block 30. In accordance with block 30, the control equipment under the assumed conditi~ns will determine that print ~ata is not stored so the control sequence advances to block 31. Block 31 determines that the no tare key is not pressed so that control is advanced to block 34. If the weight is greater than 0.1 pound then the control is advanced to , 25 block 35 where the set status register space 737 is tested. This :
space 737 is assumed to be true so that the control is then - transferred back to block 25 via transfer Al. If the weight as ' assumed is not greater than 0.1 pound then block 34 causes the ; control to be transferred back to block 25 via transfer Al. In either case the above-described cycle then repeats starting with block 25 for each of the various cycles described so long as the motion~flag is not set; that is so long as zero remains recorded in the status register 718.
, If the weiyht is greater than 0.1 pound, the set is not true, the wei~ht i5 not minus, and is not over the capacity of the scale, then the control sequence advances through blocks 34, 35, 36 and 37 to block 38. Block 38 causes an output print pulse which causes the weight to be printed. Then the sequence returns to block 25 via transfer ~1. Thereafter, the above-described sequences are repeated.
. AUTOMATIC ZERO CORRECTION
Assume now that either when the scale is first turned on or that after the previous object has been weighed and removed from the scale, the scale has not returned accurately to zero. Assume, for example, that the scale has returned to 00.0004. Also assume that zeros are entered in the zero correc-tion register ill and after the various operations referred to above, have been completed, 00.004 pound is entered in the raw weight register 710. A "1" will be registered in the weight sign register 715 and "1" in the zero correction sign register , 714.
The one in the sign registers indicate that the sign , ! .
of the weight or zero correction is plus and zeros entered in ... .
thes~ registers represent a negative sign or weight indication.
The manner in which the various signs are determined and entered into the respective registers will be apparent from the following description.
Thus, on the first cycle of the control equipment lS
after the previous weight has been removed from the scale and the scale returned to idle condition or the power turned on, 00.004 will be entered into the raw weight register 710 and a "1" indicating a plus will be entered in the weight sign register ,' space 715. ~ext during this same cycle of operation of the ; control unit 15, the weight in the zero correction register 711 is subtracted (block 105 Fig. 2F) from the weight in the raw - 64 _ weight registcr and th~ difference is then re--entered in the raw weight registcr 710. Undex these assumed conditions, zero will be subtracted Lrom the 00.004 recorded in the raw weight register and the di~ference 00.004 rerecorded in the raw weight register 710.
;Next the automatic zero correction limit of 00.005 pound is subtracted (block 115 Fig. 2G) from the 00.004 pvund ~ -in the raw weight register and since the 00.004 pound is less, the weight indication of the scale is within the automatic zero -10 correcting range so the control equipment will then follow addi- -tional steps re~uired to automatically correct the 00.004 pound. -~ext the 00.004 pound in the raw weight register is compared with ;~the zero or 1/4 graduation range of 00.002 pound (bloc~ 117 ~ig. 2G).
lS Aoth this comparison and the previous comparison may I be made in any desired manner such as, for example, by means of threshold circuits af any well known and suitable type. However, . .~ .
in accord~nce with the present invention, this comparison is made ~ by the central processor unit CPU 186 of the microcomputer or j 20 control unit 15. ~ -Briefly, a series of orders or instructions direct the central processing unit 186 to predetermined locations in the ROM units where the limits of 00.005 and 00.002 are stored.
~hese instructions direct the central processing unit 186 to obtain these limits and then subtract them from the weight in the raw weight r~gister. As a result, the central processing unit 186 causes the limit 00.002 obtained from the predetermined address in the ROM to be subtracted from the 00.004 stored in the raw waight r~gister 710. The result of this subtraction is 00.002 which is a positive number thus indicating that the magnitude of the weight in the raw weight register is not equal to or less than .002 pound. As a result, 12 will be entered in ~he zero count register 713 (block 118, Fig. 2G).
Next, the readlng of 12 in the zero count register 713 is read out by the control equipment (block 120~ and since this reading is less th~n 16, the zero count register 713 does not return to zero, the`count in this register is incremented by one so that a 13 is now stored in the zero count register 713 (blocks 119 and 114, Fig. 2G).
~ ext, since the weight stored in the raw weight regis-ter is not 00.000 (block 132, Fig. 2G) the weight recorded in the zero correction register 711 is compared with the 0.6 pound limit for the operation of the zero correction (block 121, Fig.
2G). In performing this comparison, a$ above, any suitable type of comparing or threshold circuits may be employed, however, in the specific arrangement described herein, the central processing unit CPU 186 will obtain, under control of orders or 15 instructions stored in the ROM's 188-192, the .6 of a pound from a predetermined location in the read only memory and then sub-tract the weight in the zero correction register 711 from this value. If the value in the zero correction register 711 is less than the 0.6 of a pound the zero correcting operation will con-tinue. This limit of 0.6 pound and also the other limits of 00.005 and 00.002 pound may be changed or determined by the value ~, stored in the read only storage devices ROM's at the ~redetermined locations employed for storing these ualues.
Since under the assumed conditions the 00.000 stored in the zero correction register is less than 0.6 pound the weight stored in the zero correction register 711 is augmented or changed by 00.001 pound (block 122, Fig. 2G) and the sign in the zero correction sign register 714 is changed to a plus.
- ~ext a round-off operation is performed by adding - 30 00.005 to the weight now recorded in the raw weight register 710.
As a result, the weight of 00.009 is rerecorded in the raw weight register 710 (block 123, Fig. 2G).
. :
106;~Z90 Next the four most significant digits recorded in the raw weight register 710 which are all zeros is transferred to the o~put weight register 712 so that they will be available for controlling the output indication of 00.00.
During a subsequent portion of this first cycle, the 13 stored in the zero count register 713 is again read out and since this number is not 16, i.e. not 0, the l/4 graduation lamp is turned off if it was on or maintained off if it was already off. Thereafter, during the remaining portion of this first cycle of the control unit 15, other operations may.be performed.
However, the values stored in the various registers described . above will remain until the next operating cycle of this control unit 15.
During the next cycle of operation of the control unit :.
lS 15, the 00.004 weight will be regist.ered again in a raw weight .
register 710 in the same manner as during the first cycle. Then the value in the zero correction register 711 which is now 00.001 pound will be subtracted from the weight in the raw weight .. register 71G and the difference is rerecorded in the raw weight 20 register 710. Thus .001 pound is now stored or recorded in the raw weight register 710.
.. - ~ext the 00.003 pound stored in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 pound operating limit of the automatic zero correcting operation which is obtained from the ~ 25 read only storage units of the system. Since the result of subtracting the 00.003 pound from the 00.005 pound is positive, the plus sign remains stored in the zero correction sign register and the system continues to perform additional operations required for the automatic zero correction in accordance with the present invention.
.
., - 67 - .
. .
` lO~;ZZ90 Next the 00.003 pound stored in the raw weight regis-ter 710 is comp~red ~ith the zero or 1/4 graduation range in the manner described above. rrhus the 00.002 pound, obtained from the read only memory at the predetermined location assigned to this limit, is subtracted from the .003 pound in the raw weight register 710. The result of this subtraction is a positive number, namely 00.00] pound.
Since the weight in the raw weight register is not less than 00.002 pound the control unit causes 12 to be ~ain entered in the zero count register 713 and then this register read out as described above. Since the count is not 16, i.e.
not 0, the count in the zero count ~yister 713 is incremented by one so that 13 is now recorded in the zero count register 713.
In addition, since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is 15 not 00.000 the wei~ht stored in the zero correction register 711 of 00.001 pound, is compared with the limits of 0.6 pound of the zero correction range by subtracting the 00.001 from the 0.6 pound. The result is positive so the weight in the zero correc-tion register 711 is augmented by 00.001 pound.
As a result 00.002 pound is now recorded in the zero correction register 711. ~ext, a roundoff operation is per-formed by adding 00.005 pound to the 00.003 pound in ~he raw weight register 710 and the result 00.008 pound recorded in the raw weight register 710.
~S Next the four most significant digits in the raw weight register, namely 0000, are transferr~d to the output weight register so they will be available for controlling the display of 0000.
Also during this second cycle, the 13 recorded in the zero count register is again read out as before and since the count is not 16, i.e. not 0, the 1/4 graduation lamp is maintained off.
.
- ~ . . . ..
,, - , ~
During the r~maining portion of thi~ second cycle of the control unit lS the information recorded in the above registers employed in the automatic zero correction operation remains substantially the same as described~
S Near the beginning of the third cycle of the operation of the control unit 15, the raw weight 00.004 pound will again be registered in the raw weight register 710. Next the 00.002 pound stored in the zero correction register 711 will be sub-tracted from the raw weight 00.004 and the difference 00.002 pound restored in the raw weight register 710.
~ ext the 00.002 pound weight in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the zero correcting limit of 00.005 pound.
The 00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710 is subtracted from the 00.005 pound and since the result of this sùbtraction ,~j , 15 is 00.003 pound. the plus sign remains stored in the zero correc-: tion sign register 714 and the zero correcting operation continues.
., ~ ~ext, the zero or 1/4 graduation range of 00.002 is ., subtracted from the 00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710.
The resulting difference of 0 indicates that the weight in the . .
` 20 raw weight register is equal to or less than the 00.002 pound recorded in the raw weight register 710. Consequently, the cont~nts of the zero count register 713 is read out which is 13 as described above. Since this is less than 16 the zero count register is incremented by l which causes 14 to be stored in this register at this time (blocks 117, 120, 119 and 114 in Fig. 2G).
Since the weight recorded in the raw weight register 710 is not 00.000, the weight of 00.002 stored in the zero correction register is compared with the 0.6 pound limit of the automatic correction range. The 00.002 is subtracted from the .6 pound and since the result is positive, 00.001 is added to the 00.002 pound stoxed in the zero correction register 711 and the sum 00.003 pound is now restored in the zero correction register 711.
:
: .
-.
Next the roundof~ operation i5 performed by adding 00.005 to the 00.002 in the xaw weight register and the sum 00.007 now stored in the raw weight register 710. Next the four most ~igniicant digits of the weight recorded in the raw weight register is transferred to the output weight register 712 where it i5 avail-able for later controlling the digital output indicator of the scale.
.~ During this third cycle of operation the 14 nowrecorded in the zero count register will again be read out and since it is less than 16, the 1/4 graduation lamp w.111 remain .
turned off. Thereafter during the remainder of the third cycle of operation of the control unit 15 after the scale has returned to zero or normal, the information recorded in the various . regist~rs described above remains unchanged.
During the fourth cycle of.operation of the control equipment 15 the raw weight of 00.004 is again stored in the raw weight register 710 and the 00.003 now stored in the zero . correction register 711 is subtracted from this 00.004 ~nd the ~ .
.resulting difference 00.001 pound is now stored in the raw weight register 710. This 00.001 pound is then compared with the 00.005 limit of the automatic zero correction and also with the 00.002 limit. As a result of both of these comparisons, the system . works as described above since the 00.001 stored in the raw weight register is less than 00.005 limit and al5O less than ~ :
. 25 00.002 limit.
' Since the 00.001 weight stored in the raw weight register is less than the 00.002 limit, the number stored in the zero count register 713 will be augmented by 1 so that 15 ~s will now be stored in this register. Later, when this register.
30 is again read out, the 15 will be less than 16 so the 1/4 graduation lamp will be maintained turned off~
_ 70 -. .. , - . . . :
- :. , - . : - :.-10~;2290 Similarly, the 00.003 now stored in the zero correc-tion register 711 is compared with 0.6 limit o~ the zero correction range and as a result 00.001 i~ added to the 00.003 in the zero correction register 711 and the resulting 00.004 now stored in this register. Next the roundo~f operation is performed by adding 00.005 to the 00.001 in the raw weight register and the resulting 00.006 sum now stored in the raw weight register 710. Thereafter the four most significant digits 00.00 of the raw weight register 710 are moved to the weight output register 712 where they are available ~or controlling the output display of the scale.
As before, during the remainder of this fourth cycle of operation of the control unit 15 the information stored in the various registers employed in the zero correcting arrange-ment remain unchanged.
During the fifth cycle of operation of the control equipment 15 the raw weight of 00.004 pound is again stored in the raw weight register 7io and the 00.004 now stored in the ~ zero correction register 711 subtracted from this 00.004.
- 20 Resulting difference 00.000 is now stored in the raw weight register.
This weight is then compared with the 00.005 limit of the automatic zero correction range and also with the 00.002 limit.
As a result of both of these comparisons the system works subst~ntially as described above. Briefly as a result of ` the comparison of the 00.000 with the 00.002 limit, the 14 now stored in the zero count register 713 is read out. Since this - count is less than 16, the count is incremented by one so that thereafter 15 is stored in the zero count register 713. At -- this time, since the weight in the raw weight re~ister 710 is 00.000 the weight stored in the zero correction register is not augmented but remains 00.004.
. .
Therea~ter, during the remaining portions of this flfth cycle of operation of the control unlt 15, the system wor~s substantially as described. When the 15 stored in the zero count register 713 is read out it will cause the 1/4 graduation lamp S to remain off because the count is less than 16.
During the next or sixth cycle of operation of the control unit 15 the system works substantially as described above except that when the zero count register is incremented it will have stored in it a count of 16. Since this register stores four binary digits, the count of 16 will cause the register to return to zero. Later when this register is again read out during this cycle of operation the 16, or zeros, recorded in the register will cause the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned on which indicates that the automatic zero correction has been made and that the scale is within 1/4 graduation of the least significant display digit. This time, as pointed out above, weight displayed on the scale will be 00.00.
Thereafter during the succeeding cycles of operation ~ of the control equ pment neither the zero correction register -- 20 711 nor the zero count register 713 will be augmented; instead the contents of these registers will be maintained substantially as described above until either a weight is placed on the scale or the zero drifts or wanders. If the zero indication should drift or wander then it will be corrected in the manner des-cribed above.
Assume now that an object weighing one pound is placed on the scale platter or pan. As a result, the load cell to-gether with its sensor and the analog=to-digital converter will cause a new raw weight including the zero error to be entered :
in the raw weight register 710.
. . .
~ - 72 -.. ....
1062Z~0 This new r~w weight will be corrected by the weight of the pan or platter as described above and as a result a weight of 01.004 will be entered in the raw weight register.
At thi~ time, under the conditions assumed above, 00.004 is still registered in the zero correction register so this 00.004 is subtracted from the 01.004 in the raw weight register 710 and the difference 01.000 is then stored in the raw weight register 710. Next the one pound weight, namely 01.000, stored in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 pound limit of the automatic zero correcting range by subtracting ~Ihe 00.005 from the 01.000 pound. The result of this subtraction is positive with the result that 13 is entered in the zero count register 713, which later causes the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off. In addition, since the one ~` 15 pound is greater than the 00.005 there is no point in comparing ~` the one pound with 00.002 limit so that the control unit 15 will immediately cause the roundoff operation by adding .005 to the i weight recorded in the raw weight register and thus cause 00.005 to be added to the 01.000 weight and cause the sum 01.005 to be -stored in the raw weight register 710.
~ ext the four most signi~icant digits, that is the 01.00 will be transferred to the output weight register 712 where they will control the output weight indication of the scale and thus accurately indicate the one pound weight or object placed on the scale platter or pan. So long as the 01.00 weight remains on the scale the above cycles of operation ; of the control unit 15 will be repeated. 00.004 remains stored in the zero correction register. 13 is repeatedly stored in - the zero count register with the result that the 1/4 graduation lamp remains turned off and 01.00 is displayed. The raw weight of 01.004 obtained from the scale is corrected by the 00.004 in the zero correction register so the correct weight 01.00 of the object on the scale is correctly displayed.
.
Assume now that after the object weighed above isremoved from the scale, the scale now returns to -00.001 instead of to 00.004 pound. This weight -00.001 pound is entered in the xaw weight register 710 after the scale has come to rest and the initial 8 pounds subtracted from the digital output of the analog-to-digital converter as described herein and a 0, indi-cating the minus sign, stored in the weight sign register 715.
Next, the plus 00.004 in the zero correction register 711 is algebraically subtracted from -00.001 in the raw weight register, the resulting difference is -00.005 which is stored in the raw weight register 710 and a minus sign or zero is - stored in the weight sign register 715.
Next, the minus 00.005 recorded in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the 00.005 automatic zero correc-., :
tion limits. At this time the magnitude or absolute value of the weight in the raw weight register is compared with the limits - ~-, 00.005. Since it is egual to the lower limit, the automatic .. s ~
zero correcting sequence of operations will be performed.
; ~ext, the weight of -00.005 recorded in the raw weight . . .
~ 20 register 710 is compared with the 00.002 pound limit. Since this .;;
~ weight is greater in magnitude than the limit, a 12 is now ; recorded in the zero count register 713 and then this register read out. Since the count is less than 16, the count is incre-mented by 1 so that 13 is now recorded in this register. As described above, the 13 in this register later causes the zero or 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off or maintained off if it , is already off. Since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is not zero, the weight recorded in the zero correction register 711 is subtracted from the 0.6 pound limit and since the weight is less than the limit, 00.001 is subtracted from the weight in :~
the zero correction register 711 so that 00.003 is now recorded -- in the zero correction register 711.
.: .
Next, the roundoff operation is performed by adding 00.005 to the weight -00.005 recorded in the raw weight register 710 and the sum 00.000 rerecorded in the raw weight register.
Next the four most significant digits of this weight are trans-ferred to the output register where the output indication will then be 0000 when the other operations required to display this number have been performed during the remaining part of this first cycle of control unit 15 after the scale has become stabilized when the previous weight was removed from the pan or platter.
During the next cycle of the control unit 15, the -00.001 pound again will be entered in the raw weight register 710 and a zero indicating minus sign of the raw weight will be entered in the weight sign register 715.
- 15 ~ext, the weight of 00.003 positive now recorded in the zero corr~ction register is algebraically subtracted from the weight -~0.001 in the raw weight register 710 and the `~ resulting difference -00.004 is recorded in the raw weight ., .
register 710.
Next, this weight in the raw weight register is com-pared with the 00.005 pound which is the limit of the automatic zero correcting arrangement and since the absolute value of this weight is less than the limit, the sequence of operations of the automatic zero correction are continued.
~ext, the weight of -00.004 pound is compared with the limit OG.002 pound and since it is more than the limit, the 12 is again recorded in the zero count register 713. The 12 is then read out of the register and since it is less than 16, one is added to the 12, so 13 is now stored in the register. Later the 13 causes the zero or 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off or maintained off if it is already off, as under.the assumed S conditions.
.- .
Th~ weisht of 00.003 pound in the zero correction register is now compar~d with the .6 pound limit of the zero correcting arrangement and since it is less, 00.001 is sub-tracted from the 00.003 weight recorded in the zero correcting register and the difference 00.002 rerecorded in the zero correcting register.
Next, the roundoff operation is performed and OO.OOS
added to the weight -00.004 in the raw weight register and the sum -00.001 rerecorded in the raw weight register. Then the four most significant digits 00.00 recorded in the output weight register so that they are availa~le for controlling the output weight indication. At this time the minus sign is not displayed.
During the next cycle of operation of the control unit lS substantially the same operations are repeated except that when zero correcting register 711 contents 00.002 is subtracted from the raw weight register of -00.001, the resulting differ-ence of -00.003 is recorded in the raw weight register 710 instead of -00.004. In addition 00.001 weight is subtracted ;
from the 00.002 in the zero correction register so the weight of 00.001 will be recorded in the zero correction register 711 instead of 00.002 as in the previous cycle of operation of the control unit 15.
During the next cycle of the control unit 15, the raw weight of -00.001 pound again is entered in the raw weight register 710. ~ext the weight of .001 pound in the zero correc-ting registe. is algebraically subtracted from the -00.001 pound in the raw weight register 710 with the result that -00.002 pound is restored in the raw weight register. The magnitude of this weight is first compared with the OO.OOS limit of the automatic correcting range. Since its magnitude is less, the - various steps of the automatic correction range are repeated.
; The magnitude of the weight of -00.002 pound in the raw weight register 710 is then compared with the limit of 00.002 pound , ~
and since it is equal to this value, the 13 now stored in the zero count resister 713 is read out and since thi~ count is less than 16 it is increased by one leaving a 14 now stored in this zero count register 713. This 14 is again later read out S and employed to maintain the l/4 graduation lamp o~f. There-after weight of 00.001 in the zero correcting register is com-pared with the .6 pound of the zero correcting range and since it is less, 00.001 pound is subtracted from the 00.001 pound in the zero correcting range register and a difference 00.000 recorded in this same register. Th~reafter the roundoff and transfer operations are performed as described above.
During the next cycle of operation of the control -~ unit lS, substantially the same operations as described above are performed except that the zero correcting register 711 now lS has all zeros recorded in it so that the -00.001 remains recorded in the raw weight register. During this cycle of ` operation, the zero count register 713 is read out and since - the 14 recorded in this register is less than 16, one is added to the contents of the register and the 15 again will be recorded in this register 713. This lS is later read out and employed to maintain the 1/4 graduation lamp turned off. In addition, 00.001 is subtracted from the zero correcting register leaving -00.001 stored in this register and a minus or zero stored in the zero sign correcting register.
^ 25 During the next cycle of operation of the control unit 15, the 00.001 minus stored in the zero correcting register will be algebraically subtracted from the -00.001 pound recorded in ; the raw weight register 710 leaving all zeros recorded in the ~ raw weight register. consequently, no subtraction is made from the -00.001 pound recorded in the zero correction register.
However, one is added to the zer~ count register. One is then added to the zero count register during each succeeding cycle of the control unit lS until the predetermined number, which .. . . .
106~290 i~ 16, i.e. all zeros, in an exemplary embodiment, i5 stored in this registcr. ~hen the 1~, or all zeros is later read out of the zero count register, the control unit lS will turn on the 1/4 graduation lamp. Thereafter the contents of the various registers remains substantially as described until another article is weighed on the scale. During this time the display will correctly indicate 00.00. In addition, when the next object is weighed the zero wander of -00.001 will be corrected so the correct weight of the object will be displayed.
Assume now that for some reason after a given weighing - operation the output from the scale, load cell, sensor and analog-to-digital converter returns to 00.100 pound after the weight of 8 pounds has been subtracted as described a~ove.
Consequently, the weight of 00.100 pound will be entered in the raw weight register 710. In addition, a "1" representing a plus weight on the scale will be entered in the weight sign register 715.
- Next, the weight in the zero correction register 711, assuming this weight to be 00.003 pound, will be subtracted from the weight in the raw weight register 710 and the diffsrence 00.097 pound restored in the raw weight register. ~ext, the weight of 00.097 pound now recorded in the raw weight register 710 is compared with the automatic zero correction limit of 00.005 pound. Since the weight in the raw weight register 710 is greater than 00.005 pound, the automatic zero correcting operations are not performed and 13 is recorded in the zero count register, which later causes the 1/4 graduation lamp to be turned off, or maintained off if it had previously been turned off-Next, the weight in the raw weight register 710 is rounded off by adding 00.005 pou~d to the 00.097 pound recorded in this register. The sum of 00.102 pound is then rerecorded in the raw weigh~ register and the four most significant digits ~062290 00.10 are entered in the output register 712 where it is avail-able for actuat_ng the output indication of the scale.
The info~nation recorded in the various registers then remains substantially as described for the remainder of this cycle of operation of the control unit 15.
During each of the succeeding cycles of the control unit 15, the operations of the equipment relative to the raw weight register 710, the weight sign register 715, the zero correction register 711, the zero correction sign register 714 and the zero count register 7~3 and the weight output register 712 are substantially as described a~ove.
However, the attendant or operator of the scale upon noting the 00.10 weight indicated on the output of the scale will be informed that the scale is not in condition ~or another 15 weighing operation. At this time the operator may operate the zero expand range switch 176 to cause the scale to be corrected so that it will be in condition to accurately weigh the next object placed upon the pan or platter.
On the next cycle of operation of the control unit 15, after the zero capture range expand switch 176 or button has been operated, the weight of 00.100 pound will be entered in the r~w weight register 710. In addition, a "1" representing a plus sign is entered in the weight sign register 715. Also at this time 00.003 is stored in the zero correction register 711 and a "1" indicating a plus sign is stored in the zero correction sign register 714.
With the zero capture range expand switch operated and the 00.100 pound entered in the raw weight register 710, the central processing unit 186 will cause the weight entered in the raw weight register to be compared with 0.6 pound which is the assumed limit of the zero correction range.
. . .
_ 79 -,:
, Since under the assumed conditions the weight of 00.100 pound is less than 0.6 pound, the central processing unit -- 186 will cause a weight of 00.100 pound in the raw weight register 710 to be transferred to the zero correction reyister 711. As a result, 00.100 will now be stored in the zero correc-tion register 711 and then this weight is subtracted rom the wei~ht of the raw weight register 710 with the result that 00.000 will now be stored in the raw weight register 710.
` ~ext, the weight 00.000 in the raw weight register 710 ~ 10 is compared with the automatic zero correcting ranqe of .005 -; pound and since it is less than this limit, the zero correcting - operation will be performed ln the manner described above and the 00.00 indication transferred to the output weight register.
Also, the 1/4 graduation lamp will be turned on as described above.
So long as the expand button or switch 176 Is operated, -~ the above cycles of operation are repeated. When this button or switch is released, the weight stored in the zero correcting register 711 will correct the weight in the raw weight register 710 so that the corrected weight will be within the OO.OOS
: . .
-- pound correcting limits. Consequently, the above-described zero correcting operations are performed and the correct weight of an object, within the capacity of the scale, is correctly displayed.
Again, so long as the various factors affecting the zero indication of the scale do not vary more than 00.005 pound, the control arrangement 15 operates as described above and maintains the scale zero indication accurately at zero so that the scale will accurately weigh various objects or commodities ` 30 placed on its platter or pan. If the zero wander effects exceed --the 00.005 pound but do not exceed the 0.6 pound, then these effects can be corrected by the operator or attendant operating -,, : ':
' the zero captur~ range expand switch 176 ~nd the scalo is corrected as described ~hove.
The zero capture range exp~nd switch 176 together with the zero correcting operation or the scale may be employed as a self-correcting tare arrangement so long as the weight of the container is less than .6 pound and 50 long as variations from container to container, plus zero wander effects of the scale described abo~e, do not exceed OO.OOS pound.
Thus, assume that an empty container weighing 00.15 pound is placed on the scale. The scale will indicate this weight of OO.lS pound accurately providiny, of course, the automatic zero correcting arrangement was operating satisfac-torily and the 1/4 graduation lamp turned on prior to placing the container on the platter or pan of the scale. The operator 1~ or attendant will now op~rate the zero capture range expand switch 176 which will correct for the weight of the empty container and cause the scale to indicate a zero output. The attendant may then fill the container with a commodity and the scale will indicate accurately the corr~ct weight o the commodity only and compute its cost if it is so desired. ~pon removing the filled container from the scale, the scale will now indicate -OO.lS pound, assuming no zero wander e~ects. If the at~endant or operator now places another similar container on the scale of the same weight as the previous container, then the scale indication will return to zero and the automatic zero correcting operations performed providing, of course, that the variation in weight of the containers plus the variation in any zero wander effects are less than .005 pound. If, however, the - variations are greater than 00.005 pound, the 1/4 graduation lamp 30 will not light and the indication on the scale will not return to zero. The attendant can then re-operate the zero expand range ~switch and cause the scale to automatically correct thereafter for 2utomatic zero variations in the manner described herein.
If, o~ cours~, the weiyh~ oF the container or varia-tior~s in the ~/eight of the container and the zero wander exceed the predetermined operating limits described above, then the operator or attendant can use the usual tare buttons or Xeys S and operate the scale in accordance with prior art arrangements without employing the automatic zero correcting arrangement in accordance with the present invention.
As indicated above, the various limits of 00.002, 00.005 and 00.600 have been selected to illustrate the invention and may be changed as desired for various applications or uses of the scale.
ZER0 EXPA~D
,,.~
It is desirable to freq~ently check the operation of the automatic zero and the amount of correction that is being :.
~ introduced by the automatic zero in the manner described above.
. . ~
To enable the ~mount of automatic zero correction being applied ~ ~
. :s to be readily det~rmined, a zero expand switch 178 (Fig. 3) is :'?
- provided. When this switch is operated, it prevents the opera-tion of the automatic zero correction. In addition, on the next cycle of the control equipment 15, if this cycle is not one in which weight is read out of the analog-to-digital converter and entered into the raw weight register 710, then when the ; program advances to block 84, it will test this zero expand ~ 25 switch and, finding it operated or true, control is then advanced .. . . .
to block 85 which sets the interlock flag I~TF. In other words, it causes a "1" to be stored in the status register spac~ 736.
Later in this same cycle of operation of the control equipment 15, the control is advanced to block 57 as described above with , .j . ! ' the result that the interlock flag is tested. That is, the "1"
stored in the register space 736 is read out and since it is a the control i5 then advanced to block 58 which clears the .
,. ' ' ' .
, ~.,.. , ............. - . - .
.~ .. . . .
~062290 lntorlock ~l~g I~rP ~y ~nterin~ ~ ze~o in t~o regi~t~r ~p~c~ 736 and, ln a~ldition, ~at~ or entor~ a "ln ~n tho inltl~l~ze regl~ter space 727.
~h~rea~er, ~la control advanc~n to bloc~ S9 at w~llch S a ~1~ ie en~ered ln the ~torage ~pac~ 737. Th~ control th~n advanc~s to bloc~ 66 ov~r tho tran~er C5. Wlth th~e chnngen the ~bove cycl~a of operation o~ the control equipment 15 ar~
thQn repeatod untll a cycl~ ln whlch thQ raw weight 1~ read out o~ the analog-to-digital converter and stored ~n the raw weight registsr 710. During thl8 cycle the control ls advanc~d to block 100 in the manner descrlb~ herein and ~ince the zero expand swltch i~ now pressed or ~urned on, control ~ th~n advanced to ~lock 101 wh~re tha four lea~t ~gn~flcant ~igits ~n the raw weight registex 710 are read out and mo~ed to the weight out regi ter 7i2 where they later are caused to actuat~ the readout or di6play of thQ ~y~t~m whic~ will t~en indicate the four lea~t fiignlficant dlgits of the raw w~ight rea~ lnto tha raw wei~ht regi~t~r and thus lndicate the amount of correction being applled to tha ~y6tem by th~ automatic ~ero correction arrangem~nt.
`. 20 When the zero expand switch 178 i~ re~tored to normal, it ~B then nece~sary to initiali~e the ~ystem and to check the pric~ per poun~, the taro an~ finally to operate ~he lock switc~
- 179 indlc~ting that all the necessary ln~ormatlon i8 avallable for tho n~xt we~gh~ng oporation.
` 2~ . .
TIMED TARE ~NTRY
ach ti~e tho pro~ram 1~ tran~ferred to ~loc~ 144 the control apparatu~ te~ts tho ~no taro~ ~witch 171 (Flg. 3) to ~stermln~ w~eth0r or not thi- ~witch is.opQrat2d. If the ~wltch 171 ~ op~rated, th~ th~ program B~t8 the interlock flag I~TF and tran~er~ to block 14S whlch CAU~-8 tho taro regl~ter 720 to b~ ~loarod o~ ro~tor~d to ~oro an~ th~n tho program - 83 _ ;
,. .
- ' - ~ -~ 062Z90 advances to block 55 via transfer B10 and the cycle of operation is completed as described above.
If the "no tare" switch 171 is not pushed or operated as previously asqumed, then the control is advanced to block 146 where all of the other tare keys are tested to determine if any of them are operated. If none are operated the sequence trans-fers to block 55 and the cycle completed as described above.
If some one of these keys is operated, for example the tare key 0.1 pound, then the control is advanced to block 147 instead of to block 55 via transfer B10 as described above. Block 147 determines whether or not 2.6 seconds has elapsed since another tare button was pushed. It is assumed that this is the first tare button to be pushed, then 2.6 seconds will have elapsed ~ -since a previous tare button is pushed. Consequently, the tare timer spaces 728 will have all zeros sto~ed in them so the program ~; is advanced to block 148 where tare register 720 is cleaxed or returned to zero. Thereafter the control is advanced to block 149 where the 0.1 pound is entered in the tare register 720 and the interlock flag is set by entering one in storage space 736.
Thereafter the program is advanced to block 55 via transfer B10 and the cycle of operation continued in the manner described above.
In addition to entering the tare weight in the tare register space 720, the tare timer is set into operation as stated in block 149. This is accomplished by entering 13 in ;
this tare timer space 728. Then on each of the cycles during which a weight is transferred from the analog-to-digital con-verter to the raw weight register 710, one is subtracted from ~; the number stored in the tare timer 728 as indicated in blocks 96, 97 and 97A as described above. After 13 of such cycles, 30 2.6 seconds have elapsed.
.
., .
- 84 _ : - - . . .
.. . . .
If another one of the tare keys is operated in this 2.6 second period, then the cont~ol is transferred from block 147 directly to block 149 where the value of the second operated tare key is entered in the tare storage spaces 720. Also, the S tare timer is reset or recycled by again entering 13 in 'che tare timer storage spaces 728. Thus for example if the tare key .05 is actuated, then this figure will be entered in the tare register 720 with the result that the register now has entered `. in it a tare weight of .15 pound. I'hereafter the interlock and initializing conditions must be checked and the lock switch 179 must be operat:ed in order to condition the system for weighing operations involving subtracting tare weights as described herein.
If, however, the second key is operated 2.6 seconds after the previous key then the next. time the control sequence : advances to block 147 in the manner described above, the sequence transfers to block 148 which clears the tare storage areas and . then to block 149 so that the weight represented by only the last tare key operated is stored in the tare storase areas 720.
, :
. ~ .
`~ OUTPUT CO~ITROL
When a package has been placed on the scale platter and weighed, ard the weight corrected after a no motion condition has been established as described herein, control will be trans- -ferred to block 26 via transfer CS to block 66 and then to block 26. The "MOT~F" flag is cleared at this time so blocX 26 . will transfer control to block 27. Block 27 interrogates the .. printer mode switch 172 (Fig. 3) and branches around block 28 to block 29 if the system is in either the demand or the . ..
continuous mode., Since WQ are assuming single mode, block 27 -:
`. transfers control to block 28.
. - 85 _ .
- ~
Block 28 int~rro~ates the status storage space 729 status register 0001. This signal is true if, during the input operations a motion det~ctor inhibit switch in the printer i5 on. This switch is provided so that systems which are in vibratory installations (heavy machinery causing floor vibra-tions or overhead fans, for example) can have the switch turned on to guarantee only one label per weight application. If the switch is "on", control is transferred to block 29.
Block 29 examines the status of a reweigh storage space 740 of status register 0001. A one or true of this reweigh signal is an indication that the previous printer opera-tion was aborted due to a set-up malfunction. If there was a malfunction, block 29 transfers control to block 31 via A7 (this allows another print to be initiated for the same package to allow the printer to rectify the error). If there is no reweigh, block 29 trans~ers control to block 30. Block 30 interrogates the status of storage space 730 of status register 0001. A true or one in this location indicates that a print has occurred and the printed label has not been removed. If this condition exists, block 30 'ransfers control to block 25 via connector Al.
Thus no print occurs during this motion - no motion sequence.
(Motion Detector Inhibit) If a zero is stored in the print storage space in the status register 0001, block 30 transfers data to block 31 and, providing other conditions are fulfilled, a label is printed.
Blocks 28 through 30 compr~:se a system whereby only one label per weight application is allowed, unless the printer - malfunctions, in which case a subsequent motion - no motion cycle will be recognized.
If the motion detector inhibit switch is not on, block 28 transfers control to block 31 directly; thus allowing a new printer cycle for each motion - no motion detected.
- . .
Blocks 31 through 33 allow the printing of a label with the appli~d weight being below a preselected minimum value (in this ex~nple, ~10 pound). The need of the minimum value inhibit is that if none were present, the system would be S printing labels with zero weight on the platter, an undesirable condition. The ability to print labels with applied weights below the predetermlned value is necessary for tests.
If the unit price is set to zero and the no tare key . is depressed, an output print signal is generated when a motion - no motion cycle occurs, regardless of the applie~ weight.
Bloc~ 31 interroga-tes the "no tare" switch 171 for a no tare signal. If this condition exists, control is transferred to bloc~ 32 which interrogates S~7-.OP through SW-.PO (Fig. 7).
If the price is zero as indicated by SW-.OP through SW-.PO, all being zero, control is transferred to block 33 which causes a "1" to be stored in the status storage space 731 of status ~ register 0011 and the printer will generate a label. Block 33 -' then transfers control to block ~5 via Al.
If either block 31 or block 32 are not true, control is transferred to block 34. Block 34 interrogates the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7). If the weight is less than 0.1 -pound, control is returned to block 25 via Al. If the net weight is greater than 0.1 pound, control is trans~erred to block 35.
3 25 Block 35 interrogates set bit space 737 in status register 0011. If set is true (an indication that interlock-~re not satisfied) control is returned to block 25 ~ia Al.
` If set is false, control is transferred to block 36.
In the weight processing description, the method of processing the raw weight information into net weight output information was described. At that time, it was shown that the value in the output weight register is the magnitude only of the weight. Th~s the weight could be greater than 0.l-pound but .~ - .
~.,., . . : ~ . ., be negative, in which ca~e no print should occur. Block 36 interro~ates the weig~Lt sign stora~e space 715 in status register 0011 of Fig. 7. If the signal is false (indicating a minus weight) control is returned to block 25. If the signal S is true, the system control transfers to block 37.
Block 37 interrogates the level of the signal in storage space 725 in status register 0011 (Fig. 7). If this signal is true (an indication that the applied weight exceeds the capacity of the weight converter) system control returns to bloc~ 25 via Al. If the scale weighing capacity is not exceeded, control transfers to block 38.
Block 38 generates an output pulse similar to bloc~ 33.
Control is then transferred to block 25 via transfer Al.
As previously described, block 134 is activated by ~ :
transfer from block 130 via transfer Hl. Block 134 interrogates ;
the blank price signal from the printer into the input of ROM
- 191 (see Fig. 4A). If this signal is off, bloc~ 134 bypasses block 135 and transfers control to block 136 via transfer H3.
If the signaI is on, blocX 134 advances control to block 135.
Block 135 causes all bits of all words in the output price ~ register 739 (Fig. 7) to be changed to "l's" (binary 15 causes ,~ blanks in the printer). Con~rol is then transferred to block 136.
BlocX 136 interrogates the blank weight signal from s 25 the printer into the input of ROM 191 (see Fig. 4A). When - this signal is off, control is transferred to block 139. When , on, control is transferred to block 137. When the system is `~ operated in the price by count mode, the normal function is to l blank the weight field on the printed ticXet. Thus, a blanX
- 30 weight of~ signal must cause the weight to be blanked and vice ;. . .
versa. ~he purpose of blocks 137 and 139 is to invert the ~` sense of the blanX weight switch when operating in price by count. - 88 -: - -, .
- .. ..
~ .
. .
~hu~, i ~lock 136 ellables block 137 and the system is in ~rice by count, block 138 is bypassed. If block 139 is activated i~stead, block 138 is not bypassed. However, sir.ce this discussion is limited to by weight operation, a true in block 136 ultimately transfers control to block 138. Block 138 causes all data in the output weight register 712 to be forced to a 15 (bl~) level. Control is then transferred to block 140. A false in block 136 bypasses block 138 and transfers control to block 140 through block 139 via connector H6.
Blocks 140 and 141 perform the same blanking function on the output value register 741 (Fig. 7) based on the level of the blank value signal into the ROM 191 (Fig. 4A) and then transfers control to block: 69 via transfer Dl.
~ote that the blanking switches are located in the printer but this is for convenience only; any location is acceptable.
Referring to Fig. 2D, the description of the service switch function ollows. Wit'n a system as complex as this, ; it is desirable to provide some trouble isolation capabilities to improve the serviceability.
APPARATUS FOR ISOLATING ERRORS I~ PRI~T~D RECOB~S
Since the most probable failure will be incorrect price, weight or value data on the printed label, a series of serviceman controlled inputs are provided. The most basic ones all~w the serviceman to select which of these three fields (price, weight or total value) he wishes to have displayed in the weight display area. In this manner, he can determine if the fault is in the scale, as indicated by faulty output infor-mation, or if the fault is in the printer, as indicated bycorrect output information but a faulty printed tic~et.
. , .
In Fig. 5, it has been shown how the weight information is sel~cted from the series of information being transmitted.
By supplying service switches whereby price or value information is placed in the weight output register 712, the digital display can be made to indicate price, weight or value as computed by the system and thus simplify fault isolation.
Referring to Fig. 2D, block 69 interrogates status register space 733 in status register 0001. During the input cycle, the condition of the price input to input 4 of data selector 199 (Fig. 4B) has been stored in this location. If block 69 determines that the display price signal is true, i.e. a one is stored in 733, control transfers to block 70 and -` the signal contents of the output price register 739 are trans- ~ -ferred to the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7). Thus the 5 15 digital display will indicate price and if there is a discrepancy ' between the setting of the price entry equipment and the dis-played value, the serviceman can observe this and proceed to . ,~
determine the cause of the fault, having localized it. Block 70 transfers control to block 73.
:i :
If block 69 determines that the display price signal is false, i.e. a zero is stored in 733, control is transferred to block 71. Block 71 interrogates status register space 734 - o status register 0001 which has been set up to coincide with the value input to input 4 of data selector 200 in Fig. 4B.
, 25 If the display value is true, block 71 transfers control to . . .
block 72. Block 72 transfers the contents of the output value register 741 into the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7) and then transfers control to block 73. Thus the digital display indicates the computed value for fault isolation testing.
If block 71 senses that the display value signal is - false, block 72 is bypassed and control is transferred to block '- 73 via transfer D3.
. . .
. -- 90 --~'',~ , - .
` ` 1062290 Block 73 transf~rs a signal to wire 273 of Figs. 4A, 4B and 4C based on the signals in word 0 of status registers 0000 to either illuminate or extinguish the zero limit indicator (Fig. 4C). Control is then transferred to block 74. Block 74 S updates the signals in the 4 x 16 bit ~AM 228 of Fig. 4B (price, weight, value data and printer control) and also updates the signals out of quad bistable latches 248 of Fig. 4C. Control then transfers to block 75.
Block 75 checks the muitiplied result register 742 10 of Fig. 7 and transfers control to block 76 if the answer obtained by multiplying the output price by the output weight is equal to or greater than $100.00. Block 76 trues space 732 in status register 0011. This signal is used elsewhere to indicate an out of range condition by causing the output value 15 register 741 to be set to zero by means not shown. Other uses of this overvalue signal could be to illuminate a warning light and to prevent a print pu?se. Block 75 transfers control to -block 77.
If the computed value is less than $100.00, block 75 20 transfers control directly to block 77 via transfer D7, by- ~-s passing block 76.
Block 77 determines if the capacity of the analog-to-digital weight converter 14 has been exceeded. If so, control is transferred to block 78 which stores a one in status register space 725 in status register 0011. This signal will be trans-ferred to the quad bistable latch 248 (Fig. 4C) to set outpur D
to illuminate the out of range indicator during the next per-formance of block 74.
Block 78 then transfers control to block 66 via transfer C5. If the weight converter capacity is not exceeded, block 77 transfers control to block 66 via connector C5. The system continues with the performance of block 66 and subsequent blocks as described previously.
. ~
~06ZZ9~
Turning llOW to Fig. 5, the digital weight display 22 is shown in detail. The weight display 22 includes four seven-segment indicators 301-304. The indicators are arranged in a row on a front panel on the apparatus 10 with the indicator 301 displaying the hundredths or 0.0W pound weight digit, the indicator 302 displaying the tenths or 0.W0 pound weight digit, the indicator 303 displaying the units or w.00 pound weight digit and the indicator 304 displaying the tens or W0.00 pounds weight digit. The indicators 301-304 may be of any conventional seven-segment design, such as of a type using incandescent lamps orof a type using light emitting diodes. Of course, other types of digital indicators may also be used. A multiplexing tech-nique is used for sequentially supplying data to the four indicators 301-304. Only one of the four indicators is actually energized at any given instance. However, the indicators 301-304 are energized at a sufficiently fast rate as to appear to be continuously energized.
The printer data on the buses 232 from the RAM 228 is supplied through a BCD-to-seven-segment decoder 305 and seven buffer amplifiers 306 in parallel to each of the four indicators 301-304. The printer address buses 231 are used for supplying address data for scanning the four weight display indicators 301-304. The address buses 231 are connected to a 2-line to
` If set is false, control is transferred to block 36.
In the weight processing description, the method of processing the raw weight information into net weight output information was described. At that time, it was shown that the value in the output weight register is the magnitude only of the weight. Th~s the weight could be greater than 0.l-pound but .~ - .
~.,., . . : ~ . ., be negative, in which ca~e no print should occur. Block 36 interro~ates the weig~Lt sign stora~e space 715 in status register 0011 of Fig. 7. If the signal is false (indicating a minus weight) control is returned to block 25. If the signal S is true, the system control transfers to block 37.
Block 37 interrogates the level of the signal in storage space 725 in status register 0011 (Fig. 7). If this signal is true (an indication that the applied weight exceeds the capacity of the weight converter) system control returns to bloc~ 25 via Al. If the scale weighing capacity is not exceeded, control transfers to block 38.
Block 38 generates an output pulse similar to bloc~ 33.
Control is then transferred to block 25 via transfer Al.
As previously described, block 134 is activated by ~ :
transfer from block 130 via transfer Hl. Block 134 interrogates ;
the blank price signal from the printer into the input of ROM
- 191 (see Fig. 4A). If this signal is off, bloc~ 134 bypasses block 135 and transfers control to block 136 via transfer H3.
If the signaI is on, blocX 134 advances control to block 135.
Block 135 causes all bits of all words in the output price ~ register 739 (Fig. 7) to be changed to "l's" (binary 15 causes ,~ blanks in the printer). Con~rol is then transferred to block 136.
BlocX 136 interrogates the blank weight signal from s 25 the printer into the input of ROM 191 (see Fig. 4A). When - this signal is off, control is transferred to block 139. When , on, control is transferred to block 137. When the system is `~ operated in the price by count mode, the normal function is to l blank the weight field on the printed ticXet. Thus, a blanX
- 30 weight of~ signal must cause the weight to be blanked and vice ;. . .
versa. ~he purpose of blocks 137 and 139 is to invert the ~` sense of the blanX weight switch when operating in price by count. - 88 -: - -, .
- .. ..
~ .
. .
~hu~, i ~lock 136 ellables block 137 and the system is in ~rice by count, block 138 is bypassed. If block 139 is activated i~stead, block 138 is not bypassed. However, sir.ce this discussion is limited to by weight operation, a true in block 136 ultimately transfers control to block 138. Block 138 causes all data in the output weight register 712 to be forced to a 15 (bl~) level. Control is then transferred to block 140. A false in block 136 bypasses block 138 and transfers control to block 140 through block 139 via connector H6.
Blocks 140 and 141 perform the same blanking function on the output value register 741 (Fig. 7) based on the level of the blank value signal into the ROM 191 (Fig. 4A) and then transfers control to block: 69 via transfer Dl.
~ote that the blanking switches are located in the printer but this is for convenience only; any location is acceptable.
Referring to Fig. 2D, the description of the service switch function ollows. Wit'n a system as complex as this, ; it is desirable to provide some trouble isolation capabilities to improve the serviceability.
APPARATUS FOR ISOLATING ERRORS I~ PRI~T~D RECOB~S
Since the most probable failure will be incorrect price, weight or value data on the printed label, a series of serviceman controlled inputs are provided. The most basic ones all~w the serviceman to select which of these three fields (price, weight or total value) he wishes to have displayed in the weight display area. In this manner, he can determine if the fault is in the scale, as indicated by faulty output infor-mation, or if the fault is in the printer, as indicated bycorrect output information but a faulty printed tic~et.
. , .
In Fig. 5, it has been shown how the weight information is sel~cted from the series of information being transmitted.
By supplying service switches whereby price or value information is placed in the weight output register 712, the digital display can be made to indicate price, weight or value as computed by the system and thus simplify fault isolation.
Referring to Fig. 2D, block 69 interrogates status register space 733 in status register 0001. During the input cycle, the condition of the price input to input 4 of data selector 199 (Fig. 4B) has been stored in this location. If block 69 determines that the display price signal is true, i.e. a one is stored in 733, control transfers to block 70 and -` the signal contents of the output price register 739 are trans- ~ -ferred to the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7). Thus the 5 15 digital display will indicate price and if there is a discrepancy ' between the setting of the price entry equipment and the dis-played value, the serviceman can observe this and proceed to . ,~
determine the cause of the fault, having localized it. Block 70 transfers control to block 73.
:i :
If block 69 determines that the display price signal is false, i.e. a zero is stored in 733, control is transferred to block 71. Block 71 interrogates status register space 734 - o status register 0001 which has been set up to coincide with the value input to input 4 of data selector 200 in Fig. 4B.
, 25 If the display value is true, block 71 transfers control to . . .
block 72. Block 72 transfers the contents of the output value register 741 into the output weight register 712 (Fig. 7) and then transfers control to block 73. Thus the digital display indicates the computed value for fault isolation testing.
If block 71 senses that the display value signal is - false, block 72 is bypassed and control is transferred to block '- 73 via transfer D3.
. . .
. -- 90 --~'',~ , - .
` ` 1062290 Block 73 transf~rs a signal to wire 273 of Figs. 4A, 4B and 4C based on the signals in word 0 of status registers 0000 to either illuminate or extinguish the zero limit indicator (Fig. 4C). Control is then transferred to block 74. Block 74 S updates the signals in the 4 x 16 bit ~AM 228 of Fig. 4B (price, weight, value data and printer control) and also updates the signals out of quad bistable latches 248 of Fig. 4C. Control then transfers to block 75.
Block 75 checks the muitiplied result register 742 10 of Fig. 7 and transfers control to block 76 if the answer obtained by multiplying the output price by the output weight is equal to or greater than $100.00. Block 76 trues space 732 in status register 0011. This signal is used elsewhere to indicate an out of range condition by causing the output value 15 register 741 to be set to zero by means not shown. Other uses of this overvalue signal could be to illuminate a warning light and to prevent a print pu?se. Block 75 transfers control to -block 77.
If the computed value is less than $100.00, block 75 20 transfers control directly to block 77 via transfer D7, by- ~-s passing block 76.
Block 77 determines if the capacity of the analog-to-digital weight converter 14 has been exceeded. If so, control is transferred to block 78 which stores a one in status register space 725 in status register 0011. This signal will be trans-ferred to the quad bistable latch 248 (Fig. 4C) to set outpur D
to illuminate the out of range indicator during the next per-formance of block 74.
Block 78 then transfers control to block 66 via transfer C5. If the weight converter capacity is not exceeded, block 77 transfers control to block 66 via connector C5. The system continues with the performance of block 66 and subsequent blocks as described previously.
. ~
~06ZZ9~
Turning llOW to Fig. 5, the digital weight display 22 is shown in detail. The weight display 22 includes four seven-segment indicators 301-304. The indicators are arranged in a row on a front panel on the apparatus 10 with the indicator 301 displaying the hundredths or 0.0W pound weight digit, the indicator 302 displaying the tenths or 0.W0 pound weight digit, the indicator 303 displaying the units or w.00 pound weight digit and the indicator 304 displaying the tens or W0.00 pounds weight digit. The indicators 301-304 may be of any conventional seven-segment design, such as of a type using incandescent lamps orof a type using light emitting diodes. Of course, other types of digital indicators may also be used. A multiplexing tech-nique is used for sequentially supplying data to the four indicators 301-304. Only one of the four indicators is actually energized at any given instance. However, the indicators 301-304 are energized at a sufficiently fast rate as to appear to be continuously energized.
The printer data on the buses 232 from the RAM 228 is supplied through a BCD-to-seven-segment decoder 305 and seven buffer amplifiers 306 in parallel to each of the four indicators 301-304. The printer address buses 231 are used for supplying address data for scanning the four weight display indicators 301-304. The address buses 231 are connected to a 2-line to
4-line decoder 307. Two of the address buses 231 determine which 25 of the four indicators 301-304 is to be energized as weight data is received on the buses 232, while a third bus provides a strobe signal and a fourth of the buses provides an inhibit signal. The decoder 307 has four outputs which pass through four buffer amplifiers 308 to enable inputs on the four weight ^ 30 indicators 301-304. The output from the decoder 307 for . . .
energizing the units weight display 303 also applies a signal for energizing a decimal point on the units weight display 303.
'.' . . .
This output is applied through ~n inverter 309 to a buffer ampli-fier compri~ing a 'xan~istor 310 and a bias r~sistor 311. The output from the tr~nsistor 310 is connected through a resistor 312 to the decimal point input on the indicator 303. Thus, whenever the units indicator 303 is enabled, a decimal point is illuminated.
The apparatus 10 is designed for indicating weights ranging from -2 pounds up to +30 pounds. In the event that the measured weight goes below zero, a minus sign is formed by illuminating the center element in the tens indicator 304. This is accomplished by connecting the output from the decoder 307 which enables the indicator 304 to a ~A~ID gate 313. The minus ; sign signal on the line 254 from the logic unit 15 is applied to ;' a second input on the gate 313. The output of the ~A~D gate is 15 connected through a ~OR gate 314 and an inverter 315 to the input ~ on the buffer amplifiers 306 which energizes the segment in the - indicator 304 used to form the minus sign. The output ~rom the - BCD-to-seven-segment decoder 305 which normally energizes this segment of the weight indicators 301-304 is also connected through 20 the ~OR gate 314 to the buffer amplifiers 306. Thus, the middle segment in the other indicators 301-303 and in the indicator 304 when a positive weight is read is energized by the ou~put of the ; decoder 305 passing through the gate 314 and the inverter 315 to -the buffer amplifiers 306.
Although it is not normally exposed to an operator of the apparatus 10, a service switch 3l6 is shown with the weight display 22c The service switch 316 is a normally open switch having a momentary price contact 317 and a momentary value con-tact 318. When the service switch 316 is moved to a position wherein the price contact 317 is grounded, the line four input -, to the eight-line to one-line decoder 199 (Fig. 4B) is grounded.
. , - .
~ - 93 -When this cccur~, the ~trobe signai on the readout address buses 231 s chclng~d to ~trobe the weight indicatorQ 301~304 while price data is pr~sent on the printer data buses 232. Similarly, when the service switch 316 is moved to ground the value contact 318, the line four input of the eight-line to one-line decoder 200 (Fig. 4B) is grounded. When this occurs, the strobe signal to the decoder 307 is synchronized with the computed value data - on the printer data buses 232 causing the indicators 301-304 to display the computed value. ~s previously indicated, this permits maintenance personnel to isolate an error in a printed label between the printex 21 and the logic unit 15. If the weight `indicators 301-304 display a correct price per unit weight or a correct value for an article, then an error in the printed label will be isolated to the printer 21. However, if the indicators 301-304 display the same error present on the printed label, then the error ls isolated to either the logic unit 15 or to one of the data inputs to the logic unit 15.
., , The printer 21 may be of any conventional design suitable for use with weighing and price computins apparatus.
One typical printer design is shown in United States Patent 3,163,247 which issued on December 29, 1964 to R. E. Bell et al.
. .
~owever, a preferred arrangement for the printer 21 is shown - diagrammatically in the block diagram of Fig. 6. As previously indicated, the printer 21 includes apparatus for automatically entering price data into the logic unit 15. The auto-price ::
apparatus includes an auto-price reader 325 which includes an optical reader for reading three digits of price data from a commodity plate. The commodity plate also includes raised tvpe for printing on the labels the name of the commodity. The three binary coded decimal price digits from the auto-price reader 325 are applied through a data selector 326 to the four auto-price data lines 210-213 which are connected to tha line one inputs of the 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201 of Fig. 4B. The data _ 94 _ selector 326 may al~o include apparatus such as exclusive OR
gates connected for generating an auto-price parity hit on an output 224 connected to the line six input to the decoder 200.
An alternate and preferred method for producing an auto-price parity bit is to store the parity information directly on the commodity plate for reading by the auto-price reader 325. The actual auto~price digit supplied from the reader 325 through the data selector 326 to the lines 210-213 is determined by signals on two auto-price address selection lines 327 and 328 (from Fig.
4C). Signals on the address selection lines 327 and 328 are received from the address buses 206 ~rom the ROM 190 in the control unit 15. Thus, when a commodity plate is inserted within the auto-price reader 325, the address selector 326 applies one digit at a time of the price per pound data on the lines 210-213 15 depending upon an address selection signal received on the lines 327 and 328.
The three digits of the price per unit weight for an article being la~eled, the four weight digits and the four value digits are printed on the label by means of print wheels 329.
Each of the print wheels 329 is connected through a solenoid actuated clutch 330 to a common drive shaft. Outputs 240' from ~ the printer data address amplifiers 240 (Fig. 4B) are applied to - a 4-line to 16-line decoder 331. Eleven of the output lines from the decoder 331 are used for selecting the eleven clutch solenoids 330 which selectively engage the eleven print wheels 329 with the drive shaft. The outputs from the decoder 331 are connected through solenoid driver amplifiers 332 which power the clutch ; solenoids 330. m us, when address data is received on the lines 240', one of the solenoid clutches 330 is addressed for engaging the associated print wheel 329 with the drive shaft.
~ .
- 95 _ ~ .
- .
,. .
? -Each print wh~el 329 is provided with a co~nutator 333 which rotates with and indicates the position of the print wheel.
The commu~ators 333 are connected to four 16-line to l-line decoders 334. The decoders 334 have a BCD -output corre~sponding S to the di~it to which a~ addressed print wheel is positioned.
Address information is supplied to the decoders 334 from the data address lines 240'. The BCD output from the decoders 334 is applied to one input of a four bit comparator or coincidence circuit 335. The printer data on the buses 232 from the RAM 228 (Fig. 4B) in the control unit 15 is applied to a second input of the comparators 335. When an addressed print wheel 329 is - driven to a desired number, the output of the decoders 334 will correspond to the printer data on the buses 232 and the compara-tors 335 will apply a coincidence signal to control logic 336.
When coincidence occurs, power is removed from the energized clutch solenoid 330.
` The printer data on the buses 232 is also applied to a parity generator 337 which generates a parity bit in a conven-tional manner, such as with three exclusive OR gates. The parity bit from the generator 337 is applied to a comparator 33~, which may also be an exclusive OR gate, where it is compared with the printer data parity bit from the printer data parity generator comprising the exclusive OR gates 233-235 (Fig. 4B) in the control unit 15. If there is no parity check, the control logic 336 applies a REWEIGH signal on the line 265 for recycling the control unit 15. The control logic 336 also includes various switches and mechanical sensors as well as inputs from and outputs to the control unit lS. The printer clock input is obtained from the inverter 244 and the 5ET input on line 263 from an inverter 262. Outputs from the control logic 336 include the REWEIGH line 265, the take label line 267, the print stored line 260, the add labels line 269, a motion detector inhibit line connected to the line five input to the decoder 198 in the ~ontrol ` , -: .
unit 15, the door open interlock connected to the line four input to the decoder 201, a printer readout on/off output connected to the NAND gate 250 (Fig. 4C) and the blank weiyht, blank value and blank price signals to the ROM 191. -The manner in which these outputs are generated is known in the art and will not be covered in further detail.
The above-described features of the exemplary embodi-; ment permit the apparatus 10 to weigh axticles, compute an article value and print an article label with a speed and accuracy heretofore not possible. Furthermore, the accuracy ; of the apparatus 10 is maintained over a long period of time, despite changes in component parameters caused by ageing and changes in temperature.
In the exemplary embodiment of the apparatus 10 des-cribed above, weight measurements were in pounds and value was computed in dollars. It will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that the apparatus 10 may be readily adapted for other weight units, such as kilograms, and to other monetary units. The number of weight, price per unit weight and computed value digits also may be changed to meet any requirements for j the apparatus 10. Also, changes may be readily made in the t~ degree or band of motion to which the motion detector is respon-` sive and in the operating range and increments of the automatic zeroing circuit.
The apparatus 10 has been described as generating a predetermined number of significant weight digits, e.g., for significant weight digits for weights of from 0.01 pound up to ~5 30.00 pounds. However, any other number of digits may be generated and employed and any other weight and price limits employed as may be necessary or desirable. These weight digits are displayed, printed on labels and used in computing values.
In addition, at least one more least significant digit is generated for use in automatically and manually zeroing the ;~ - 97 -~`
- - - - . . - .
10~;2Z90 apparatu~ 10 ~nd in motion detection. Althouyh such additional least significant dlgit has been described as a decimal, it will be apparent that it may be of other fractional units such as on~-third or one-fifth of the least significant one of the predetermined number of significant weight digits. If an odd fractional increment, such as one-third, i9 generated, then the scale zero will be centered and the automatic zero correction factor will generally not change except for compensating for any slow drift in the zero.
In describing the zero expansion circuitry, it has been stated that the additional least significant weight digit is stored in the weight output memory during actuation of the zero expand switch 178 so that this digit will appear on the weight display 22. In an alternative embodiment, a separate indicator may be provided for displaying the additional least significant weight digit. This indicator will normally be ` blanked and will be energized only when the zero expand switch 178 is actuated. It will be appreciated that various other changes may also be made in the above-described inventions ` 20 without departing from the spirit and the scope of the following -claims.
: . .
.
. .
.
:
A P P E N D I X
SYMBOL TABL
ACLRl 001201 B4 001123 MoV5 000404 ADD 000485 CALC 000514 Ml 000964 Al 000527 Cl 000074 M3 000979 All 000780 C12 000229 M6 000993 A12L~ 000512 C14 000214 ~MCHK 000014 A13 000927 C15 000215 NOT~R 001151 A18 000953 C3 000129 OUTl 000298 Al9 001045 C4 000133 OUT2 000308 A20 001059 C6 000150 PCHKl 000030 A28 001053 ENTAT 001156 RDI~P 001206 A3 000547 EWSG~ 000422 RETN 000390 A4 001072 I~TCK 000067 RNDOF 000362 A5 000543 I~TLK 000535 ROFFl 000366 A7 000798` LDTAP~ 001081 SUB 000448 A7A 000813 LTCHl 000353 . SUBAZ 000375 A8 000705 MCHKl 000008 SUBTR 000432 A8A 000739 MI~MI 000482 SUBl` 000453 BL~K 001187 MOT~ 000656 TARl 001088 BL~Kl 001190 MOVA 000406 TAR2 001098 Bl 000637 MOVB 000413 TIMCK 001138 .
:
. ~ .
. ~., .
.
_ 99 _ .
',- ` .
PROGRAM
0000 00040 MC}IK, FIM P4 110008 /INIT CONSTANT POINTERS
0008 00082 MCHKl, JMS CALC
~ 00002 :0010 00043 SRC PS
:0011 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIONF
0012 00020 JCN AZMCHKl /LOOP UNTIL MOTION
0014 00082 NMCHK, JMS CALC
:0020 00047 SRC P7 `~0024 00018 JCN CNPCHKl /JMP IF DEM OR COWT
i 00030 .0026 00237 RDl :~0028 00026 . JCN CZPCHK /JMP IF NOT TRUE
0030 00238 PCHKl, RD2 .0031 00246 RAR - /PUT REWEIGH IN C
::0032 00018 ~ JCN CNPCHK /JMP IF HAVE REWEIGH
~ 00037 :
'~0034 00246 RAR /PUT PRINT STORED IN C
:50035 00018 JCN CNMCHK /DO NOT PRINT IF TRUE
'~ 00000 0037 00068 PCHK, JUN PCHK3 /CHK FOR WO TARE BUTTON
'' 00190 -~0039 00034 FIM Pl11101B /SELECT DIGIT FOR
:~ 00029 :;0041 00035 SRC Pl /.1 LB CHK
~0042 00209 LDM
:0043 00224 WRM
0044 00034 FIM Pl11011B
. 00027 0046 00036 . FIM P2 0 0048 00081 JMS EWSGN /SUB .1 LB FROM WGT
0050 00028 JCN AWMCHK /JMP IF nGT LT .1 LB
0053 00236 RD0 /RD SET, MINUS, OVERCAP
i, 00000 .
'' :' ~ ., ' -' :' : .
:: : , - ::
0058 00250 STC ~SET PRINT
0059 00245 RA~
0061 00081 ~S OUTPT /OUTPUT TO BUFFER
0063 00043 PCHK2, SRC P5 0064 00240 CLB /CLR PR~NT
:0067 00034 INTCX, FIM Pl 100000B
0069 00032 FIM P0 lloolooB /R0=10 CNTR, Rl=4 :0072 00240 CLB /LOAD A 0000 007.3 00225 WMP /OOOOSELECTS ROTARY SW INP
0074 00163 Cl, LD R3 /LOAD SWITC~l POINTER0075 00047 SRC P7 :
. 0078 00234 RDR
, 0079 00035 SRC Pl /WRITE SW INP TO MEM REG 2 `: 0080 00224 WRM
0082 00112 ISZ R0 Cl /LOOP 10 TIMES
` .0084 00084 JMS RDINP /READ DISCRETE INPUTS
~! 00182 ~. 0086 00239 RD3 . /READ STARTS AT ADD. 4 `'` 0087 00228 . WR0 i 0088 00084 JMS RDINP
, 0090 00239 RD3 . 0091 00229 WRl 0092 00084 JMS:. RDINP
~' 00182 ~' 00182 0098 00237 RDl ~0099 00245 RAL
:~0100 00245 RAL /PUT PRICE RITE/MAN I~ C
,'0101 00047 SRC P7 0102 00237 RDl /READ BY CNT
0103 00028 JCN AN C6+2 /JMP IF IN BY CNT
.0108 00020 JCN AZ C5 /JMP IF MODE CHANGED
:~ 00186 0110 00032 FIM P0 llooooooB
. 00192 ~0112 00034 FIM Pl 100000B
i 00032 :0114 00045 C2, SRC P6 ;0117 00036 FIM P2 12 /R4=1 BITS CNTR,R5=~ CNTR
, ' , ' :
' , ~, , - -106?Z9O
0119 00161 LD Rl /LOAD PIR DIG ADD. POINTER
0125 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT MEM CIIAR
0127 00097 INC Rl /INC DIG ADD. PNTR
0128 00099 INC R3 /INC MEM CE~R PNTR
: 0129 00246 C3,RAR /ROTATE BITS T0 CNT ONES
: 0130 00026 JCN CZ C4 /SKIP INC INST IF BIT 0 .: 0132 00100 INC R4 : .0133 00117 C4,ISZ R5 C3 /DO 4 TIMES
:: 0136 00045 SRC P6 0137 00225 WMP /0110 SELE~CTS P/R PARITY
~ 0144 00018 JCN CN C10 /JMP IF NOT
.? 00188 ~ 0146 00112 ISZ R0 C2 /LOOP 4 TIMES
., 00114 , 0148 00064 ' JUN C9 .
~ 0150 00028 C6,JCN AN C5 /JMP IF MODE E~S CH~NGED
' 00186 .'0152 00034 FIM Pl loooooB /Pl POINTS TO NEW P/P
~ 00032 0154 00036 FIM P2 llllooB /P2 POINTS TO OLD P/P
~ 00060 ::.~0156 00241 C7,CLC /C MUST BE CLR
0157 00035 SRC Pl .;0158 00233 RDM /READ NEW CE~AR
0159 00037 . SRC P2 ~ 00171 `:0163 00034 FIM Pl loooooB /CE~ANG~D, RESET
0165 00036 FIM P2 llllooB /POINTERS
: 00060 ~: 00162 ~ 00188 ;0171 00099 C8,INC R3 /INC DIG POINTER
.0174 00041 C9,SRC P4 /SELECT OLD TARE ADD.
.-0175 00236 RDO
`:`0176 00245 RAL /PUT DOOR OPEN IN C
. 0177 00018 JCN CN C10 /JMP IF DOOR OPEN
.. .
., :~
. , .
.
, ~: . ` : ' .: :
- :` .:: ` ` ': `: `-Q~180 00234 RDR
001~
0184 0006~ JUN C13 0186 00247 C5, TCC
0188 00047 C10, SRC P7 0191 00084 C13, JMS TAR2 . 00074 "0193 00047 SRC P7 /SELECT PRINT MODE SW
`:0194 00241 CLC
`:`0196 00020 JCN AZ C15+1 ~0198 00246 RAR
:0200 00246 RAR /NOW ACC=0 IF BY WGT
0201 00229 WRl /WRITE TO BY CNT
:0203 00246 RAR . /C=l MEANS MODE 2 ~0204 00043 SRC P5 0205 00026 JCN CZ C14 ~ PIF MODE 1 0207 00246 RAR /C=l IF CONT
. 00215 -.0211 00246 RAR /RAR IF DEM TO SET DEM
~0212 00064 JUN C15 `. 00215 .0214 00240 C14,~ CLB
~'.0215 00230 C15, WR2 /UPDATE PRINT MODE OUT
0218 00245 RAL /PUT rNTF IN C
~ 00229 -~0221 00209 LDM
0222 00230 WR2 /CLR INTF, SET INITF
0223 00043 C21, SRC P5 ~0224 00236 RD0 :0225 00246 RAR
`0227 00064 JUN C22 ` 0229 00238 C12, RD2 ~0230 00246 RAR /PUT INITF IN C
.~ 0231 00026 JCN CZ C20 /JMP IF NOT SET
.0234 00233 RDM
0235 00246 RAR /C=l IF MODE 2 . 00252 .
-:
0240 00246 ~R /PUT LOCK SW IN C
`41 00026 JCN CZ C20 /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
0246 00043 S~C P5 0250 00245 C22, RAL
0252 00192 C20,BBL 0 0256 00041 OUTPT, SRC P4 0261 00246 R~R /PUT DISPLY PRICE IN C
0262 00026 JC~ CZ OUTA /JMP.IF NOT SET
0264 00034 FIM Pl 110000B /SOURCE IS PRICE
0266 00065 JU~ OUTB
0268 00246 OUTA, RAR /PUT DISPLY VALUE IN C
0269 00026 JCN CZ OUTC /JMP IF ~OT SET
0271 00034 FIM Pl 111000B /SOURCE IS VALUE
0273 00081 OUTB, JMS MOV4 /MOVE SOURCE TO DEST
0275 00015 OUTC, ` SRC P6 0276 00237 RDl /RD 1/4 GRAD LAMP
0277 00034 ` FIM Pl 1000000B
0279 00035 SRC Pl 0283 00043 SRC P5 /OUTPUT ALL DATA TO BU~EER
0284 00034 FIM Pl 110000B /MEM AND LATCH
0295 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT RAM0, ROM0 0298 00234 OUTl, RDR
0301 00026 JC~ CZ OUTl , ' .
.
:. .
,, 0303 00041 SRC P4 /SELECT ROMl ~304 00209 LDM 1 /LOAD A 0001 ~05 00226 WRR /0001 TKES CONTROL F BUF
0308 00047 OUT2, SRC P7 /SELECT ROM2 0309 00163 LD R3 /LOAD BUF ADD.
0311 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OUTPUT CHAR
0313 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT ~AM0 0315 00041 SRC P4 /SELE~T ROMl 0320 00099 INC R3 /INC CHAR POI~TER
0324 00163 LD R3 /POI~T BUF ADD. 13 0327 00238 RD2 /READ ~Rr~T CO~TROL WRD
0336 00226 WRR /RELEASE 8UFFER CONTROh 0341 00241 CLC /CLR MEM. UPDATE REQ
0345 00236 LATCH, RD0 /SRC P5 LAST GIVE~
0347 00018 JC~ CN LTcHl/IF SET FORGET
0350 00237 RDl 0353 00246 LTCHl, RAR /SET OVERCAP IF
0362 00039 RNDOF, SRC P3 /SUBROUTINE FOR WGT ROU~DOFF ~-. .
- 105 - `
~ ~ . . .
~364 00235 ADM /C WILL SET IF LSD GE 5 365 00103 INC ~7 ~366 00039 ROFFl, SRC P3 0372 00018 . JCN C~ ROFFl /XEEP GOING UNTIL C O
0375 00034 SUBAZ, FIM Pl 11 /ROUTINE TO SUB AUTO ZERO
,.00011 0383 002~5 RAL
0384 00228 WR0 /PUT AZ SIGN r~
~00166 0389 00193 BBL 1 /IF ~EG LOAD 1 0390 00192 RETN, BBL 0 0391 00176 SWSGN, XCH R0 /ROUTINE TO SET WGT SIG~
0395 00245 RAL /PUT WGT SIGN I~ C
0396 00176 XCH R0. /PUT SUB SIGN BACK IN
~--0397 00246 RAR /PUT SUB SIGN I~ C
-0398 00176 . XCH R0 /RECOVER STATUS WORD
;~0399 00246 RAR
0400 00246 RAR ~PUT UPDATED SIGN IN PLACE
~:0401 00228 WR0 `0402 00036 FIM P2 0 -: 00000 ~0404 00032 MoV5, FIM P0 10111011B /R0=5CNTR, Rl-5CNTR
`0406 00035 MOVA, SRC Pl :0408 00037 SRC P2 ~ 00157 ~0412 00097 r~c Rl /INC ZEROES CNTR
:0413 00099 MO~B, I~C R3 0414 00101 r~c R5 00150 ' :.`0417 00192 BBL 0 `~.0418 00032 MOV4, FIM P0 11001100B /R0=4 CNTR, Rl=4 CNTR
' 00204 -`~00150 `.~ Q422 00036 EWSG~, FIM P2 0 /ROUTINE TO E~TER WGT
., :
`
` ' ' ' : .. .
~424 00043 SRC P5 /SIGN A~ID T~EN SU~, ~26 00245 RAL
u427 00245 P~L /PUT WGT SIGN IN C
û429 00236 RD0 043û 00245 RAL
0431 û0228 WRû /ENTER SIGN TO MI~UEND
/ROUTINE TO SUB NUM AT Pl FROM NUM AT P2 . /AND LACE RESULT AT P3. ALL REGS ARE USED
û432 00038 SUBTR, FIM P3 10000B /DEST POINTER
û434 00045 SRC P6 0438 0û185 XCH R9 /SAVE IN R9 0440 00187 XCH Rll /PUT IN Rll 0443 û0018 JCN CN MINMI /IF.C SET MI~UEND MINUS
û445 00246 RAR /C=0. PUT SUBTRAHEND IN C
0446 00018 JCN CNADD /IF MI~US WANT TO ADD
û448 00038 SUB, FIM P3 lû000B /REPEAT 3 I~STS IN
0û016 û450 00219 LDM 11 /CASE NEED TO RE-DO
û451 ûû187 XCH Rll /SUB
0453 00249 SUBl, TCS /IF C=0 A=1001,C=1 A=1010 ~:.
û454 0û035 SRC Pl ::
û455 00232 SBM . /SUB SUBTR
0458 00235 ADM /ADD MINUE~D
0461 û0224 WRM /WRITE RESULT TO DEST
0462 00099 rNC R3 /INC ALL POINTERS
0463 00101 I~C R5 0`464 00103 rNC R7 0465 00123 ISZ Rll SUBl ` /LOOP S TIMES
0467 00018 . JCN C~ SDONE /IF NO BORROW THEN DO~E
0470 0018û XCH R4 /XCH MINUE~D AND SUBTRAHEND
0473 0û181 XCH R5 0475 00179 XCH R3 ~ :
0477 û0236 RD0 /READ SIG~ STATUS
0479 00228 WR0 /REWRITE IT : `
00192 , ~: ~
~ .
.
. . .
.
.. : . . . - . . , 10~;2290 0482 00246 MINMI, RAR /PUT SUBTR~IEND SIGN IN C
0483 00018 JCN CN SUB /IF C=l WANT TO SUB
~485 00241 ADD, CLC
0486 00035 SRC Pl 0487 00233 RDM /LO~D FIRST NUM
0489 00235 ADM /ADD S~COND
0495 00103 I~C R7 0496 00123 ISZ Rll ADD+l /LOOP 5 TIMES
0498 00040 SDONE, FIM P4 11000B /RESTORE MAINTAINED
. 00024 0502 00034 FIM Pl 10000B /POINT Pl TO DEST
0506 00246 R~R /PUT SIGN I~ C
0507 00026 JC~ CZ RET~ /JMP IF POS
0512 00067 A12LK, JU~ A12 0514 00047 CALC, SRC P7 0516 00246 RAR /PUT TlF IN C
0518 00238 RD2 /READ Tl INPUT
0519 00018 JCN CN A2 /JMP IF TlF SET
0521 00245 RAL /PUT Tl IN C
0522 00018 ~C~ C~ Al /JMP IF Tl TRUE
0526 00231 WR3 /SET TlF
0527 00041 Al, SRC P4 0528 00237 RDl 0529 00245 RAL . /PUT EXPA~D IN C
0535 00064 INTLK, JUN INTCK
0537 00245 A2, RAL /PUT Tl IN C
0538 00026 JC~CZ Al /JMP IF Tl FALSE
0542 00231 WR3 /CLR TlF
0543 D0032 A5, FIM P0 10110000B
0545 00034 ~IM Pl O
0547 00084 A3, JMS DG5CH /SEE IF DIG WANTED THERE
:`00045 0556 00084 JMS DGSCH /MAKE SURE DIGIT STILLTHER~
~00035 :0563 00041 SRC P4 ~00057 . 0567 00248 DAC
.~0568 00224 WRM /RUN TIMER TOWARD 0 0569 00084 MOTCK, JMS ARICL
` 00172 .` 0571 00045 SRC P6 :: 0572 00210 LDM 2 /RIG SIGNS SO SUBTRACT
0573 00228 WR0 /ROUTINE WILL ADD '~
, 0574 00034 FIM Pl 11100B
: 00028 :-' 0576 00035 SRC Pl ~ 0577 00209 LDM
.~ 0578 00224 WRM /ENTER BAND IN ARI
-'.0579 00034 FIM Pl llOllB /BAND
^0581 00036 FIM P2 5 /TARGET
.~ 00005 . 00176 0585 00036 FIM P2 llollB
:j 00148 . 0589 00034 FIM Pl llollB /TARGET+BAND
: 0591 00036 FIM P2 0 /WGT
.: 00000 .,. 0594 00208 LDM 0 :~ 0595 00228` WR0 /BOTH SIGNS ARE ~ :
;`0596 00081 JMS SUBTR /WGT-tTARGET+BAND) .; 00176 ~0598 00020 JCN AZ MOTN /~AVE MOTION IF ~
:~ 00144 :
0602 00034 FIM Pl 11100B :~:
. 00028 .
~0604 00209 LDM 1 /LD BAND OF 1 .~.
... .
,~
,`. '~ - 109 -~,: . .
...
, ' . . .
:' .
, 0605 00035 SRC Pl 507 00C34 FIM Pl 11011B /BAND
0615 00081 JMS MoV5 0617 00034 FIM Pl 11011B /TARGET-BAND
0621 00081 JMS SUBTR /WGT--(TARGET--BAND) ':0623 00028 JCN AN MOTN /HAVE MOTION IF --: 00144 0626 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIO~F
0627 000 20 JCN AZ I~DTGT/JMP IF ALEtEADY ~O I~OTN
` 00151 0631 00246 RAR /PUT C~T BIT 0 I~ C
~0632 00026. . JCI!~ CZ Bl /J~P IF NOT SET
:~00125 0634 00210 LDM 2 /CNT = 2 ..0635 00066 JUN B3 0637 00246 Bl, RAR /PUT CNT BIT 1 IN C
: 00131 0640 00211 LDM 3 /CNT = 3 . 0641 00066 JUN B3 ' 00132 : 0643 00209 B2, LDM 1 /CNT = 1 . 0644 00176 B3, XCH R0 /SAVE IN R0 :` 0645 00045 SRC P6 0647 00242 IAC /INC CUR HIT C~T
0650 00028 JCN A~ SUBDI/~OT ENOUGH H`ITS YET
'. 0652 00043 SRC P5 0656 00045 MOTN, SRC P6 0660 00229 WRl /TURN OFF 1/4 GRAD I ~ P
; 0663 00034 UDTGT, FIM Pl 0 -. .
.~ ` .
, . . - .. . .
- 0669 00084 SUBDI, JMS LDTAR /SCAN TARE KEYS
: 00057 `0673 00034 FIM Pl 11110B
`"0675 00035 SRC Pl .:`.0676 00216 LDM 8 /DIGITAL INITIAL OF 8LB
:.0678 00034 FIM Pl 11011B
` 00027 .0680 00036 . FIM P2 0 `~ 00000 :`0682 00081 JMS SUBTR /SUB DIGITAL INITIAL
: 00176 0684 00081 JMS SWSGN /SET SIGN,MOVE RESULT TO WG' . 00135 .:.0686 00041 SRC P4 0687 00237 RDl /READ E~PAND INPUT
, 00193 : 0691 00034 FIM Pl 0 ; 00000 ~10693 00036 FIM P2 110100B
, 00052 ~0695 00081 . JMS MOV4 . `-:~ 00162 .
~ 0697 00034 FIM Pl 11 /CLR AUTO-ZERO AREA
iooo l l :,0699 00084 JMS ARICL~2 ~i 00174 J 0701 00221 LDM .13 0702 00229 WRl /TURN OFF 1/4 GRAD LAMP -'. 0703 00065 JUN OUTPT /JMP TO OUTPUT,WILL RETURN . -~
1 ooooo .~ /DIRECTLY TO MOTN CHK ROUTINE
:3 0705 00041 A8, SRC P4 :~l 0706 00239 RD3 .~ 0707 00245 RAL /PUT A-Z CORR EXP IN C
:'0710 00084 JMS ARICL
; 00172 ~,0712 00034 FIM Pl lllolB
0714 00035 SRC Pl :~0715 00214 LDM 6 ~0716 00224 WRM /PUT .6 IN ARI
',J0717 00034 FIM Pl 11011B
;1 00027 :'~0719 00036 FIM P2 0 00176 JMS SUBTR /SUB .6 FROM WGT
i.~0723 00020 JCN AZ A12LK ~JMP IF WGT GE .6 :1 0000.0 ., .
,~ , .
.. . .
: .
, .
.',,--. - "
: ` . . , `. :,. . -:: : : -; . - -` , .
~0730 00208 LDM O
::0732 00231 WR3 /WRITE TO A~Z SGN
.~0733 00034 FIM Pl O
': 00000 .~073S 00036 FIM P2 11 ': 00011 0737 00081 JMS MoV5 /MOVE WGT TO A-Z
0739 00081 A8A, JMS SUBAZ /SUB AUTO-ZERO FROM WGT
oolls :0741 00081 JMS SWSGN /SET SIGN. MOVE RESULT TO WGT
~`0743 00084 JMS ARICL
: 00172 :0745 00034 FIM Pl lllllB
~:0747 00035 SRC Pl ~0750 00034 FIM Pl llOllB
:~ 00027 .~0752 00081 JMS EWSGN /SUB OVERCAP FROM WGT
`' 00166 ~.0754 00043 SRC P5 :~
:i0755 00028 JCN AN A9 .
-` 00250 :0757 00236 RDO .. -`~0758 00245 RAL
:'0759 00250 STC /SET OVERCAP
j0760 00066 JUN A10 0762 00236 A9, RDO
.~0764 00241 CLC /CLR OVERCAP
0765 00246 A10, RAR
;0767 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIONF
~0768 00020 JCN AZ All /JMP IF NO MOTION
: 00012 0772 OOOI8 JC~ CN A12 /JMP IF SET TRUE
'~ 00090 0774 00034 FIM Pl llOlOOB
'0776 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK WGT
; 00163 ~0778 00065 JUN OUTPT
`i 00000 `0780 00084 All, J~S ARICL
~l 00172 ,0782 00034 FIM Pl llOllB
, 7 00027 '0784 00035 SRC Pl ;' . . .
. .
,1 y - 112 -. :', .. . ~, . . . ,, . ' :
.. , -, :. .
~185 00213 LDM S
0786 00224 WRM /WANT .005 IN ARI
0789 00081 JMS SUBTR /MAG WGT ~ .005 0792 00028 JCN AN A7 /JMP IF LT .005 0795 00229 WRl /SET 1/4 GRAD LAMP
0798 00240 A7, CLB
0799 00034 FIM Pl 0 0801 00035 SRC Pl 0804 00018 JCN CN A7B /JMP IF WGT LE .002 0806 00220 LDM 12 /LD A 12 TO 1/4 G LMP ~:
0807 00229 WRI /A~D LET IT INC ONCE .
0808 00237 A7B~ RDl /RD 1/4 GRP~ LAMP
0812 00229 WRl /UPDATE 1/4 GRAD LAMP
,0813 00161 A7A~ LD Rl /LOAD ZERO CNTR :
:'100090 0l0816 00043 SRC P5 .
l0817 00234 RDR :
;.0818 00245 RAL /PUT A-Z I~H IN C ~ -0819 00026 JCN CZ A12 /JMP IF TRUE ~-`., 00090 '- ~ ..
~00172 :~l 0823 00043 SRC P5 '0825 00246 RAR
0826 00246 RAR /PUT WGT SG~ IN LOW ORDER BIT
0827 00244 CMA /COM ACC FOR A-Z CO~RECTION
-:0828 00045 SRC P6 .0829 00228 WR0 /STORE IN SIGN STATUS
`.j 0830 00239 RD3 /READ A-Z SIGN
-.,0831 00246 RAR
0832 00236 RD0 r ;0834 00228 WR0 /E~TER TO SIGN STATUS
l0835 oao34 FIM Pl 11011B
;00027 ;.0837 00035 SRC Pl j0838 00209 LDM
,0839 00224 WRM
;~0840 00036 FIM P2 11 OOOIl 0842 00081 JMS SU8TR /CORRECT A-Z BY .001 .0844 00045 SRC P6 /ENTER RESULTING SIGN
. . .
.
~ 113 ~
. ... . . . .. . .
. : : : ., .. , . , . -:.- ' : . :
,: , : : .
.,:- : . . - - .. .. :
.
.
0845 00231 WR3 /TO ~-% SIGN
0851 00232 SBM /SU8 A-Z .XXX PROM .6 ~0852 00020 JCN AZ Al2 /JMP IF A-Z OUT OF RANGE
:~00090 0858 00034 Al2~ FIM Pl 11001B
`0860 00035 SRC Pl 0867`00034 FIM Pl 101011B
, .00043 00166`
.00135 . 0873 00241 CLC .
0878 00034 FIM Pl 0880 00036 FIM P2 llolooB /MOVE HIGH 4 DIG OF
0884 00161 LD Rl /LD ZERO CNTR
`~,0887 00236 RD0 ~'0888 00245 RAL
~'0889 00245 RAL
;0893 00228 WR0 0894 00047 A27, SRC P7 /SELECT PRINT MODE SWITCH
0895 C0237 RDl /READ BY CNT
30898 00.034 FIM Pl 100000B
-~ 00032 .,0900 00036 FIM P2 1100008 `.0902 00081 JMS MOV4 /PUT P/L8 SW IN P/LB OUT
` 00162 `.0904 00038 FIM P3 1001008 , .
- 114 - ~
~06Z290 090G 00039 SRC P3 /SELECT P/CNT SW VEC~ 1 0908 00028 JCN AN A14 ~IF NON-ZERO PUT IT IN
~0913 00216 LDM 8 /MUST ADD 8 TO DECK 2 :0914 00235 ADM
0915 00043 A14, SRC P5 .0916 00224 WRM /ENCODE CNT IN P/LB OUT
~`0917 00034 FIM Pl 101010B
0919 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OLD CNT VALUE
0920 00241 CLC /NErA CNT VALUE IN ACC
0922 00020 JCN AZ A16 /JMP IF SAME :
: 0924 00043 SRC P5 .~- -0925 00233 RDM /READ NEW CNT .
:0926 00035 SRC Pl .: : -0927 00224 Al3~ WRM /UPDATE OLD CNT ~ .-`0928 00066 JUN INTLK-3 /GO TO SET INTF : :
00020 : .
~.0930 00034 A16, FIM Pl 100000B
:` 00032 '0932 00036 FIM P2 111000B
~ 00056 '~0934 00081 JMS MOV4 /PUT P/LB SW IN VALUE OUT ~ -'-1 00162 ;`~!0936 00068 JUN A25 .'1 00010 :.`.0938 00034 Al7~ FIM Pl 101010B
:`` 00042 ;~1 0940 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OLD CNT VALUE
i; 0941 00233 RDM
`-~ . 0942 00020 JCN AZ A15 /JMP IF WAS BY WGT
~:~ 00179 0944 00240 CLB /CNT VALUE=O FOR BY WGT
~ 00159 -.0947 00034 A15, PIM Pl 100000B
:~ . 00032 J0953 00034 A18, FIM Pl llooooB /P/LB OUT IS MULTIPLIER
-~ 00048 ':0955 00036 FIM P2 110100B /WGT OUT IS MULTIPLICAND
. 00052 ~0957 00240 CLB /ENTER MULTIPLY ROUTINE
.. ~ 0958 00185XCH R9 /CLR S~IFT CNTR
;~0959 obo38 FIM P3 10000B /SET DEST POINTER
~0961 00032 FIM P0 looollooB /LOAD 8 CNTR AND 4 CNTR
; 00140 i0963 00240 CL8 :i~0964 00039 ML, SRC P3/POINT TO DEST DIG
.. . . .
..i ... .
'` ,. . : ., :-~ '. - :' ' :0967 00112 ISZ R0 Ml /LOOP 8 TIMES
0969 00241 M2, CLC .
0971 00183 XCH R7 /S~IFT DEST PNTR BY IT
: 0972 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT MULTIPLIER DIG
:0974 00244 CMA /FORM (DIG NOT)+l FOR CNTR
:0975 00242 IAC
0976 00020 JCN AZ M7 /SKIP IP DIG=0 ~ 00231 :~0978 00184 XCEI R8 /R8 IS DIG ADD CNTR
0979 00220 M3, LDM 12 /SET MULTIPLICAND CNTR = 4 '0981 00037 M4, SRC P2 /SELECT MULTIPLICAND DIG
0984 00235. ADM /ADD IT
0991 00d81 JMS ROFFl /ADD POSSIBLE CARRY
. 00110 .0993 00169- M6, LD R9 0994 00183 XCH R7 /DEST PNTR = SHIFT CNTR
~0995 00212 LDM 4 /RESTORE ~LPLCND PNTR
y0996 00181 XCH R5 ~0997 00120 ISZ R8 M3 /LOOP UNTIL ADDS DONE - : .
:: 00211 0999 00105 M7, INC R9 /INC SHIFT CNT
`1000 00099 INC R3 /INC MULTIPLIER PNTR -:
.. .1001 00113 ISZ Rl M2 /LOOP UNTIL JOB DONE
1003 00038 FIM P3 10001B /SET ROUNDOFF PNTR :
~ 1006 00081 JMS RNDOF
.` 001Q6 1008 00040 FIM P4 lloooB /RESTORE P4 ~ 00024 , 1010 00034 FIM Pl 10010B
: .1012 00036 FIM P2 1110008 :'. 00056 . 1014 00081 JMS MOV4 /MOVE RESULT TO VALUE OUT
j 00162 ;' 1016 00034 PIM Pl 10110B
¦ 1018 00035 SRC Pl 1019 00233 . RDM /V00.=0 IF NOT OVERVAL
1020 00068 JUN 10.24 .~ . .
;~ . , ' . . . .
,, .
.
':
.
, .: . - ' .:
,: :
. . ~ :, .
lO~;ZZ90 1026 00034 FIM Pl llloooB
: 1029 00084 JMS BLANK+l /ZERO VALVE OUT
.. ~ 1032 00043 A24, SRC P5 1033 00229 WRl /UPDATE OVERVAL FLG
~ 1034 00043 A25, SRC P5 :1035 00234 RDR /READ SELECTIVE BLNK INP
;1036 00246 RAR /PUT P/LB BLNK IN C
~:1037 00180 XCH R4 ``
1038 00018 JCN CN Al9 /JMP IF NO BLNK
1040 00034 FIM Pl llooooB
~ 00048 ; 1042 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK P/LB
..1044 00224 WRM /PUT ZERO IN HIGH ORDER P/LB
: 1045 00180 Al9, XCH R4 1046 002~6 RAR /PUT WGT BLNK IN C
~ 1047 00180 XCH R4 .' 1048 00047 SRC P7 .` 1049 00237 RDl /RD BY CNT
i~ 1050 00020 JCN AZ A28 /JMP IF BY WGT
., .00029 .~ 1052 00243 CMC /INVERT BLANK LOGIC
`1053 00018 A28, JCN. CN A20 ~ 00035 :.1055 00034 FIM Pl 110100B
.~ 00052 1057 00084 J~S BLANK /BLANK WGT
~ 00163 .'1059 00180 A20, XCH R4 `~1060 00246 RAR /PUT VALUE BLNK IN C
:1061 00018 JCN CN A21 ": `00043 '1063 00034 FIM Pl llloooB
~ 00056 :.1065 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK VALUE
' ` 00163 :]1067 00065 A21, JUN OUTPT
:' 00000 .:1069 00035 DGSCH, SRC Pl /SUBROUTINE TO CHK FOR
~`1070 00210 LDM 2 /PROPER DIG FROM A/D CONV
-~1071 00225 WMP /0010 SELECTS DIG SLCT INP
~1072 00234 A4, RDR
~1073 00244 CMA
:1074 00241 CLC
-~1075 00252 KBP /CONVERT 1 OF 4 CODE TO BIN
:!1076 00147 SUB R3 /SUB DESIRED WGT DIG ADD.
`1077 00028 JCN AN A6 /JMP IF WRING
;:i 00056 :;1079 00192 8BL 0 . !1080 00193 A6, BBL
:i1081 00032 LDTAR. FIM P0 11100000B /R0=2 CNTR
.'00224 :`.,1083 00034 FIM Pl loolllB
~ . 00039 : . .
. . .
.; .
~ - 117 -~ . ' . ' .. .
.
, , .
1085 000~5 SRC P6 '087 00225 WMP /SLCT SW INPUTS
,088 00163 TARl, LD R3 /LD SW POINT~R
1093 00035 SRC Pl 1095 00099 I~C R3 `1096 00112 ISZ RO TARl /LOOP 2 TIMES
1098 00045 TAR2, SRC P6 1100 00028 JC~ A~ ENTAT /JMP IF SET
~1107 00233 RDM /RD .T
i1108 00020 JCN AZ B4 /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
00099 ' ' ;00114 ;~1112 00037 SRC P2 1113 00233 RDM /RD .T
1115 00026 JCN CZ NOTAR /JMP IF NO TARE WA~TED
.1117 00246 RAR
`~1118 00018 JCN CN ENTAT /JMP IF AUTO TARE
:00132 L120 00233 RDM /RD .. T
`'1122 00224 WRM /WRITE TO TARE OUT
~1123 00036 B4, FIM P2 100111B
:00039 s1125 00038 FIM P3 101100B
'00044 1128 00233 RDM /RD .OT
~1129 00020 JCN AZ TIMCK-l /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
:~-00113 '~00114 :.1133 00037 SRC P2 `i1134 00233 RDM /RD .0T
;1137 00192 B8L 0 1138 00216 TIMCK, LDM 8 1139 00047 SRC P7 :
.1141 00041 SRC P4 :1142 00233 RDM /RD TARE TIMER
:1143 00028 JCN AN TIMCK-l /JMP IF RU~NING
. 00113 ~ .
:, , . . . . .
. , - ' - '` ~' ::
- lO~;Z290 .~45 00221 LDM 13 1.147 00034 FIM Pl 101011B
1149 00068 JUN ARICL+2 /CLR TARE
1151 00084 ~OTAR, JMS NOTAR-4 /MA Æ SURE TARE CLEARED
` 1156 00045 ENTAT, SRC P6 :1158 00230 WR2 /SET AUTO TARE FLG
1159 00034 FIM Pl 11001B
~- 1161 0003S SRC Pl : 1162 00233 RDM /RD WGT RDY FLG
;:~ 1163 00020 JCN AZ ENTAT-l /JMP IF NOT RDY
~ 1165 00240 CLB , -: 1169 00245 RAL
. 1170 00245 RAL /PUT WGT SGN IN C
- 1171 00018 JCN CN CLATF /JMP IF MI~US
' 00158 1174 00028 JCN AN ENTAT~l /JMP IF MOTN
~; 00131 j 1176 00034 FIM Pl 0 ,'. 00000 ~ 1178 00036 FIM P2 101011B
-l ~0043 ~ 1180 00081 JMS MOV5 /ENTER WGT AS TARE
: 00148 1182 00045 CLATF, SRC P6 :`: 1183 00240 CLB
: 1184 00230 WR2 /CLR AUTO TARE FL&
:~1185 00068 JUN ~OTAR+2 : /ROUTINE TO BLANK 4 CHARS
~1187 00223 BLANK, LDM 15 /LD A BLANK
:: 1188 00032 FIM P0 11000000B /LD A 4 CNTR TO R0 1190 00035 BLNKl, SRC Pl /Pl HOLDS ADDRESS
` 1191 00224 WRM /WRITE BLANK
~ 1193 00112 ISZ R0 BLNKl /LOOP 4 TIMES
;~ 00166 .: 1195 00192 BBL 0 /ARITHMETIC AREA CLR ROUTINE
/CLRS 5 DIGITS. USED BEFORE SUBTRACT
1196 00034 ARICL, FIM Pl 11011B /MEM REG 1, CHAR 11 . 00027 ` 1198 00240 CLB
1200 00228 WR0. ~CLR SIGN STATUS .-1201 00035 ACLRl, SRC Pl .
. ~ .
:. " . ' , 1~2 00224 W~*l /WRITE A 0 l~Q3 00115 ISZ R3 ACLRl /LOOP 5 TIMES
/ROUTIN~. TO READ 1 WRD OF DISCRETE INP
1206 00161 RDINP, LD Rl /Rl HOLDS MLPX ADD.
1207 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT X~0 1211 00231 WR3 /WRITE INPUT TO STA~US 3 1212 00097 I~C Rl/INC MLP~ ADD.
.1213 00192 BBL 0 1214 00034 PCHK3, FIM Pl 101000B
1216 00035 SRC Pl : .1218 00210 LDM 2 - 1219 00232 SBM /SUB .T FROM 2 1220 00028 JC~ AN PCHK4 /JMP IF NO TARE NOT PRESSED
:00224 1222 00034 FIM Pl 1.10000B
:- 1224 00036 FIM P2 110000B
j 1226 00081 JMS MOV4 /SEE IF P/P 0 1228 00151 LD Rl : 1229 00028 JC~ P~ PC~K4 /JMP IF ~OT O
~1231 00228 WR0 /CLR SET, MI~US, OVERCAP
`i-1232 00209 LDM
:,~1233 00230 WR2 /SE PRI~T
-~1234 00081 JMS OUTPT
~1236 00034 - FIM Pl 6 ::~ 00006 1238 00112 PCHK5, ISZ R0 PCHK5 ,1240 00113 ISZ Rl PCHK5 1244 00115 ISZ R3 PCHKS /1.1 SEC DELAY
1248 00084 PCHK4, JMS ARICL
i 00172 1250 00064 JUN PCHK+2 ~ 00039 , ~ .
. . . .
., .
' .
- . . . . ~ ~,. .. ..
energizing the units weight display 303 also applies a signal for energizing a decimal point on the units weight display 303.
'.' . . .
This output is applied through ~n inverter 309 to a buffer ampli-fier compri~ing a 'xan~istor 310 and a bias r~sistor 311. The output from the tr~nsistor 310 is connected through a resistor 312 to the decimal point input on the indicator 303. Thus, whenever the units indicator 303 is enabled, a decimal point is illuminated.
The apparatus 10 is designed for indicating weights ranging from -2 pounds up to +30 pounds. In the event that the measured weight goes below zero, a minus sign is formed by illuminating the center element in the tens indicator 304. This is accomplished by connecting the output from the decoder 307 which enables the indicator 304 to a ~A~ID gate 313. The minus ; sign signal on the line 254 from the logic unit 15 is applied to ;' a second input on the gate 313. The output of the ~A~D gate is 15 connected through a ~OR gate 314 and an inverter 315 to the input ~ on the buffer amplifiers 306 which energizes the segment in the - indicator 304 used to form the minus sign. The output ~rom the - BCD-to-seven-segment decoder 305 which normally energizes this segment of the weight indicators 301-304 is also connected through 20 the ~OR gate 314 to the buffer amplifiers 306. Thus, the middle segment in the other indicators 301-303 and in the indicator 304 when a positive weight is read is energized by the ou~put of the ; decoder 305 passing through the gate 314 and the inverter 315 to -the buffer amplifiers 306.
Although it is not normally exposed to an operator of the apparatus 10, a service switch 3l6 is shown with the weight display 22c The service switch 316 is a normally open switch having a momentary price contact 317 and a momentary value con-tact 318. When the service switch 316 is moved to a position wherein the price contact 317 is grounded, the line four input -, to the eight-line to one-line decoder 199 (Fig. 4B) is grounded.
. , - .
~ - 93 -When this cccur~, the ~trobe signai on the readout address buses 231 s chclng~d to ~trobe the weight indicatorQ 301~304 while price data is pr~sent on the printer data buses 232. Similarly, when the service switch 316 is moved to ground the value contact 318, the line four input of the eight-line to one-line decoder 200 (Fig. 4B) is grounded. When this occurs, the strobe signal to the decoder 307 is synchronized with the computed value data - on the printer data buses 232 causing the indicators 301-304 to display the computed value. ~s previously indicated, this permits maintenance personnel to isolate an error in a printed label between the printex 21 and the logic unit 15. If the weight `indicators 301-304 display a correct price per unit weight or a correct value for an article, then an error in the printed label will be isolated to the printer 21. However, if the indicators 301-304 display the same error present on the printed label, then the error ls isolated to either the logic unit 15 or to one of the data inputs to the logic unit 15.
., , The printer 21 may be of any conventional design suitable for use with weighing and price computins apparatus.
One typical printer design is shown in United States Patent 3,163,247 which issued on December 29, 1964 to R. E. Bell et al.
. .
~owever, a preferred arrangement for the printer 21 is shown - diagrammatically in the block diagram of Fig. 6. As previously indicated, the printer 21 includes apparatus for automatically entering price data into the logic unit 15. The auto-price ::
apparatus includes an auto-price reader 325 which includes an optical reader for reading three digits of price data from a commodity plate. The commodity plate also includes raised tvpe for printing on the labels the name of the commodity. The three binary coded decimal price digits from the auto-price reader 325 are applied through a data selector 326 to the four auto-price data lines 210-213 which are connected to tha line one inputs of the 8-line to l-line decoders 198-201 of Fig. 4B. The data _ 94 _ selector 326 may al~o include apparatus such as exclusive OR
gates connected for generating an auto-price parity hit on an output 224 connected to the line six input to the decoder 200.
An alternate and preferred method for producing an auto-price parity bit is to store the parity information directly on the commodity plate for reading by the auto-price reader 325. The actual auto~price digit supplied from the reader 325 through the data selector 326 to the lines 210-213 is determined by signals on two auto-price address selection lines 327 and 328 (from Fig.
4C). Signals on the address selection lines 327 and 328 are received from the address buses 206 ~rom the ROM 190 in the control unit 15. Thus, when a commodity plate is inserted within the auto-price reader 325, the address selector 326 applies one digit at a time of the price per pound data on the lines 210-213 15 depending upon an address selection signal received on the lines 327 and 328.
The three digits of the price per unit weight for an article being la~eled, the four weight digits and the four value digits are printed on the label by means of print wheels 329.
Each of the print wheels 329 is connected through a solenoid actuated clutch 330 to a common drive shaft. Outputs 240' from ~ the printer data address amplifiers 240 (Fig. 4B) are applied to - a 4-line to 16-line decoder 331. Eleven of the output lines from the decoder 331 are used for selecting the eleven clutch solenoids 330 which selectively engage the eleven print wheels 329 with the drive shaft. The outputs from the decoder 331 are connected through solenoid driver amplifiers 332 which power the clutch ; solenoids 330. m us, when address data is received on the lines 240', one of the solenoid clutches 330 is addressed for engaging the associated print wheel 329 with the drive shaft.
~ .
- 95 _ ~ .
- .
,. .
? -Each print wh~el 329 is provided with a co~nutator 333 which rotates with and indicates the position of the print wheel.
The commu~ators 333 are connected to four 16-line to l-line decoders 334. The decoders 334 have a BCD -output corre~sponding S to the di~it to which a~ addressed print wheel is positioned.
Address information is supplied to the decoders 334 from the data address lines 240'. The BCD output from the decoders 334 is applied to one input of a four bit comparator or coincidence circuit 335. The printer data on the buses 232 from the RAM 228 (Fig. 4B) in the control unit 15 is applied to a second input of the comparators 335. When an addressed print wheel 329 is - driven to a desired number, the output of the decoders 334 will correspond to the printer data on the buses 232 and the compara-tors 335 will apply a coincidence signal to control logic 336.
When coincidence occurs, power is removed from the energized clutch solenoid 330.
` The printer data on the buses 232 is also applied to a parity generator 337 which generates a parity bit in a conven-tional manner, such as with three exclusive OR gates. The parity bit from the generator 337 is applied to a comparator 33~, which may also be an exclusive OR gate, where it is compared with the printer data parity bit from the printer data parity generator comprising the exclusive OR gates 233-235 (Fig. 4B) in the control unit 15. If there is no parity check, the control logic 336 applies a REWEIGH signal on the line 265 for recycling the control unit 15. The control logic 336 also includes various switches and mechanical sensors as well as inputs from and outputs to the control unit lS. The printer clock input is obtained from the inverter 244 and the 5ET input on line 263 from an inverter 262. Outputs from the control logic 336 include the REWEIGH line 265, the take label line 267, the print stored line 260, the add labels line 269, a motion detector inhibit line connected to the line five input to the decoder 198 in the ~ontrol ` , -: .
unit 15, the door open interlock connected to the line four input to the decoder 201, a printer readout on/off output connected to the NAND gate 250 (Fig. 4C) and the blank weiyht, blank value and blank price signals to the ROM 191. -The manner in which these outputs are generated is known in the art and will not be covered in further detail.
The above-described features of the exemplary embodi-; ment permit the apparatus 10 to weigh axticles, compute an article value and print an article label with a speed and accuracy heretofore not possible. Furthermore, the accuracy ; of the apparatus 10 is maintained over a long period of time, despite changes in component parameters caused by ageing and changes in temperature.
In the exemplary embodiment of the apparatus 10 des-cribed above, weight measurements were in pounds and value was computed in dollars. It will be appreciated by those of ordinary skill in the art that the apparatus 10 may be readily adapted for other weight units, such as kilograms, and to other monetary units. The number of weight, price per unit weight and computed value digits also may be changed to meet any requirements for j the apparatus 10. Also, changes may be readily made in the t~ degree or band of motion to which the motion detector is respon-` sive and in the operating range and increments of the automatic zeroing circuit.
The apparatus 10 has been described as generating a predetermined number of significant weight digits, e.g., for significant weight digits for weights of from 0.01 pound up to ~5 30.00 pounds. However, any other number of digits may be generated and employed and any other weight and price limits employed as may be necessary or desirable. These weight digits are displayed, printed on labels and used in computing values.
In addition, at least one more least significant digit is generated for use in automatically and manually zeroing the ;~ - 97 -~`
- - - - . . - .
10~;2Z90 apparatu~ 10 ~nd in motion detection. Althouyh such additional least significant dlgit has been described as a decimal, it will be apparent that it may be of other fractional units such as on~-third or one-fifth of the least significant one of the predetermined number of significant weight digits. If an odd fractional increment, such as one-third, i9 generated, then the scale zero will be centered and the automatic zero correction factor will generally not change except for compensating for any slow drift in the zero.
In describing the zero expansion circuitry, it has been stated that the additional least significant weight digit is stored in the weight output memory during actuation of the zero expand switch 178 so that this digit will appear on the weight display 22. In an alternative embodiment, a separate indicator may be provided for displaying the additional least significant weight digit. This indicator will normally be ` blanked and will be energized only when the zero expand switch 178 is actuated. It will be appreciated that various other changes may also be made in the above-described inventions ` 20 without departing from the spirit and the scope of the following -claims.
: . .
.
. .
.
:
A P P E N D I X
SYMBOL TABL
ACLRl 001201 B4 001123 MoV5 000404 ADD 000485 CALC 000514 Ml 000964 Al 000527 Cl 000074 M3 000979 All 000780 C12 000229 M6 000993 A12L~ 000512 C14 000214 ~MCHK 000014 A13 000927 C15 000215 NOT~R 001151 A18 000953 C3 000129 OUTl 000298 Al9 001045 C4 000133 OUT2 000308 A20 001059 C6 000150 PCHKl 000030 A28 001053 ENTAT 001156 RDI~P 001206 A3 000547 EWSG~ 000422 RETN 000390 A4 001072 I~TCK 000067 RNDOF 000362 A5 000543 I~TLK 000535 ROFFl 000366 A7 000798` LDTAP~ 001081 SUB 000448 A7A 000813 LTCHl 000353 . SUBAZ 000375 A8 000705 MCHKl 000008 SUBTR 000432 A8A 000739 MI~MI 000482 SUBl` 000453 BL~K 001187 MOT~ 000656 TARl 001088 BL~Kl 001190 MOVA 000406 TAR2 001098 Bl 000637 MOVB 000413 TIMCK 001138 .
:
. ~ .
. ~., .
.
_ 99 _ .
',- ` .
PROGRAM
0000 00040 MC}IK, FIM P4 110008 /INIT CONSTANT POINTERS
0008 00082 MCHKl, JMS CALC
~ 00002 :0010 00043 SRC PS
:0011 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIONF
0012 00020 JCN AZMCHKl /LOOP UNTIL MOTION
0014 00082 NMCHK, JMS CALC
:0020 00047 SRC P7 `~0024 00018 JCN CNPCHKl /JMP IF DEM OR COWT
i 00030 .0026 00237 RDl :~0028 00026 . JCN CZPCHK /JMP IF NOT TRUE
0030 00238 PCHKl, RD2 .0031 00246 RAR - /PUT REWEIGH IN C
::0032 00018 ~ JCN CNPCHK /JMP IF HAVE REWEIGH
~ 00037 :
'~0034 00246 RAR /PUT PRINT STORED IN C
:50035 00018 JCN CNMCHK /DO NOT PRINT IF TRUE
'~ 00000 0037 00068 PCHK, JUN PCHK3 /CHK FOR WO TARE BUTTON
'' 00190 -~0039 00034 FIM Pl11101B /SELECT DIGIT FOR
:~ 00029 :;0041 00035 SRC Pl /.1 LB CHK
~0042 00209 LDM
:0043 00224 WRM
0044 00034 FIM Pl11011B
. 00027 0046 00036 . FIM P2 0 0048 00081 JMS EWSGN /SUB .1 LB FROM WGT
0050 00028 JCN AWMCHK /JMP IF nGT LT .1 LB
0053 00236 RD0 /RD SET, MINUS, OVERCAP
i, 00000 .
'' :' ~ ., ' -' :' : .
:: : , - ::
0058 00250 STC ~SET PRINT
0059 00245 RA~
0061 00081 ~S OUTPT /OUTPUT TO BUFFER
0063 00043 PCHK2, SRC P5 0064 00240 CLB /CLR PR~NT
:0067 00034 INTCX, FIM Pl 100000B
0069 00032 FIM P0 lloolooB /R0=10 CNTR, Rl=4 :0072 00240 CLB /LOAD A 0000 007.3 00225 WMP /OOOOSELECTS ROTARY SW INP
0074 00163 Cl, LD R3 /LOAD SWITC~l POINTER0075 00047 SRC P7 :
. 0078 00234 RDR
, 0079 00035 SRC Pl /WRITE SW INP TO MEM REG 2 `: 0080 00224 WRM
0082 00112 ISZ R0 Cl /LOOP 10 TIMES
` .0084 00084 JMS RDINP /READ DISCRETE INPUTS
~! 00182 ~. 0086 00239 RD3 . /READ STARTS AT ADD. 4 `'` 0087 00228 . WR0 i 0088 00084 JMS RDINP
, 0090 00239 RD3 . 0091 00229 WRl 0092 00084 JMS:. RDINP
~' 00182 ~' 00182 0098 00237 RDl ~0099 00245 RAL
:~0100 00245 RAL /PUT PRICE RITE/MAN I~ C
,'0101 00047 SRC P7 0102 00237 RDl /READ BY CNT
0103 00028 JCN AN C6+2 /JMP IF IN BY CNT
.0108 00020 JCN AZ C5 /JMP IF MODE CHANGED
:~ 00186 0110 00032 FIM P0 llooooooB
. 00192 ~0112 00034 FIM Pl 100000B
i 00032 :0114 00045 C2, SRC P6 ;0117 00036 FIM P2 12 /R4=1 BITS CNTR,R5=~ CNTR
, ' , ' :
' , ~, , - -106?Z9O
0119 00161 LD Rl /LOAD PIR DIG ADD. POINTER
0125 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT MEM CIIAR
0127 00097 INC Rl /INC DIG ADD. PNTR
0128 00099 INC R3 /INC MEM CE~R PNTR
: 0129 00246 C3,RAR /ROTATE BITS T0 CNT ONES
: 0130 00026 JCN CZ C4 /SKIP INC INST IF BIT 0 .: 0132 00100 INC R4 : .0133 00117 C4,ISZ R5 C3 /DO 4 TIMES
:: 0136 00045 SRC P6 0137 00225 WMP /0110 SELE~CTS P/R PARITY
~ 0144 00018 JCN CN C10 /JMP IF NOT
.? 00188 ~ 0146 00112 ISZ R0 C2 /LOOP 4 TIMES
., 00114 , 0148 00064 ' JUN C9 .
~ 0150 00028 C6,JCN AN C5 /JMP IF MODE E~S CH~NGED
' 00186 .'0152 00034 FIM Pl loooooB /Pl POINTS TO NEW P/P
~ 00032 0154 00036 FIM P2 llllooB /P2 POINTS TO OLD P/P
~ 00060 ::.~0156 00241 C7,CLC /C MUST BE CLR
0157 00035 SRC Pl .;0158 00233 RDM /READ NEW CE~AR
0159 00037 . SRC P2 ~ 00171 `:0163 00034 FIM Pl loooooB /CE~ANG~D, RESET
0165 00036 FIM P2 llllooB /POINTERS
: 00060 ~: 00162 ~ 00188 ;0171 00099 C8,INC R3 /INC DIG POINTER
.0174 00041 C9,SRC P4 /SELECT OLD TARE ADD.
.-0175 00236 RDO
`:`0176 00245 RAL /PUT DOOR OPEN IN C
. 0177 00018 JCN CN C10 /JMP IF DOOR OPEN
.. .
., :~
. , .
.
, ~: . ` : ' .: :
- :` .:: ` ` ': `: `-Q~180 00234 RDR
001~
0184 0006~ JUN C13 0186 00247 C5, TCC
0188 00047 C10, SRC P7 0191 00084 C13, JMS TAR2 . 00074 "0193 00047 SRC P7 /SELECT PRINT MODE SW
`:0194 00241 CLC
`:`0196 00020 JCN AZ C15+1 ~0198 00246 RAR
:0200 00246 RAR /NOW ACC=0 IF BY WGT
0201 00229 WRl /WRITE TO BY CNT
:0203 00246 RAR . /C=l MEANS MODE 2 ~0204 00043 SRC P5 0205 00026 JCN CZ C14 ~ PIF MODE 1 0207 00246 RAR /C=l IF CONT
. 00215 -.0211 00246 RAR /RAR IF DEM TO SET DEM
~0212 00064 JUN C15 `. 00215 .0214 00240 C14,~ CLB
~'.0215 00230 C15, WR2 /UPDATE PRINT MODE OUT
0218 00245 RAL /PUT rNTF IN C
~ 00229 -~0221 00209 LDM
0222 00230 WR2 /CLR INTF, SET INITF
0223 00043 C21, SRC P5 ~0224 00236 RD0 :0225 00246 RAR
`0227 00064 JUN C22 ` 0229 00238 C12, RD2 ~0230 00246 RAR /PUT INITF IN C
.~ 0231 00026 JCN CZ C20 /JMP IF NOT SET
.0234 00233 RDM
0235 00246 RAR /C=l IF MODE 2 . 00252 .
-:
0240 00246 ~R /PUT LOCK SW IN C
`41 00026 JCN CZ C20 /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
0246 00043 S~C P5 0250 00245 C22, RAL
0252 00192 C20,BBL 0 0256 00041 OUTPT, SRC P4 0261 00246 R~R /PUT DISPLY PRICE IN C
0262 00026 JC~ CZ OUTA /JMP.IF NOT SET
0264 00034 FIM Pl 110000B /SOURCE IS PRICE
0266 00065 JU~ OUTB
0268 00246 OUTA, RAR /PUT DISPLY VALUE IN C
0269 00026 JCN CZ OUTC /JMP IF ~OT SET
0271 00034 FIM Pl 111000B /SOURCE IS VALUE
0273 00081 OUTB, JMS MOV4 /MOVE SOURCE TO DEST
0275 00015 OUTC, ` SRC P6 0276 00237 RDl /RD 1/4 GRAD LAMP
0277 00034 ` FIM Pl 1000000B
0279 00035 SRC Pl 0283 00043 SRC P5 /OUTPUT ALL DATA TO BU~EER
0284 00034 FIM Pl 110000B /MEM AND LATCH
0295 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT RAM0, ROM0 0298 00234 OUTl, RDR
0301 00026 JC~ CZ OUTl , ' .
.
:. .
,, 0303 00041 SRC P4 /SELECT ROMl ~304 00209 LDM 1 /LOAD A 0001 ~05 00226 WRR /0001 TKES CONTROL F BUF
0308 00047 OUT2, SRC P7 /SELECT ROM2 0309 00163 LD R3 /LOAD BUF ADD.
0311 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OUTPUT CHAR
0313 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT ~AM0 0315 00041 SRC P4 /SELE~T ROMl 0320 00099 INC R3 /INC CHAR POI~TER
0324 00163 LD R3 /POI~T BUF ADD. 13 0327 00238 RD2 /READ ~Rr~T CO~TROL WRD
0336 00226 WRR /RELEASE 8UFFER CONTROh 0341 00241 CLC /CLR MEM. UPDATE REQ
0345 00236 LATCH, RD0 /SRC P5 LAST GIVE~
0347 00018 JC~ CN LTcHl/IF SET FORGET
0350 00237 RDl 0353 00246 LTCHl, RAR /SET OVERCAP IF
0362 00039 RNDOF, SRC P3 /SUBROUTINE FOR WGT ROU~DOFF ~-. .
- 105 - `
~ ~ . . .
~364 00235 ADM /C WILL SET IF LSD GE 5 365 00103 INC ~7 ~366 00039 ROFFl, SRC P3 0372 00018 . JCN C~ ROFFl /XEEP GOING UNTIL C O
0375 00034 SUBAZ, FIM Pl 11 /ROUTINE TO SUB AUTO ZERO
,.00011 0383 002~5 RAL
0384 00228 WR0 /PUT AZ SIGN r~
~00166 0389 00193 BBL 1 /IF ~EG LOAD 1 0390 00192 RETN, BBL 0 0391 00176 SWSGN, XCH R0 /ROUTINE TO SET WGT SIG~
0395 00245 RAL /PUT WGT SIGN I~ C
0396 00176 XCH R0. /PUT SUB SIGN BACK IN
~--0397 00246 RAR /PUT SUB SIGN I~ C
-0398 00176 . XCH R0 /RECOVER STATUS WORD
;~0399 00246 RAR
0400 00246 RAR ~PUT UPDATED SIGN IN PLACE
~:0401 00228 WR0 `0402 00036 FIM P2 0 -: 00000 ~0404 00032 MoV5, FIM P0 10111011B /R0=5CNTR, Rl-5CNTR
`0406 00035 MOVA, SRC Pl :0408 00037 SRC P2 ~ 00157 ~0412 00097 r~c Rl /INC ZEROES CNTR
:0413 00099 MO~B, I~C R3 0414 00101 r~c R5 00150 ' :.`0417 00192 BBL 0 `~.0418 00032 MOV4, FIM P0 11001100B /R0=4 CNTR, Rl=4 CNTR
' 00204 -`~00150 `.~ Q422 00036 EWSG~, FIM P2 0 /ROUTINE TO E~TER WGT
., :
`
` ' ' ' : .. .
~424 00043 SRC P5 /SIGN A~ID T~EN SU~, ~26 00245 RAL
u427 00245 P~L /PUT WGT SIGN IN C
û429 00236 RD0 043û 00245 RAL
0431 û0228 WRû /ENTER SIGN TO MI~UEND
/ROUTINE TO SUB NUM AT Pl FROM NUM AT P2 . /AND LACE RESULT AT P3. ALL REGS ARE USED
û432 00038 SUBTR, FIM P3 10000B /DEST POINTER
û434 00045 SRC P6 0438 0û185 XCH R9 /SAVE IN R9 0440 00187 XCH Rll /PUT IN Rll 0443 û0018 JCN CN MINMI /IF.C SET MI~UEND MINUS
û445 00246 RAR /C=0. PUT SUBTRAHEND IN C
0446 00018 JCN CNADD /IF MI~US WANT TO ADD
û448 00038 SUB, FIM P3 lû000B /REPEAT 3 I~STS IN
0û016 û450 00219 LDM 11 /CASE NEED TO RE-DO
û451 ûû187 XCH Rll /SUB
0453 00249 SUBl, TCS /IF C=0 A=1001,C=1 A=1010 ~:.
û454 0û035 SRC Pl ::
û455 00232 SBM . /SUB SUBTR
0458 00235 ADM /ADD MINUE~D
0461 û0224 WRM /WRITE RESULT TO DEST
0462 00099 rNC R3 /INC ALL POINTERS
0463 00101 I~C R5 0`464 00103 rNC R7 0465 00123 ISZ Rll SUBl ` /LOOP S TIMES
0467 00018 . JCN C~ SDONE /IF NO BORROW THEN DO~E
0470 0018û XCH R4 /XCH MINUE~D AND SUBTRAHEND
0473 0û181 XCH R5 0475 00179 XCH R3 ~ :
0477 û0236 RD0 /READ SIG~ STATUS
0479 00228 WR0 /REWRITE IT : `
00192 , ~: ~
~ .
.
. . .
.
.. : . . . - . . , 10~;2290 0482 00246 MINMI, RAR /PUT SUBTR~IEND SIGN IN C
0483 00018 JCN CN SUB /IF C=l WANT TO SUB
~485 00241 ADD, CLC
0486 00035 SRC Pl 0487 00233 RDM /LO~D FIRST NUM
0489 00235 ADM /ADD S~COND
0495 00103 I~C R7 0496 00123 ISZ Rll ADD+l /LOOP 5 TIMES
0498 00040 SDONE, FIM P4 11000B /RESTORE MAINTAINED
. 00024 0502 00034 FIM Pl 10000B /POINT Pl TO DEST
0506 00246 R~R /PUT SIGN I~ C
0507 00026 JC~ CZ RET~ /JMP IF POS
0512 00067 A12LK, JU~ A12 0514 00047 CALC, SRC P7 0516 00246 RAR /PUT TlF IN C
0518 00238 RD2 /READ Tl INPUT
0519 00018 JCN CN A2 /JMP IF TlF SET
0521 00245 RAL /PUT Tl IN C
0522 00018 ~C~ C~ Al /JMP IF Tl TRUE
0526 00231 WR3 /SET TlF
0527 00041 Al, SRC P4 0528 00237 RDl 0529 00245 RAL . /PUT EXPA~D IN C
0535 00064 INTLK, JUN INTCK
0537 00245 A2, RAL /PUT Tl IN C
0538 00026 JC~CZ Al /JMP IF Tl FALSE
0542 00231 WR3 /CLR TlF
0543 D0032 A5, FIM P0 10110000B
0545 00034 ~IM Pl O
0547 00084 A3, JMS DG5CH /SEE IF DIG WANTED THERE
:`00045 0556 00084 JMS DGSCH /MAKE SURE DIGIT STILLTHER~
~00035 :0563 00041 SRC P4 ~00057 . 0567 00248 DAC
.~0568 00224 WRM /RUN TIMER TOWARD 0 0569 00084 MOTCK, JMS ARICL
` 00172 .` 0571 00045 SRC P6 :: 0572 00210 LDM 2 /RIG SIGNS SO SUBTRACT
0573 00228 WR0 /ROUTINE WILL ADD '~
, 0574 00034 FIM Pl 11100B
: 00028 :-' 0576 00035 SRC Pl ~ 0577 00209 LDM
.~ 0578 00224 WRM /ENTER BAND IN ARI
-'.0579 00034 FIM Pl llOllB /BAND
^0581 00036 FIM P2 5 /TARGET
.~ 00005 . 00176 0585 00036 FIM P2 llollB
:j 00148 . 0589 00034 FIM Pl llollB /TARGET+BAND
: 0591 00036 FIM P2 0 /WGT
.: 00000 .,. 0594 00208 LDM 0 :~ 0595 00228` WR0 /BOTH SIGNS ARE ~ :
;`0596 00081 JMS SUBTR /WGT-tTARGET+BAND) .; 00176 ~0598 00020 JCN AZ MOTN /~AVE MOTION IF ~
:~ 00144 :
0602 00034 FIM Pl 11100B :~:
. 00028 .
~0604 00209 LDM 1 /LD BAND OF 1 .~.
... .
,~
,`. '~ - 109 -~,: . .
...
, ' . . .
:' .
, 0605 00035 SRC Pl 507 00C34 FIM Pl 11011B /BAND
0615 00081 JMS MoV5 0617 00034 FIM Pl 11011B /TARGET-BAND
0621 00081 JMS SUBTR /WGT--(TARGET--BAND) ':0623 00028 JCN AN MOTN /HAVE MOTION IF --: 00144 0626 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIO~F
0627 000 20 JCN AZ I~DTGT/JMP IF ALEtEADY ~O I~OTN
` 00151 0631 00246 RAR /PUT C~T BIT 0 I~ C
~0632 00026. . JCI!~ CZ Bl /J~P IF NOT SET
:~00125 0634 00210 LDM 2 /CNT = 2 ..0635 00066 JUN B3 0637 00246 Bl, RAR /PUT CNT BIT 1 IN C
: 00131 0640 00211 LDM 3 /CNT = 3 . 0641 00066 JUN B3 ' 00132 : 0643 00209 B2, LDM 1 /CNT = 1 . 0644 00176 B3, XCH R0 /SAVE IN R0 :` 0645 00045 SRC P6 0647 00242 IAC /INC CUR HIT C~T
0650 00028 JCN A~ SUBDI/~OT ENOUGH H`ITS YET
'. 0652 00043 SRC P5 0656 00045 MOTN, SRC P6 0660 00229 WRl /TURN OFF 1/4 GRAD I ~ P
; 0663 00034 UDTGT, FIM Pl 0 -. .
.~ ` .
, . . - .. . .
- 0669 00084 SUBDI, JMS LDTAR /SCAN TARE KEYS
: 00057 `0673 00034 FIM Pl 11110B
`"0675 00035 SRC Pl .:`.0676 00216 LDM 8 /DIGITAL INITIAL OF 8LB
:.0678 00034 FIM Pl 11011B
` 00027 .0680 00036 . FIM P2 0 `~ 00000 :`0682 00081 JMS SUBTR /SUB DIGITAL INITIAL
: 00176 0684 00081 JMS SWSGN /SET SIGN,MOVE RESULT TO WG' . 00135 .:.0686 00041 SRC P4 0687 00237 RDl /READ E~PAND INPUT
, 00193 : 0691 00034 FIM Pl 0 ; 00000 ~10693 00036 FIM P2 110100B
, 00052 ~0695 00081 . JMS MOV4 . `-:~ 00162 .
~ 0697 00034 FIM Pl 11 /CLR AUTO-ZERO AREA
iooo l l :,0699 00084 JMS ARICL~2 ~i 00174 J 0701 00221 LDM .13 0702 00229 WRl /TURN OFF 1/4 GRAD LAMP -'. 0703 00065 JUN OUTPT /JMP TO OUTPUT,WILL RETURN . -~
1 ooooo .~ /DIRECTLY TO MOTN CHK ROUTINE
:3 0705 00041 A8, SRC P4 :~l 0706 00239 RD3 .~ 0707 00245 RAL /PUT A-Z CORR EXP IN C
:'0710 00084 JMS ARICL
; 00172 ~,0712 00034 FIM Pl lllolB
0714 00035 SRC Pl :~0715 00214 LDM 6 ~0716 00224 WRM /PUT .6 IN ARI
',J0717 00034 FIM Pl 11011B
;1 00027 :'~0719 00036 FIM P2 0 00176 JMS SUBTR /SUB .6 FROM WGT
i.~0723 00020 JCN AZ A12LK ~JMP IF WGT GE .6 :1 0000.0 ., .
,~ , .
.. . .
: .
, .
.',,--. - "
: ` . . , `. :,. . -:: : : -; . - -` , .
~0730 00208 LDM O
::0732 00231 WR3 /WRITE TO A~Z SGN
.~0733 00034 FIM Pl O
': 00000 .~073S 00036 FIM P2 11 ': 00011 0737 00081 JMS MoV5 /MOVE WGT TO A-Z
0739 00081 A8A, JMS SUBAZ /SUB AUTO-ZERO FROM WGT
oolls :0741 00081 JMS SWSGN /SET SIGN. MOVE RESULT TO WGT
~`0743 00084 JMS ARICL
: 00172 :0745 00034 FIM Pl lllllB
~:0747 00035 SRC Pl ~0750 00034 FIM Pl llOllB
:~ 00027 .~0752 00081 JMS EWSGN /SUB OVERCAP FROM WGT
`' 00166 ~.0754 00043 SRC P5 :~
:i0755 00028 JCN AN A9 .
-` 00250 :0757 00236 RDO .. -`~0758 00245 RAL
:'0759 00250 STC /SET OVERCAP
j0760 00066 JUN A10 0762 00236 A9, RDO
.~0764 00241 CLC /CLR OVERCAP
0765 00246 A10, RAR
;0767 00239 RD3 /READ MOTIONF
~0768 00020 JCN AZ All /JMP IF NO MOTION
: 00012 0772 OOOI8 JC~ CN A12 /JMP IF SET TRUE
'~ 00090 0774 00034 FIM Pl llOlOOB
'0776 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK WGT
; 00163 ~0778 00065 JUN OUTPT
`i 00000 `0780 00084 All, J~S ARICL
~l 00172 ,0782 00034 FIM Pl llOllB
, 7 00027 '0784 00035 SRC Pl ;' . . .
. .
,1 y - 112 -. :', .. . ~, . . . ,, . ' :
.. , -, :. .
~185 00213 LDM S
0786 00224 WRM /WANT .005 IN ARI
0789 00081 JMS SUBTR /MAG WGT ~ .005 0792 00028 JCN AN A7 /JMP IF LT .005 0795 00229 WRl /SET 1/4 GRAD LAMP
0798 00240 A7, CLB
0799 00034 FIM Pl 0 0801 00035 SRC Pl 0804 00018 JCN CN A7B /JMP IF WGT LE .002 0806 00220 LDM 12 /LD A 12 TO 1/4 G LMP ~:
0807 00229 WRI /A~D LET IT INC ONCE .
0808 00237 A7B~ RDl /RD 1/4 GRP~ LAMP
0812 00229 WRl /UPDATE 1/4 GRAD LAMP
,0813 00161 A7A~ LD Rl /LOAD ZERO CNTR :
:'100090 0l0816 00043 SRC P5 .
l0817 00234 RDR :
;.0818 00245 RAL /PUT A-Z I~H IN C ~ -0819 00026 JCN CZ A12 /JMP IF TRUE ~-`., 00090 '- ~ ..
~00172 :~l 0823 00043 SRC P5 '0825 00246 RAR
0826 00246 RAR /PUT WGT SG~ IN LOW ORDER BIT
0827 00244 CMA /COM ACC FOR A-Z CO~RECTION
-:0828 00045 SRC P6 .0829 00228 WR0 /STORE IN SIGN STATUS
`.j 0830 00239 RD3 /READ A-Z SIGN
-.,0831 00246 RAR
0832 00236 RD0 r ;0834 00228 WR0 /E~TER TO SIGN STATUS
l0835 oao34 FIM Pl 11011B
;00027 ;.0837 00035 SRC Pl j0838 00209 LDM
,0839 00224 WRM
;~0840 00036 FIM P2 11 OOOIl 0842 00081 JMS SU8TR /CORRECT A-Z BY .001 .0844 00045 SRC P6 /ENTER RESULTING SIGN
. . .
.
~ 113 ~
. ... . . . .. . .
. : : : ., .. , . , . -:.- ' : . :
,: , : : .
.,:- : . . - - .. .. :
.
.
0845 00231 WR3 /TO ~-% SIGN
0851 00232 SBM /SU8 A-Z .XXX PROM .6 ~0852 00020 JCN AZ Al2 /JMP IF A-Z OUT OF RANGE
:~00090 0858 00034 Al2~ FIM Pl 11001B
`0860 00035 SRC Pl 0867`00034 FIM Pl 101011B
, .00043 00166`
.00135 . 0873 00241 CLC .
0878 00034 FIM Pl 0880 00036 FIM P2 llolooB /MOVE HIGH 4 DIG OF
0884 00161 LD Rl /LD ZERO CNTR
`~,0887 00236 RD0 ~'0888 00245 RAL
~'0889 00245 RAL
;0893 00228 WR0 0894 00047 A27, SRC P7 /SELECT PRINT MODE SWITCH
0895 C0237 RDl /READ BY CNT
30898 00.034 FIM Pl 100000B
-~ 00032 .,0900 00036 FIM P2 1100008 `.0902 00081 JMS MOV4 /PUT P/L8 SW IN P/LB OUT
` 00162 `.0904 00038 FIM P3 1001008 , .
- 114 - ~
~06Z290 090G 00039 SRC P3 /SELECT P/CNT SW VEC~ 1 0908 00028 JCN AN A14 ~IF NON-ZERO PUT IT IN
~0913 00216 LDM 8 /MUST ADD 8 TO DECK 2 :0914 00235 ADM
0915 00043 A14, SRC P5 .0916 00224 WRM /ENCODE CNT IN P/LB OUT
~`0917 00034 FIM Pl 101010B
0919 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OLD CNT VALUE
0920 00241 CLC /NErA CNT VALUE IN ACC
0922 00020 JCN AZ A16 /JMP IF SAME :
: 0924 00043 SRC P5 .~- -0925 00233 RDM /READ NEW CNT .
:0926 00035 SRC Pl .: : -0927 00224 Al3~ WRM /UPDATE OLD CNT ~ .-`0928 00066 JUN INTLK-3 /GO TO SET INTF : :
00020 : .
~.0930 00034 A16, FIM Pl 100000B
:` 00032 '0932 00036 FIM P2 111000B
~ 00056 '~0934 00081 JMS MOV4 /PUT P/LB SW IN VALUE OUT ~ -'-1 00162 ;`~!0936 00068 JUN A25 .'1 00010 :.`.0938 00034 Al7~ FIM Pl 101010B
:`` 00042 ;~1 0940 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT OLD CNT VALUE
i; 0941 00233 RDM
`-~ . 0942 00020 JCN AZ A15 /JMP IF WAS BY WGT
~:~ 00179 0944 00240 CLB /CNT VALUE=O FOR BY WGT
~ 00159 -.0947 00034 A15, PIM Pl 100000B
:~ . 00032 J0953 00034 A18, FIM Pl llooooB /P/LB OUT IS MULTIPLIER
-~ 00048 ':0955 00036 FIM P2 110100B /WGT OUT IS MULTIPLICAND
. 00052 ~0957 00240 CLB /ENTER MULTIPLY ROUTINE
.. ~ 0958 00185XCH R9 /CLR S~IFT CNTR
;~0959 obo38 FIM P3 10000B /SET DEST POINTER
~0961 00032 FIM P0 looollooB /LOAD 8 CNTR AND 4 CNTR
; 00140 i0963 00240 CL8 :i~0964 00039 ML, SRC P3/POINT TO DEST DIG
.. . . .
..i ... .
'` ,. . : ., :-~ '. - :' ' :0967 00112 ISZ R0 Ml /LOOP 8 TIMES
0969 00241 M2, CLC .
0971 00183 XCH R7 /S~IFT DEST PNTR BY IT
: 0972 00035 SRC Pl /SELECT MULTIPLIER DIG
:0974 00244 CMA /FORM (DIG NOT)+l FOR CNTR
:0975 00242 IAC
0976 00020 JCN AZ M7 /SKIP IP DIG=0 ~ 00231 :~0978 00184 XCEI R8 /R8 IS DIG ADD CNTR
0979 00220 M3, LDM 12 /SET MULTIPLICAND CNTR = 4 '0981 00037 M4, SRC P2 /SELECT MULTIPLICAND DIG
0984 00235. ADM /ADD IT
0991 00d81 JMS ROFFl /ADD POSSIBLE CARRY
. 00110 .0993 00169- M6, LD R9 0994 00183 XCH R7 /DEST PNTR = SHIFT CNTR
~0995 00212 LDM 4 /RESTORE ~LPLCND PNTR
y0996 00181 XCH R5 ~0997 00120 ISZ R8 M3 /LOOP UNTIL ADDS DONE - : .
:: 00211 0999 00105 M7, INC R9 /INC SHIFT CNT
`1000 00099 INC R3 /INC MULTIPLIER PNTR -:
.. .1001 00113 ISZ Rl M2 /LOOP UNTIL JOB DONE
1003 00038 FIM P3 10001B /SET ROUNDOFF PNTR :
~ 1006 00081 JMS RNDOF
.` 001Q6 1008 00040 FIM P4 lloooB /RESTORE P4 ~ 00024 , 1010 00034 FIM Pl 10010B
: .1012 00036 FIM P2 1110008 :'. 00056 . 1014 00081 JMS MOV4 /MOVE RESULT TO VALUE OUT
j 00162 ;' 1016 00034 PIM Pl 10110B
¦ 1018 00035 SRC Pl 1019 00233 . RDM /V00.=0 IF NOT OVERVAL
1020 00068 JUN 10.24 .~ . .
;~ . , ' . . . .
,, .
.
':
.
, .: . - ' .:
,: :
. . ~ :, .
lO~;ZZ90 1026 00034 FIM Pl llloooB
: 1029 00084 JMS BLANK+l /ZERO VALVE OUT
.. ~ 1032 00043 A24, SRC P5 1033 00229 WRl /UPDATE OVERVAL FLG
~ 1034 00043 A25, SRC P5 :1035 00234 RDR /READ SELECTIVE BLNK INP
;1036 00246 RAR /PUT P/LB BLNK IN C
~:1037 00180 XCH R4 ``
1038 00018 JCN CN Al9 /JMP IF NO BLNK
1040 00034 FIM Pl llooooB
~ 00048 ; 1042 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK P/LB
..1044 00224 WRM /PUT ZERO IN HIGH ORDER P/LB
: 1045 00180 Al9, XCH R4 1046 002~6 RAR /PUT WGT BLNK IN C
~ 1047 00180 XCH R4 .' 1048 00047 SRC P7 .` 1049 00237 RDl /RD BY CNT
i~ 1050 00020 JCN AZ A28 /JMP IF BY WGT
., .00029 .~ 1052 00243 CMC /INVERT BLANK LOGIC
`1053 00018 A28, JCN. CN A20 ~ 00035 :.1055 00034 FIM Pl 110100B
.~ 00052 1057 00084 J~S BLANK /BLANK WGT
~ 00163 .'1059 00180 A20, XCH R4 `~1060 00246 RAR /PUT VALUE BLNK IN C
:1061 00018 JCN CN A21 ": `00043 '1063 00034 FIM Pl llloooB
~ 00056 :.1065 00084 JMS BLANK /BLANK VALUE
' ` 00163 :]1067 00065 A21, JUN OUTPT
:' 00000 .:1069 00035 DGSCH, SRC Pl /SUBROUTINE TO CHK FOR
~`1070 00210 LDM 2 /PROPER DIG FROM A/D CONV
-~1071 00225 WMP /0010 SELECTS DIG SLCT INP
~1072 00234 A4, RDR
~1073 00244 CMA
:1074 00241 CLC
-~1075 00252 KBP /CONVERT 1 OF 4 CODE TO BIN
:!1076 00147 SUB R3 /SUB DESIRED WGT DIG ADD.
`1077 00028 JCN AN A6 /JMP IF WRING
;:i 00056 :;1079 00192 8BL 0 . !1080 00193 A6, BBL
:i1081 00032 LDTAR. FIM P0 11100000B /R0=2 CNTR
.'00224 :`.,1083 00034 FIM Pl loolllB
~ . 00039 : . .
. . .
.; .
~ - 117 -~ . ' . ' .. .
.
, , .
1085 000~5 SRC P6 '087 00225 WMP /SLCT SW INPUTS
,088 00163 TARl, LD R3 /LD SW POINT~R
1093 00035 SRC Pl 1095 00099 I~C R3 `1096 00112 ISZ RO TARl /LOOP 2 TIMES
1098 00045 TAR2, SRC P6 1100 00028 JC~ A~ ENTAT /JMP IF SET
~1107 00233 RDM /RD .T
i1108 00020 JCN AZ B4 /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
00099 ' ' ;00114 ;~1112 00037 SRC P2 1113 00233 RDM /RD .T
1115 00026 JCN CZ NOTAR /JMP IF NO TARE WA~TED
.1117 00246 RAR
`~1118 00018 JCN CN ENTAT /JMP IF AUTO TARE
:00132 L120 00233 RDM /RD .. T
`'1122 00224 WRM /WRITE TO TARE OUT
~1123 00036 B4, FIM P2 100111B
:00039 s1125 00038 FIM P3 101100B
'00044 1128 00233 RDM /RD .OT
~1129 00020 JCN AZ TIMCK-l /JMP IF NOT PRESSED
:~-00113 '~00114 :.1133 00037 SRC P2 `i1134 00233 RDM /RD .0T
;1137 00192 B8L 0 1138 00216 TIMCK, LDM 8 1139 00047 SRC P7 :
.1141 00041 SRC P4 :1142 00233 RDM /RD TARE TIMER
:1143 00028 JCN AN TIMCK-l /JMP IF RU~NING
. 00113 ~ .
:, , . . . . .
. , - ' - '` ~' ::
- lO~;Z290 .~45 00221 LDM 13 1.147 00034 FIM Pl 101011B
1149 00068 JUN ARICL+2 /CLR TARE
1151 00084 ~OTAR, JMS NOTAR-4 /MA Æ SURE TARE CLEARED
` 1156 00045 ENTAT, SRC P6 :1158 00230 WR2 /SET AUTO TARE FLG
1159 00034 FIM Pl 11001B
~- 1161 0003S SRC Pl : 1162 00233 RDM /RD WGT RDY FLG
;:~ 1163 00020 JCN AZ ENTAT-l /JMP IF NOT RDY
~ 1165 00240 CLB , -: 1169 00245 RAL
. 1170 00245 RAL /PUT WGT SGN IN C
- 1171 00018 JCN CN CLATF /JMP IF MI~US
' 00158 1174 00028 JCN AN ENTAT~l /JMP IF MOTN
~; 00131 j 1176 00034 FIM Pl 0 ,'. 00000 ~ 1178 00036 FIM P2 101011B
-l ~0043 ~ 1180 00081 JMS MOV5 /ENTER WGT AS TARE
: 00148 1182 00045 CLATF, SRC P6 :`: 1183 00240 CLB
: 1184 00230 WR2 /CLR AUTO TARE FL&
:~1185 00068 JUN ~OTAR+2 : /ROUTINE TO BLANK 4 CHARS
~1187 00223 BLANK, LDM 15 /LD A BLANK
:: 1188 00032 FIM P0 11000000B /LD A 4 CNTR TO R0 1190 00035 BLNKl, SRC Pl /Pl HOLDS ADDRESS
` 1191 00224 WRM /WRITE BLANK
~ 1193 00112 ISZ R0 BLNKl /LOOP 4 TIMES
;~ 00166 .: 1195 00192 BBL 0 /ARITHMETIC AREA CLR ROUTINE
/CLRS 5 DIGITS. USED BEFORE SUBTRACT
1196 00034 ARICL, FIM Pl 11011B /MEM REG 1, CHAR 11 . 00027 ` 1198 00240 CLB
1200 00228 WR0. ~CLR SIGN STATUS .-1201 00035 ACLRl, SRC Pl .
. ~ .
:. " . ' , 1~2 00224 W~*l /WRITE A 0 l~Q3 00115 ISZ R3 ACLRl /LOOP 5 TIMES
/ROUTIN~. TO READ 1 WRD OF DISCRETE INP
1206 00161 RDINP, LD Rl /Rl HOLDS MLPX ADD.
1207 00045 SRC P6 /SELECT X~0 1211 00231 WR3 /WRITE INPUT TO STA~US 3 1212 00097 I~C Rl/INC MLP~ ADD.
.1213 00192 BBL 0 1214 00034 PCHK3, FIM Pl 101000B
1216 00035 SRC Pl : .1218 00210 LDM 2 - 1219 00232 SBM /SUB .T FROM 2 1220 00028 JC~ AN PCHK4 /JMP IF NO TARE NOT PRESSED
:00224 1222 00034 FIM Pl 1.10000B
:- 1224 00036 FIM P2 110000B
j 1226 00081 JMS MOV4 /SEE IF P/P 0 1228 00151 LD Rl : 1229 00028 JC~ P~ PC~K4 /JMP IF ~OT O
~1231 00228 WR0 /CLR SET, MI~US, OVERCAP
`i-1232 00209 LDM
:,~1233 00230 WR2 /SE PRI~T
-~1234 00081 JMS OUTPT
~1236 00034 - FIM Pl 6 ::~ 00006 1238 00112 PCHK5, ISZ R0 PCHK5 ,1240 00113 ISZ Rl PCHK5 1244 00115 ISZ R3 PCHKS /1.1 SEC DELAY
1248 00084 PCHK4, JMS ARICL
i 00172 1250 00064 JUN PCHK+2 ~ 00039 , ~ .
. . . .
., .
' .
- . . . . ~ ~,. .. ..
Claims
PROPERTY OR PRIVILEGE IS CLAIMED ARE DEFINED AS FOLLOWS:
1. A computing and printing weighing scale comprising, in combination, an integrated circuit microcomputer, load cell means for supplying weight data, data input means including four data input buses for supplying price data, said microcomputer computing the value of successive weighed articles from such weight and price data, such data-being supplied to said microcomputer on the four data input buses, and interface means for multiplexing such data onto said four data input buses and including four decoders, each having a single output connected to a different one of said data input buses.
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
CA312,635A CA1062290A (en) | 1975-04-30 | 1978-10-04 | Value computing scale |
Applications Claiming Priority (3)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US05/573,147 US3962569A (en) | 1974-01-18 | 1975-04-30 | Value computing scale |
CA251,481A CA1062292A (en) | 1975-04-30 | 1976-04-29 | Value computing scale |
CA312,635A CA1062290A (en) | 1975-04-30 | 1978-10-04 | Value computing scale |
Publications (1)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
CA1062290A true CA1062290A (en) | 1979-09-11 |
Family
ID=27164444
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
CA312,635A Expired CA1062290A (en) | 1975-04-30 | 1978-10-04 | Value computing scale |
Country Status (1)
Country | Link |
---|---|
CA (1) | CA1062290A (en) |
-
1978
- 1978-10-04 CA CA312,635A patent/CA1062290A/en not_active Expired
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US3986012A (en) | Digital weight measuring and computing apparatus with automatic zero correction | |
US3984667A (en) | Motion detecting scale | |
US3962569A (en) | Value computing scale | |
US4139892A (en) | Electronic postage scale | |
US2987704A (en) | Variable monitoring and recording apparatus | |
US4004139A (en) | Digital scale with means to shift displayed weight to show fraction of least normally displayed graduation | |
CA1106501A (en) | Operator prompting system | |
US7813973B2 (en) | Inventory monitoring system | |
US4462473A (en) | Apparatus for electronically determining postage in response to weight | |
US3962570A (en) | Scale with manual tare entry | |
US3716706A (en) | Piece counting system | |
US3826319A (en) | Scale motion detector | |
US3869005A (en) | Value computing scale | |
US4310893A (en) | Digital scale | |
CA1056858A (en) | Digital scale | |
CA1075273A (en) | Computing weighing scale | |
JPS59180438A (en) | Method and device for continuously weighing classified product | |
US4159521A (en) | Digital scale with antifraud features | |
CA1106064A (en) | Digital scale | |
US4376981A (en) | Electronic postage metering system | |
CA1062290A (en) | Value computing scale | |
US3921736A (en) | Motion detector for a weighing scale | |
US4091449A (en) | Computing scale system | |
US3276526A (en) | Automatic weigher with separately controlled type setting and label printing means | |
US3262639A (en) | Automatic weighing and computing and registering system |